Autonomous Sylabus

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)
AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025

REGULATIONS: MEPCO - R2015 (FULL TIME)
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)
B. E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
Department Vision Department Mission

To Render Services to Meet the Growing To Provide the Students a Rigorous Learning Experience in
Global Challenges of Engineering Understanding
Industries Basics of Electrical & Electronics Engineering Built on the
by Educating Students to become Foundation of Science, Mathematics, Computing, and
Exemplary Technology by Emphasizing
Professional Electrical and Electronics Active Learning with Strongly Supported Laboratory
Engineers of High Ethics Component
and Prepare them for Professional Careers
UG Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

I. Preparation: To prepare students to excel in Industry or in Postgraduate Programmes by Educating
Students along with High moral values and Knowledge.
II. Core Competence: To provide students with the fundamentals of Engineering Sciences with more
emphasis in Electrical and Electronics Engineering by way of analyzing and exploiting engineering
challenges in disparate systems during their professional career.
III. Breadth: To train students with good scientific and engineering breadth so as to comprehend, analyze,
design, and create novel products and solutions for the real life problems.
IV. Professionalism: To inculcate professional and ethical attitude, effective communication skills,
teamwork skills, multidisciplinary approach, entrepreneurial thinking and an ability to relate engineering
issues to broader social context in students.
V. Learning environment: To provide students with an academic environment aware of excellence,
leadership, written ethical codes and guidelines, and the self motivated life-long learning needed for a
successful professional career.
UG Programme Outcomes (POs)

1. Graduates will demonstrate knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an
engineering specialization to the conceptualization of engineering models.
2. Graduates will exhibit an ability to identify, formulate, research literature and solve engineering
problems.
3. Graduate will reveal an ability to design electrical and electronic circuits and conduct experiments with
electrical systems, analyze and interpret data.
4. Graduate will demonstrate an ability to visualize and work on laboratory and multidisciplinary tasks.
5. Graduate will demonstrate skills to use modern engineering tools, software and equipment to analyze
problems.
6. Graduate will exhibit knowledge of professional and ethical responsibilities.
7. Graduate will be able to communicate effectively in both verbal and written form.
8. Graduate will show the understanding of impact of engineering solutions on the society and also will be
aware of contemporary issues.
9. Graduate will develop confidence for self education and ability for life-long learning.
10. Graduates can participate and succeed in competitive examinations.
CURRICULUM (I to VIII SEMESTER)

SEMESTER – I (Common to all UG Programmes)
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. 15HS101 Technical English – I 3 0 2 4
2. 15BS101 Mathematics – I 3 2 0 4
3. 15BS102 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3
4. 15BS103 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3
1
5. 15GE101 Computer Programming 3 0 0 3
6. 15GE102 Engineering Graphics 2 0 4 4
PRACTICAL
7. 15BS151 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15GE151 Computer Programming Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15GE152 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 17 2 18 27
SEMESTER II – Electrical and Electronics Engineering

SL. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
NO.
THEORY
1. 15HS201 Technical English – II* 3 0 0 3
2. 15BS201 Mathematics – II* 3 2 0 4
3. 15BS202 Environmental Science and Disaster Management* 3 0 0 3
4. 15BS204 Materials Science 3 0 0 3
(Common to EEE / ECE / CSE / IT)
5. 15GE203 Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering 3 0 0 3
(Common to EEE / ECE)
6. 15EE201 Electric Circuit Theory 3 2 0 4
PRACTICAL
7. 15BS251 Applied Physics and Environmental Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 4 2
(Common to EEE / ECE / CSE / Mech / IT / Bio-Tech)
8. 15EE251 Electrical Circuits Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 4 8 24
* Common to all UG Programmes
SEMESTER – III
THEORY
1. 15MA302 Mathematics III - Transforms and Probability Distributions 3 2 0 4
2. 15EE301 Measurement and Instrumentation System 3 0 0 3
3. 15EE302 Electronic Devices and Circuits 3 0 0 3
4. 15EE303 Electric and Magnetic Fields 3 2 0 4
5. 15EE304 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 2 0 4
6. 15EE305 Electrical Power Generation and Utilization 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15EE351 Measurements and Instrumentation Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15EE352 Electronic Devices and Circuits laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15HS351 Presentation Skills Laboratory
(Common to CIVIL / EEE / CSE) 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 18 6 10 26
SEMESTER – IV
THEORY
1. 15MA402 Mathematics IV - Numerical and Statistical Techniques 3 2 0 4
(Common to EEE / Mechanical)
2. 15EE401 DC Machines and Transformers 3 2 0 4
3. 15EE402 Control Systems Engineering 3 2 0 4
4. 15EE403 Transmission and Distribution 3 2 0 4
5. 15EC405 Linear integrated Circuits and Applications 3 0 0 3
6. 15EC406 Digital Logic Circuits 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15EE451 DC Machines and Transformers Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15EE452 Control Systems laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15EC453 Linear and Digital Integrated Circuits Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 8 12 28
2
SEMESTER – V
THEORY
1. 15EE501 Induction and Synchronous Machines 3 2 0 4
2. 15EE502 Power Electronics 3 0 0 3
3. 15EE503 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective –I 3 0 0 3
5. Allied Elective –I 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective –I 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15EE551 Induction and Synchronous Machines Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15EE552 OOPS Laboratory for Electrical Engineers 0 2 4 3
9. 15HS551 Professional Communication Skills Laboratory 0 0 4 2
(Common to CIVIL / EEE / CSE)
TOTAL 18 4 12 26
SEMESTER – VI
THEORY
1. 15EE601 Electrical Drives 3 0 0 3
2. 15EE602 Power System Analysis 3 2 0 4
3. 15EE603 Design of Electrical Machines 3 2 0 4
4. Core Elective-II 3 0 0 3
5. Allied Elective-II 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective-II 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15EE651 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15EE652 Power Electronics and Drives Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15EE653 Technical Seminar** 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 18 4 10 25
** Internal Assessment only
SEMESTER – VII
THEORY
1. 15EE701 Power System Operation and Control 3 0 0 3
2. 15EE702 Protection and Switchgear 3 0 0 3
3. Core Elective-III 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective-IV 3 0 0 3
5. Core Elective-V 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective-III 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15EE751 Power System Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15EE752 Mini Project** 0 0 2 1
9. 15EE753 Comprehensive Skill Development ** 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 18 0 8 22
** Internal Assessment only
SEMESTER – VIII
THEORY
1. Core Elective-VI 3 0 0 3
2. Open Elective-IV 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
3. 15EE851 Project work 0 0 12 6
TOTAL 6 0 12 12
Total Credits: 190 (Regular)

Total Credits: 139 (LES)
3
CORE ELECTIVE – I (V Semester)
SL. COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
NO. CODE
1. 15EEC01 Processing of Digital Signals 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEC02 Field Computation 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEC03 Digital Control System 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – II (VI Semester)

SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15EEC04 Advanced Control System 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEC05 Renewable Energy Sources 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEC06 High Voltage Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEC07 Illumination, Wiring and Estimation 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – III (VII Semester)

SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15EEC08 Special Electrical Machines 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEC09 Power System Transients 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEC10 Power System Stability 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEC11 SCADA and DCS 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – IV (VII Semester)

SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15EEC12 Computer Networks 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEC13 Advanced Power Electronics 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEC14 Power Quality 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEC15 Advanced Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – V (VII Semester)

SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15EEC16 Smart Grid 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEC17 Soft Computing Techniques 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEC18 Robotics 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEC19 Numerical Protection 3 0 0 3
5. 15EEC20 High Voltage Direct Current Transmission 3 0 0 3
CORE ELECTIVE – VI (VIII Semester)

SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15EEC21 Flexible AC Transmission Systems 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEC22 Restructured Power System 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEC23 Power System Dynamics 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEC24 Bio Medical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
ALLIED ELECTIVES - CURRICULUM
Offered by Civil Department
V Semester
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15CEA01 Industrial Pollution Prevention and Control 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEA02 Introduction to Engineering Seismology 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEA03 Solar Energy Utilization 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEA04 Environmental Geotechnology 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEA05 Principles of Global Positioning System 3 0 0 3
4
VI Semester
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15CEA06 Non-Conventional Energy Resources 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEA07 Energy Conservation and management 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEA08 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEA09 Fundamentals of Supply Chain 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEA10 Coastal Engineering 3 0 0 3
6. 15CEA11 Manufacturing Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3
Offered by ECE Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15ECA01 Communication Systems 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECA02 Microprocessors and Applications 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECA03 MATLAB Programming 2 0 2 3
4. 15ECA04 Antenna Fundamentals 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECA05 Television Engineering 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15ECA06 Remote Sensing Techniques 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECA07 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECA08 Optical Communication 3 0 0 3
4. 15ECA09 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECA10 Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3
Offered by CSE Department
V SEMESTER
SL COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15CSA01 Internet Programming 3 0 0 3
2. 15CSA02 Fundamentals of Software Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. 15CSA03 Introduction to Database 3 0 0 3
4. 15CSA04 Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms 3 0 0 3
5. 15CSA05 Fundamentals of Operating Systems 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
COURSE
SL NO. COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
1. 15CSA06 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 3 0 0 3
2. 15CSA07 Principles of Multimedia 3 0 0 3
3. 15CSA08 Introduction to Genetic Algorithms 3 0 0 3
4. 15CSA09 XML Programming 3 0 0 3
5. 15CSA10 Introduction to UML 3 0 0 3
6. 15CSA11 Introduction to Computer Organization 3 0 0 3
5
Offered by Mechanical Department
V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15MEA01 Automotive Maintenance and Pollution Control 3 0 0 3
2. 15MEA02 Fundamentals of Energy Resources 3 0 0 3
3. 15MEA03 Manufacturing for Industrial Electronics 3 0 0 3
4. 15MEA04 Human Factors in Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. 15MEA05 Decision Support Systems 3 0 0 3
6. 15MEA06 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3
7. 15MEA07 Nano Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 15MEA08 Fuel Cell & Hydrogen Energy 3 0 0 3
9. 15MEA09 Bio-Mechanics and human body vibration 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15MEA10 Fundamentals of Thermal Science 3 0 0 3
2. 15MEA11 Fundamentals of Lithography 3 0 0 3
3. 15MEA12 Fundamentals of Fire Safety Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15MEA13 High Energetic Material - Propellants 3 0 0 3
5. 15MEA14 Direct Digital Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
6. 15MEA15 Instrumental Analysis of Materials 3 0 0 3
7. 15MEA16 Basics of Aircraft and Space Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 15MEA17 Introduction to MATLAB with Engineering Applications 3 0 0 3
9. 15MEA18 Micro and Nano Fabrication 3 0 0 3
10. 15MEA19 Fundamentals of Nature Inspired Algorithms 3 0 0 3
11. 15MEA20 Energy Efficient Buildings 3 0 0 3
12. 15MEA21 Water Treatment Technology 3 0 0 3
Offered by IT Department
V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ITA01 Introduction to Computer Graphics 3 0 0 3
2. 15ITA02 Rich Internet Application 3 0 0 3
3. 15ITA03 Introduction to Java 3 0 0 3
4. 15ITA04 Perl 3 0 0 3
5. 15ITA05 Fuzzy Systems 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ITA06 Graphics Programming 3 0 0 3
2. 15ITA07 PHP Programming 3 0 0 3
3. 15ITA08 Android Application Development 3 0 0 3
4. 15ITA09 Python Programming 3 0 0 3
5. 15ITA10 Decision Making Methods 3 0 0 3
6
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BTA01 Basic Cell and Molecular Biology 3 0 0 3
2. 15BTA02 Basic Microbiology 3 0 0 3
3. 15BTA03 Basic Biochemistry 3 0 0 3
4. 15BTA04 Basic immunology 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BTA05 Chemicals in Environment and Public Health 3 0 0 3
2. 15BTA06 Biological Waste Management 3 0 0 3
3. 15BTA07 Nanobiotechnology 3 0 0 3
4. 15BTA08 Human Physiology 3 0 0 3
Offered by MBA Department
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BAA01 Essentials of Finance 3 0 0 3
2. 15BAA02 Essentials of Marketing 3 0 0 3
3. 15BAA03 Essentials of Human Resource Management 3 0 0 3
7
15HS101 Technical English – I LT P C
(Common to all UG Programmes)
3 02 4
Course Objectives are to:
 enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary

 improve grammatical accuracy
 develop language functions
 understand the basic nuances of language
Course Outcomes:
 The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to build up their vocabulary
 Grammatical accuracy will be improved
 Language functions will be developed
 The basic nuances of language will be understood
UNIT- I 12
Listening–Importance of listening- Types of listening - Listening to audio files and understanding the concept;
Speaking -Speaking about one’s place, important festivals etc. – Introducing oneself, one’s family / friend; Asking
for Information; Reading - Skimming and Scanning - Note-making - Reading comprehension exercises; Writing -
Free writing on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobbies / School life, etc.) - Sentence completion-
Autobiographical writing (writing about one’s leisure time activities, hometown, etc.) - Creative Writing;
Grammar–Parts of Speech- Kinds of Sentences- Framing questions; Vocabulary -Word formation - Word
expansion
UNIT- II 12
Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Listening exercises with sample telephone
conversations; Speaking - Describing a simple process (filling a form, etc.) - Asking & answering questions on
various everyday activities: Telephone skills – Telephone etiquette. Reading – Critical reading - Finding key
information in a given text and paraphrasing - Sifting facts from opinions; Value Based Text Reading and
thematic analysis. Writing: Informal letter – Letter to the editor (Regarding Social Issues) - Single line Definitions
– Recommendations- Paragraph Writing; (cause & effect / compare & contrast / narrative / analytical)
Grammar– tense - Use of sequence words - Adverbs -; Vocabulary –prefixes and Suffixes -Compound words.
UNIT- III 12
Listening - Listening to specific task - focused audio tracks - Listening to different accents - Watching videos /
documentaries and responding to questions based on them and giving personal opinion.
Speaking - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, officials, foreigners); Role-play and Simulation
Reading - Reading and interpreting data given as visual material. Writing– Coherence and cohesion in writing- -
Channel conversion -Process descriptions – interpretations of Pictures of flow charts, graphs, pie charts and
tables - Essay writing – Different types of essays. Grammar– Articles - Connective adverbs – Subject-verb
agreement-; Vocabulary – Same word in a different parts of speech & Word Association
UNIT- IV 12
Listening - Excerpts from films focusing on theme and follow up exercises - film scenes; Speaking - Responding
to questions - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given topics- Group interaction; Reading -
Making inference from the reading passage - Predicting the content of a reading passage; Jumbled sentences;
Writing - Business Letters- Sales and Credit letters; Letter of Enquiry; Letter of Quotation, Order, Claim and
Adjustment Letters. Grammar – Preposition – future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substitutes - Use
of abbreviations & acronyms.
8
UNIT- V 12
Listening - Listening to Speeches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast & telecast from Radio & TV; Sample
interview; Speaking; Different forms of interviews - Speaking at different types of interview; Reading - Email
communication - Reading the attachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through
email Writing; Writing: invititation letter, accepting, declining letter and permission letter, Creative writing,
Poster making, Interpreting posters; Grammar –Editing-Direct and indirect speech; Vocabulary - Lexical items
(fixed / semi fixed expressions).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.
15BS101 MATHEMATICS I LT P C
3 20 4
 To know the matrix algebra techniques needed by engineers for practical applications
 To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that he/ she
will be familiar with limitations of using infinite series approximations for solutions arising in
mathematical modeling
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in engineering problems
 To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta functions which are needed in
engineering problems
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and their usage
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students are able to
 Expertise matrix algebra
 Apply tests of convergence
 Understand and apply functions of several variables
 Evaluate integrals using Beta and Gamma functions
 Expertise multiple integrals and their usage
9
UNIT - 0 (Not for Examination) 5+ 0
Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable
UNIT- I MATRICES 9+3
Characteristic equation - Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix– Properties of eigen values and
eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a quadratic form to
canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms
UNIT- II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3
Partial derivatives –Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem-Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit
functions-Change of variables - Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for
functions of two variables – Errors and approximations - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables –
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers
UNIT- III INFINITE SERIES 9+3
Sequences – Convergence of series – General properties – Series of positive terms – Tests for convergence:
Comparison test, Integral test, Comparison of ratios and D’Alembert’s ratio test (Proofs excluded) – Alternating
series – Series of positive and negative terms – Absolute and conditional convergence – Power Series –
Convergence of exponential, logarithmic and Binomial Series
UNIT- IV IMPROPER INTEGRALS 9+3
Improper integrals of the first and second kind and their convergence – Evaluation of integrals involving one
parameter by Leibnitz rule – Beta and Gamma functions – Properties – Evaluation of integrals using Beta and
Gamma functions – Error functions
UNIT- V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area enclosed by
plane curves – Triple integrals– Triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates – Volume of Solids
L= 45 hours T = 15 hours Total = 60 hours
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43
Edition, 2013
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, Singapore,
th
9 Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
th
4 Edition, 2014
nd
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2 Edition,
th
11 Reprint, 2013
th
3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7
Edition, 2012
rd
4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 2.1,2.3,3.1,5.2, Unit – 2,3,5)
5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
th
Company, New Delhi, 11 Reprint, 2010
10
15BS102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LTPC
3003
Course Objective
 To impart sound knowledge about basic concepts of physics.
 To introduce the basic physics concepts relevant to different branches of Engineering and Technology
 To introduce the fundamentals of physics and its applications in engineering.
Course Outcomes:
 The students are able to understand the elastic properties of the materials.
 The students will acquire knowledge about solid state physics.
 The students will acquire knowledge about the basic concepts of physics in the topics such as
acoustics, ultrasonics, thermal physics, and applied optics.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity - Poisson’s ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram and its uses-
factors affecting tensile strength - bending of beams - cantilever - bending moment - theory and experiment of
Young’s modulus determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders - twisting couple - hollow
cylinder - shaft - torsion pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus- moment of inertia of a body (regular and
irregular).
UNIT II ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9
Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner Law - standard intensity and intensity level -
decibel - reverberation - reverberation time - rate of growth and decay of sound intensity - derivation of Sabine’s
formula - absorption coefficient and its determination – factors affecting acoustics of buildings : focusing,
interference, echo, Echelon effect, resonance - noise and their remedies. Ultrasonics - production -
magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - detection of ultrasound - acoustic grating - industrial applications -
NDT – Ultrasonic method: scan modes and practice.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Thermal expansion - thermal stress - expansion joints - bimetallic strips - thermal conductivity- conductions in
solids - Forbe’s and Lees’ disc methods - Rectilinear flow of heat through a rod -flow of heat through a
compound media - radial flow of heat – thermal insulation of buildings – Laws of blackbody radiation: Kirchhoff’s
law, Stephens law, Wien’s law, Raleigh-Jean’s law and Planck’s law (derivation). Laws of thermodynamics -
Otto and diesel engines and their efficiency - entropy - entropy of Carnot’s cycle - reverse Carnot’s cycle -
refrigerator.
UNIT IV APPLIED OPTICS 9
Interference - Michelson interferometer: construction, working, determination of wave length and thickness - anti-
reflection coating - air wedge and its application - Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients - CO2, Nd:YAG and
semiconductor lasers - homojunction and heterojunction -construction and working - applications - Optical fibers -
classification (index & mode based) - principle and propagation of light in optical fibers - acceptance angle and
numerical aperture - fiber optic communication system - active and passive sensors.
UNIT V SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9
Growth of single crystals-Czochralski method and Bridgeman-Stockbarger method - unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais space lattices - crystal planes and directions, Miller indices - expressions for interplanar distance -
coordination number and packing factor for simple structures: SC, BCC, FCC and HCP - structure and
significance of NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite - crystal imperfections: point defects, dislocations and stacking
faults.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
11
TEXTBOOKS:
T1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

T2. Gaur R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Raj Publications, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
R1. Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2009.
R2. Palanisamy, P.K., Engineering Physics, Scitech Publications (P) Ltd, 2009.
R3. Arumugam, M., Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publications, 2000.
R4. John W. Jewett. Jr, and Raymon A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics
– Seventh Edition, Cengage Learnings, Delhi, India, 2013.
R5. David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, sixth edition, John Wiley
and Sons, New Delhi, 2010.
15BS103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LTPC

(Common to all UG Programmes) 3003
Course Objective
The student should be familiar with
1. The treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.
2. The principles of electrochemistry, electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.
3. The principles of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
4. Different materials and their engineering applications.
 Different types of fuels and combustion.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able to

1. Understand the basic principles of water quality parameters, their analysis and various water treatment
processes for domestic and industrial applications.
2. Understand the basic principles of electrochemistry and its applications.
3. Know the principles, various types of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
4. Have a sound knowledge on various engineering materials and their industrial applications.
 Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.

UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9
Characteristics of water – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types of hardness and
estimation by EDTA method (problems on calculation of hardness only); Boiler feed water – requirements –
disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – priming and foaming – scales and sludges – caustic embrittlement
– boiler corrosion – external conditioning (demineralization process) – internal conditioning (colloidal, phosphate,
carbonate and calgon conditionings) – Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination,
Ozonation, UV treatment) – break point chlorination – salinity – desalination by reverse osmosis.
UNIT II ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf – Single electrode potential
– Nernst equation (problems) – reference electrodes – Standard Hydrogen electrode – Calomel electrode – Ion
selective electrode – glass electrode and measurement of pH – Standard Cell – electrochemical series –
significance – potentiometric redox titration – conductometric titrations (Strong acid Vs Strong base and Weak
acid Vs Strong base)
12
UNIT III CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9
Chemical corrosion – Pilling-Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors
influencing corrosion – different types – galvanic corrosion – erosion corrosion – pitting corrosion – crevice
corrosion – waterline corrosion – stress corrosion – corrosion control – sacrificial anode and impressed current
cathodic methods – corrosion inhibitors – Protective coatings – metallic coating – pretreatment of surface –
hotdipping – spraying – cladding – cementation – electroplating (Cr, Cu, Ni and Au) – electrolessplating
(electroless nickel plating only).
UNIT IV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness, refractoriness
under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia
bricks.
Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants – properties (viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud
and pour points, oiliness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide – semi solid lubricants and
emulsions.
Nanomaterials – introduction to nano chemistry – carbon nanotubes and their applications.
UNIT V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels – Classification – Calorific value (Problems using Dulong’s formula) – Coal – proximate and ultimate
analysis – Hydrogenation of coal – Petroleum – processing and fractions – cracking – catalytic cracking and
methods – knocking – octane number and cetane number – synthetic petrol – Fischer-Tropsch and Bergius
processes – Gaseous fuels – Natural gas, CNG and LPG – Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – Combustion –
theoretical calculation of air (Problems on calculation of weight of air only).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
T1. P.C. Jain and Monika Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., 16 Edition,
New Delhi (2013).
T2. S.S.Dara, A text book of engineering chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
R1. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New Delhi
(2009).
R2. B. K. Sharma, Engineering chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2006).
R3. B. Sivasankar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi (2008).
15GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LTPC

(Common to all UG Programmes) 30 03
Course Objectives:
 To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques

 To learn how to write modular and readable C programs
 To understand the usage of arrays and strings
 To learn to use pointers to access and manipulate memory
 To exploit the notion of derived data types and files
13
Course Outcomes:
 Solve problems using sound techniques

 Develop modular C programs for a given problem
 Store and manipulate homogeneous data using arrays and strings
 Write programs that uses memory based on the run time needs
 Store and manipulate heterogeneous data using structures
 Write programs that manipulate data stored on permanent storage
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF C 9
Basic Organization of a Computer - Problem Solving Techniques: Introduction to Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow
Chart.
Structure of ‘C’ program, compilation and linking processes - C Tokens: Keywords, Data Types, Constants,
Variables - Declaration - Qualifiers - typedef - Enumeration - Pre-processor directives (#include, #define)
UNIT II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9
Managing simple Input and Output operations - Operators and Expressions - Decision Making: Branching
statements, Looping statements - Function: Declaration, Definition - Recursion - Storage classes
UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8
Arrays: Initialization - One dimensional, Two dimensional, and Multi-dimensional arrays - String: String
operations, Manipulating Strings - Pre-processor directives (#if, #else, #elif, #ifdef, #ifndef)
UNIT IV POINTERS IN C 10
Pointers - Parameter passing mechanism in functions - Dynamic Memory Allocation - Pointer arithmetic -
Pointers and one dimensional array - Pointers and Multi-Dimensional Array: Array of Pointers, Pointer to Pointer,
Pointer to an array - void Pointer - Pointer to function - Command Line Arguments
UNIT V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9
Structure: Declaration, Definition-Array of Structures - Pointer to Structure - Structure within a Structure - Bit
fields in Structure - Union - Files: File Management functions, Working with Text Files and Binary Files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C, Schaum’s Outlines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006 reprint.
2. R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, 2008
3. Al Kelley, Ira Pohl, “A Book on C : Programming in C”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 reprint
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2009 reprint.
5. Ashok N. Kamthane, “Computer programming”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
6. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
14
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3. http://www.w3schools.in/c
4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
15GE102 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

(Common to all UG Programmes) 2 0 4 4
Course Objectives:
 To gain knowledge on the basics of Engineering Drawing construction procedures.
 To understand the principles involved in graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design
of Engineering products.
 To draw the drawing of various solids.
 To expose the above to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
 An ability to draw the drawing for any given object to the required standard.
Course Outcomes:
 Sketch multiple views of Engineering components
 Create the projection of point, straight line and plane
 Project the solid objects
 Section the solid
 Develop lateral surfaces of solids
 Apply isometric and perspective projections
Concepts and Conventions (Not For Examination) 5
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Lettering and Dimensioning-Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND PICTORIAL VIEWS TO ORTHOGRAPHIC 14
VIEWS
Geometrical Constructions like bisection of a straight line, division of a straight line into n equal parts, bisection
of angles, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by
eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – Construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of
tangents and normal to the above curves.
Orthographic projection – Principles – Principal planes- Representation of Three Dimensional objects – Layout
of views– Sketching of multiple views (Front, Top and Side views) from pictorial views of simple objects and
Engineering Components.
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 14
First Angle projection–Projection of points in four quadrants. Projection of straight lines (only First angle
projection) inclined to both the principal planes – Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating
line method and traces.
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by change of position
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 14
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one of the
principal planes by change of position method. Projection of simple solids when the axis inclined to both planes.
UNIT IV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL 14
SURFACES OF SOLIDS
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of the principal
15
planes and perpendicular to the other – Obtaining true shape of the section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Development of
lateral surfaces of sectioned solids and simple applications like funnel.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 14
Principles of isometric projection – Isometric scale –Isometric View– Isometric projections of simple solids and
cut solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones– Combination of two solid objects in simple vertical positions.
Perspective projection of simple solids–Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. N.D. Bhatt, “Engineering Drawing” Charotar Publishing House, 50 Edition, (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
2. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy Edition,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
4. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited, 2008.
5. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.
6. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to End Semester Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be permitted
to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
15BS151 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T PC

0 0 4 2
(Classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry)
Course Objectives:
 To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Young’s modulus

 To be familiar with findings thickness of a thin paper
 To deal with the determination of Ultrasonic velocity
 To have a study on estimation of hardness and alkalinity of water
 To deal with Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
16
Course Outcomes:
 Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire

 Determine thickness of a thin sheet of paper
 Find the specific resistance of wire
 Estimate hardness and Alkalinity of water sample
 Do Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
 Find corrosion rate
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Torsional pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc.
2. Non-uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination
3. Air-wedge- Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper
4. Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating
5. Lee’s disc-Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor
6. Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer.
7. Carey Foster Bridge- Determination of specific resistance of the given coil of wire.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR CHEMISTRY LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method
2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample
3. pH-metric titration (acid & base)
4. Conductometric titration (strong acid Vs strong base)
5. Conductometric titration (mixture of acids Vs Strong base)
6. Potentiometric titration between ferrous ion and potassium dichromate
7. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss method
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J. D. Barnes, M.J.K. Thomas, Vogel's Quantitative Chemical Analysis,
Prentice Hall, India, 2000.
2. D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
15GE151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T PC

(Common to all UG Programmes) 0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
 To develop C programs using conditional and looping statements
 To understand the principles of arrays and strings
 To learn to access memory using pointers
 To group different kinds of information related to a single entity
 To understand the manipulation of data in permanent storage
Course Outcomes:
 Implement programs using control statements
17
 Write programs using arrays and strings
 Access data in memory using pointers
 Use structures to manipulate heterogeneous data
 Manipulate data stored on permanent storage
SYLLABUS FOR THE LABORATORY:
0. Study of simple Document Processing & Presentation Preparation
Study of basic OS commands, Software Engineering Practices -2 sessions (Not for End Examination)
1. Programs using simple statements
2. Programs using decision making statements
3. Programs using looping statements
4. Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions
5. Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays
6. Solving problems using string functions
7. Programs using pointers and dynamic memory allocation
8. Programs using structures and unions
9. Programs using pointers to structures and other data types
10. Programs using text files
11. Programs using binary files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006 reprint.
3. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C”, Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India,2009
5. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3. http://www.w3schools.in/c
4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
15GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LTPC

0042
Course Objectives:
 To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
 To have a study and hands-on-exercise on plumbing and carpentry components.
 To have a practice on gas welding, foundry operations and fitting
 To have a study on measurement of electical quantities, energy and resistance to earth.
 To have a practice on soldering
Course Outcomes:
 Do pipe connections with different joining components.
18
 Create joints for roofs, doors, windows and furniture
 Prepare square fitting and vee fitting models
 Do residential house wiring
 Measure energy and resistance to earth of an electrical equipment
 Apply soldering
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9
Buildings:
Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings, Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
1. Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers, and
elbows in household fittings.
2. Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
3. Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
4. Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.
5. Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
1. Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
2. Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Welding:
Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.
Basic Machining:
1. Simple Turning, Step turning
2. Drilling Practice using drilling machine.
Sheet Metal Work:
1. Forming & Bending:
2. Model making – Trays, funnels, etc.
3. Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
1. Study of centrifugal pump
2. Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
1. Gas welding practice
2. Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –Exercise – Production of
hexagonal headed bolt.
3. Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
4. Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.
19
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement of AC signal
parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CRO.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EXOR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory”,

Anuradha Publications, (2007).
2. T.Jeyapoovan, M.Saravanapandian & S.Pranitha, “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, (2006)
3. H.S. Bawa, “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, (2007).
4. A.Rajendra Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, “Workshop Practice”, Sree Sai Publication, (2002).
5. P.Kannaiah & K.L.Narayana, “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, (1999).
SEMESTER EXAMINATION PATTERN
The Laboratory examination is to be conducted for Group A & Group B, allotting 90 minutes for each group, with
a break of 15 minutes. Both the examinations are to be taken together in sequence, either in the FN session or
in the AN session. The maximum marks for Group A and Group B lab examinations will be 50 each, totaling 100
for the Lab course. The candidates shall answer either I or II under Group A and either III or IV under Group B,
based on lots.
List of equipment and components

(For a Batch of 30 Students)
CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, plastic pipes, 15 Sets.
flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each

Power Tools:
5.
20
(a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos.
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos.
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos.
(d) Planer 2 Nos.
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos.
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
1.
Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
2.
Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
3.
Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other welding outfit. 2 Nos.
4.
Centre lathe 10 Nos.
5.
Drilling machine 2 Nos.
6.
Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets
7.
Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets
8.
Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos.
9.
Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each.
10. .
ELECTRICAL
Assorted electrical components for house wiring 10 Sets
1.
Electrical measuring instruments 15 Sets.
2.
Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
3.
Megger (250V/500V). 1 No.
4.
Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos.
5.
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos.
ELECTRONICS
Soldering guns 10 Nos.
1.
Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
2.
Small PCBs 10 Nos.
3.
Multimeters 10 Nos.
4.
Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power supply 2 Nos.
5.
21
15HS201 Technical English –II LTPC
300 3
 make the students of Engineering and Technology enhance their communicative skills
 strengthen LSRW skills
 boost up creative and critical thinking
 master the skills of writing
 face the challenges of the competitive world
Course Outcomes:
 The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to enhance LSRW skills
 Their creative and critical thinking will be enriched
 The students will be able to face the challenges of the competitive world
UNIT I 15
Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Listening to different types of conversation and
answering questions. Speaking - Opening a conversation (greetings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn
taking - Closing a conversation (excuses, general wish, positive comment, and thanks); narrating personal
experience. Reading - Developing analytical skills, Deductive and inductive reasoning - intensive reading.
Writing - Biography Writing- Effective use of SMS for sending short notes and messages - Using ‘emoticons’ as
symbols in messages - e-mail/blogs - Posting reviews in blogs. Grammar – Regular and irregular verbs - Modal
verbs - Purpose expressions. Vocabulary – Match the Synonyms- Homonyms and Homophones.
UNIT II 7
Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues - Conversations between great leaders and celebrities.
Speaking - Conversation practice in real life situations, asking for directions (using polite expressions), giving
directions (using imperative sentences), Purchasing goods from a shop, Discussing various aspects of a film
(they have already seen) or a book (they have already read); Dialogues (Fill up exercises), Recording students’
dialogues. Reading - Reading a short story or an article from newspaper, Critical reading, Comprehension skills;
Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels); Writing - Writing a review / summary of a story /article -
Product Description -Dialogue Writing- memos and circulars. Grammar - Use of clauses - Conditional clauses -
Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences– Conjunctions. Vocabulary :
Descriptive words & phrases,
UNIT III 6
Listening - Listening to the conversation with various accents/dialects - Understanding the structure of
conversations. Speaking -Conversation skills with a sense of stress, intonation, pronunciation and meaning –
Seeking information – expressing feelings (affection, anger, regret, etc.). Reading - Speed reading – reading
passages with time limit - Skimming; Writing - Minutes of meeting – format and practice in the preparation of
minutes - Writing summary after reading articles from journals - Giving instructions Grammar - Reported speech
- Active and passive voice - American and British English.
Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the Spelling.
UNIT IV 7
Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic

and video conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skills - listening and responding - asking
questions, -note taking – passing on messages, Role play and mock interview for grasping interview skills;
22
Telephonic interview – recording the responses. Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the
company concerned. Writing - Applying for a job – cover letter - résumé preparation – vision, mission and goals
of the candidate; e-résumé writing. Writing Advertisements for a Product. Grammar - Numerical expressions -
discourse markers -Adjectives and comparative Adjectives. Vocabulary -Idioms and their meanings – Using
idioms in sentences - Phrases used for Advertisements
UNIT V 10
Listening - Viewing a model debate and reviewing the performance of each participant - Identifying the
characteristics of a good listener; Sample Debate Speaking - Group communication skills –assertiveness in
expressing opinions – mind mapping technique; Reading - making notes from books, Newspaper or any form of
written materials. Writing – Itinerary - Checklist - report writing – recommendations / suggestions – interpretation
of data (using charts for effective presentation) - Note making skills. Grammar–Infinitives and Gerunds - Cause
and effect expressions. Vocabulary – Collocation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Wells, H.G. The Time machine, Peacock, India, 2008.
15BS201 MATHEMATICS II LTPC

320 4
 To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary differential equations
obtained from engineering problems
 To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines
 To know the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to enable the student to apply them
with confidence, in application areas such as heat conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of the
electric current
 To make the student for appreciating the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in which it
is earlier to handle the problem that is being investigated.
23
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students are able to
 Apply different techniques to solve ordinary differential equations

 Solve engineering problems using vector calculus
 Use complex variable theory for applications like heat conduction, fluid dynamics etc.
 Transform given problem to a new domain for solving it efficiently
UNIT 0 (Not for Examinations) 5+0
Reviews of integration concepts
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Method of variation of parameters –Method of undetermined coefficients – Homogeneous equation of Euler’s

and Legendre’s type – System of Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3
Gradient and Directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields – Line
integral over a plane curve – Surface integral and Volume integral– Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stokes’
theorems (excluding proofs) – Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3
Analytic functions – Necessary and Sufficient conditions for analyticity – properties – Harmonic conjugates –
Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions w= z+c, cz, 1/z, z+1/z, and
- Bilinear transformation.
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3
Line integral – Cauchy’s theorem and integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues
– Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and
semi-circular contour with no pole on real axis
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9+3
Laplace transform – Transforms of elementary functions – Basic properties – Transform of derivatives and
integrals – Transform of periodic functions - Initial and Final value theorems – Inverse Transforms – Convolution
theorem –Application to solution of linear ODE with constant coefficients
TOTAL: 65 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”,, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 43 edition (2013)
th
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9
Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2013)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
th
4 Edition, 2014
nd
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2 Edition,
th
11 Reprint, 2013
th
Edition, 2012
rd
4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3
24
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 5.2, Unit – 1,2)
5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
th
Company, New Delhi, 11 Reprint, 2010
15BS202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT LTPC

(Common to all UG Programme)
300 3
Course Objectives:
The student is expected to understand
 What constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve
these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful
environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve bio-
diversity.
 The role of government and non-government organizations in environment management.
 About Disaster and its management.
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the basic concepts of environment studies and natural resources.
 Get the thorough knowledge about ecosystem and biodiversity.
 Have an elaborate knowledge about causes, effects and control measures of various types of pollution.
 Understand the social issues and various environmental acts.
 Get the knowledge about types of disaster and mitigation measures.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL 9

RESOURCES
Definition, scope and importance – Need for public awareness – Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation,
deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people –
Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water,
dams – benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and
using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer, pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies
– Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate
energy sources. Case studies – Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of
resources for sustainable lifestyles
UNIT II ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 10

Concept of an ecosystem – Structure and function of an ecosystem – Producers, consumers and decomposers –
Energy flow in the ecosystem (single channel energy flow model) – Concept of nutrient cycling (Nitrogen cycle) –
Ecological succession – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction to Biodiversity –
Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use,
social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, National and local levels – India as a mega-
diversity nation – Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife
conflicts – Endangered and endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.
UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOCIAL ISSUES 12
Definition – Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Marine pollution (d)
Noise pollution (e) Nuclear hazards – Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban
and industrial wastes – Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
25
Unsustainable and Sustainable development – Unsustainable practices – Issues – possible solutions –
Water conservation, rain water harvesting – Environmental ethics –Acts for Prevention of Environmental
Pollution – Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act - Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act –
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Environment Protection Act – Issues involved in enforcement of
environmental legislation – Public awareness.
UNIT IV DISASTER AND ITS IMPACTS 7
Definition of Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Risk – Types – Natural disasters (earthquake, landslides, flood,
cyclones, tsunami and drought) – Manmade disasters (Chemical, nuclear and biological) Disaster impacts
(environmental, physical, social, ecological and economical) – Case studies.
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT 7
Need and concept of Disaster management – Disaster Management cycle – Prevention, mitigation,
preparedness, relief, recovery – Post–disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste
management, disease control) – Role and responsibilities of government, community, local institutions and
NGOs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science,
Pearson Education Pvt., Ltd., Third Edition, 2014.
2. Miller T.G. Jr, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co.
3. Townsend C., Harper J., and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science, Third Edition.
4. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to Air Pollution, Techno-Science Publications.
5. Anubha Kaushik and Kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age International
(P) Ltd, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-81-224-3647-1, 2014.
6. Mukesh Dhunna., 2009, Disaster Management, Vayu Education of India, New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2004.
2. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol. I
and II, Enviro Media.
3. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai,
2001.
4. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.
5. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi, ISBN: 0070601690, 2006.
6. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.
7. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation.
15BS204 MATERIALS SCIENCE LTPC

(Common to EEE, ECE, CSE & IT)
300 3
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the essential principles of physics for information science and related Engineering
applications
 To transform the basic principles and concepts to understand the utility of Engineering materials
operating electrical core devices in terms of their structure and properties
 To identify the fleet of scientific channels exploring the generation of high-tech electrical engineering
materials
26
Course Outcomes:
 The students are able to understand the electrical properties of the materials
 The students will acquire knowledge about semiconducting materials
 The students will acquire knowledge about the application of the magnetic materials, optical devices
and nano devices
UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classical free electron theory for electrical and thermal conductivity–Wiedemann Franz law–Drawbacks of
classical free electron theory–Quantum free electron theory (qualitative)–Schrodinger wave equations–time
independent and time dependent wave equations–Particle in a one dimensional Box–Fermi function–Density of
energy states–Carrier concentration in metals–Expression for Fermi energy.
UNIT II SEMICONDUCTORS AND TRANSPORT PHYSICS 9
Direct and indirect bandgap semiconductors–Intrinsic Semiconductors–Carrier concentration–Determination of

bandgap energy–Extrinsic semiconductor– Carrier concentration in n type and p type semiconductors–Variation
of Fermi energy level with temperature and impurity concentration–Hall effect–Determination of Hall coefficient–
carrier transport in semiconductors: Drift, Mobility and diffusion.
UNIT III MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of magnetic materials–Quantum numbers–Origin of magnetic moments–Classical theory of

diamagnetism (Langevin theory) –Quantum theory of paramagnetism–Ferromagnetism (Weiss theory) – Energy
associated with domain theory –Hysteresis – antiferromagnetic materials–Ferrites–applications– Soft and hard
magnetic materials. Magnetic recording and readout in tapes, floppy and hard disk drives.
UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of optical materials –Absorption in metals, insulators & semiconductors–LED’s–Organic LED’s–

Polymer light emitting materials–Plasma light emitting devices–LCD’s–Laser diodes–Optical data storage
techniques (including DVD, Blu- ray disc, holographic data storage).
UNIT V NANO DEVICES 9
Quantum confinement –quantum structures– metal to insulator transition –Confining of excitons–Bandgap of

nanomaterials––Tunnelling –Resonant tunneling diode (RTD)–Single electron phenomenon–Single electron
transistor–Quantum cellular automata (QCA). Carbon nanotubes–Molecular electronics –Spintronics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. William D. Callister, Jr. Material Science and Engineering, Seventh Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc. New
Delhi, 2010
2. Kasap, S.O., Principle of Electronic Materials and devices, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pierret, R.F. Semiconductor device fundamentals, Pearsons, 1996.

2. Garcia N and Damask A, Physics for Computer science students, Springer–Verlag, 1998.
3. Todd D. Steiner, Semiconductor Nanostructure for Optoelectronic Applications, ArTech House
Publishers, Boston, London, 2004.
4. Physics of Semiconducting Devices, S.M. Sze, Kwok K. Ng, Third Edition, Wiley, India, 2007.
27
15GE203 BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LTPC
(Common to EEE / ECE) 300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the essential principles of construction materials
 To make students understand the above principles applied to Building sciences.
 To introduce the essential principles of energy sciences
 To make students understand functioning of fundamental prime movers & machines
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 The students are able to understand the civil engineering materials
 The students shall acquire knowledge about building components and types of bridges and dams.
 The students will acquire knowledge on traditional & new energy sources and understand the
functioning of basic energy conversion devices.
 The students are able to understand the construction and functioning of critical appliances
like IC engines, refrigerator and air-conditioner.
 The students shall acquire knowledge on basic power plant engineering
PART A – CIVIL ENGINEERING
UNIT I CIVIL ENGINEERING MATERIALS 15
Stones and Bricks – types, properties and uses - Materials for making concrete : cement - chemical
compounds of portland cement , types and storage - Fine aggregate - functions - gradation and effect of
impurities - Coarse aggregate – functions - Quality water for mixing.
Plain Cement Concrete (PCC) - functions of various ingredients ,preparing placing and curing - Properties of
fresh concrete and hardened concrete - Reinforced cement concrete (RCC) – uses and requirement of good
RCC Steel- properties and uses.
UNIT II BUILDING COMPONENTS AND STRUCTURES 15
Foundations – Types, bearing capacity, requirement of good foundations, causes of failure of foundations
Superstructure – Brick masonry, stone masonry, beams, columns, lintels, roofing and flooring, plastering
Bridges – Classification and components
Dams – Classification and purposes governing selection of site.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
PART B – MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (QUALITATIVE
TREATMENT ONLY)
UNIT III ENERGY SOURCES, BOILERS AND TURBINES 10
Conventional and New & Renewable sources of energy, Indian and global energy scenario, Principle
and operation of : Boilers-fire tube and water tube (one example for each type), Hydraulic, Steam, and
Gas turbines
UNIT IV IC ENGINES, REFRIGERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER 10
Four stroke and two stroke IC engine cycles, functioning of petrol and Diesel Engines – Comparisons,
simple vapour compression refrigerator and window air conditioner
UNIT V POWER PLANTS 10
Principle of operation, construction and working of : Hydel, Steam, Diesel, Gas and Nuclear power plants
along with accessories – Selection, comparison, merits and demerits
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
28
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Shanmugam G and Palanichamy M S, “Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1996.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ramamrutham.S, “Basic Civil Engineering”, DhanpatRai Publishing Co. (P) Ltd., 1999.
2. Seetharaman S. “Basic Civil Engineering”, Anuradha Agencies, 2005.
3. Venugopal K and Prahu Raja V, “BasicMechanical Engineering”,
Anuradha Publishers, Kumbakonam, 2000.
4. Shantha Kumar S R J., “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Hi- tech Publications,
Mayiladuthurai, 2000.
15EE201 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT THEORY L T P C

3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To motivate the students for solving AC and DC circuits using various laws and theorems.
 To familiarize the concepts and terminologies of series & parallel resonance circuits and coupled among
the students.
 To motivate the students for analyzing three phase 3 wire and 4 wire circuits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
 Understand the basic laws, mesh current, nodal voltage, voltage and current division, source
transformation and star/delta transformation methods for solving circuit problems.
 Understand the basic network theorems used for solving networks with both DC and AC inputs.
 Understand the concepts and terminologies behind series & parallel resonance circuits and coupled
circuits.
 Understand the analysis of three phase 3 wire and 4 wire circuits with star and delta connected loads.
UNIT I Analysis of DC circuits 12
Electrical Quantities - Network elements – R, L, C parameters - Energy sources - Ohm’s law - Kirchhoff’s Laws-
–Resistors in series -Voltage division - Resistors in parallel - Current division- star- delta transformation - source
transformation - Mesh Analysis - Nodal Analysis.
UNIT II Analysis of AC circuits 12
Introduction to Time Varying and Alternating Quantities - Representation of sine wave - Average and RMS
(effective) Values - Pure R, L & C circuit - Phasor and waveform representation- Power and Power Factor- Mesh
Analysis- Nodal Analysis.
UNIT III Network Theorems for AC and DC Circuits 12
Superposition Theorem– Thevenin’s Theorem - Norton’s Theorems – Reciprocity Theorem - Maximum Power
Transfer Theorem – Millman’s Theorem - Tellegen’s Theorem.
UNIT IV Resonance and Coupled Circuits 12
Resonance in Series and Parallel RLC Circuits - frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth -
Introduction to coupled circuit – Self Inductance - Mutual inductance – Dot Convention- Coefficient of coupling -
Series and parallel connection of coupled circuit- single tuned circuit.
UNIT V Three Phase Circuits 12
Polyphase System - Comparison between single and three phase circuit- Interconnection of three phase sources
and loads- -Three phase Balanced star and Delta connected load - Three phase Unbalanced star and Delta
connected load- Power and Power factor measurement.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
29
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sudhakar A and Shyam Mohan SP, “Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis”,Tata McGraw Hill,
(2007).
2. William H. Hayt Jr, Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuits Analysis”, Tata
McGraw Hill publishers, 6th edition, New Delhi, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Paranjothi SR, “Electric Circuits Analysis,” New Age International Ltd., New Delhi, (1996).
2. Joseph A. Edminister, Mahmood Nahri, “Electric circuits”, Schaum‟s series, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2001
3. Chakrabati A, “Circuits Theory (Analysis and synthesis), Dhanpath Rai & Sons, New Delhi, (1999).
4. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Second Edition,
McGraw Hill, (2003).
15BS251 APPLIED PHYSICS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C

(Common to EEE/ECE/CSE/MECH/IT/BT)
0 0 4 2
(Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Environmental
Chemistry)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To determine particle size and wavelength
 To find the viscosity of liquid
 To find band gap of a semiconductor
 To determine dissolved oxygen and chloride content in water
 To estimate chromium, iron, sodium and chlorine using various methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Use Post Office Box to determine band gap of a semiconductor

 Use spectrometer to determine the dispersive power of the prism
 Use Winkler’s method to determine dissolved oxygen in water
 Use Argentometric method to estimate chloride content in water
 Use flame photometry to estimate sodium in water
PHYSICS LABORATORY
List of Experiments (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Laser- (i) Particle size and wavelength determination
(ii) Numerical aperture and acceptance angle measurement of an optical fiber
2. Post Office Box-Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
3. Indexing of Powder Diffraction Pattern
4. Characteristics of a photodiode
5. Uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination
6. Spectrometer-Dispersive power of the prism
7. Viscosity of liquids- Determination of co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s method.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, MepcoSchlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
30
ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
List of Experiments (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Determination of DO in water by Winkler’s method
2. Estimation of Chloride in water sample by Argentometric method
3. Determination of COD value of industrial effluents
4. Estimation of chromium in tannery wastes
5. Estimation of available chlorine in bleaching powder
6. Estimation of iron by spectrophotometry
7. Estimation of sodium by flame photometry
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A. L. Vogel, A Text Book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, ELBS London, 1995.

2. D. P. Shoemaker and C. W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
3. N. Manivasakam, Industrial Effluents – Origin, Characteristics, Effects Analysis & Treatment, Sakthi
Publications, Coimbatore, 1987.
15EE251 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on the usage of CRO.
 To motivate the students for solving AC and DC circuits.
 To familiarize the concepts and terminologies of series & parallel resonance circuits.
 To impart knowledge on the usage of circuit simulation software for simulating resonance circuits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
 Explain the usage of CRO in measurement of sinusoidal voltage, frequency and power factor.
 Explain and illustrate the applications of kirchoff’s laws and network theorems
 Illustrate the frequency response of RLC circuits.
 Design and simulate resonance circuits.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of CRO and measurement of sinusoidal voltage, frequency and power factor.
2. Measurement of self inductance of a coil.
3. Frequency response of Parallel resonance circuit.
4. Frequency response of Series resonance circuit.
5. Design and Simulation of series and parallel resonance circuit.
6. Determination of time constant of RC circuit.
7. Frequency response of Single tuned coupled circuit.
8. Verification of Kirchoff’s Voltage and Current Laws.
9. Verification of Mesh method and Nodal method.
10. Verification of Superposition Theorem.
11. Verification of Reciprocity Theorem.
31
12. Verification of Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorem.
13. Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
Total : 45 Periods
15MA302 Mathematics III - Transforms and Probability Distributions L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know a sound knowledge on Partial Differential Equations.

 To acquaint the student with the concepts of Fourier series that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines.
 To know the standard techniques for solving difference equations.
 To familiarize the student with Fourier transform which is used to solve problems in engineering and
technology.
 To make the student knowledgeable in the area of probabilistic models.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students are able to
 Solve various Partial Differential Equations.
 Know to express any periodic functions as a series of well known periodic functions sine and cosine.
 Obtain the solution of difference equations using Z- transforms.
 Use Fourier transform in engineering applications.
 Familiar with the concepts of probability and distributions.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of PDE – Solutions of first order PDE – Lagrange’s linear PDE -Standard types and equations
reducible to standard types – Singular solution –– Classification of second order PDE – Solution of second and
higher order linear homogeneous PDE with constant coefficients – Linear non-homogeneous partial differential
equations with constant coefficients.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half-range Sine and Cosine series –
Parseval’s identity – Harmonic Analysis – Complex form of Fourier series.
UNIT III Z - TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12
Z-transform - Elementary properties - Inverse Z-transform - Convolution theorem - Initial and Final value
theorems - Formation of difference equation - Solution of difference equation using Z-transform.
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORM 12
Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties – Transform of
elementary functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.
UNIT V PROBABILITY RANDOM VARIABLES AND DISTRIBUTIONS 12
Axiomatic definition of probability – Conditional Probability – Baye’s Theorem - Discrete and Continuous random
variables – Moments – Moment generating functions –Uniform and Exponential distributions.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
32
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43 Edition, 2013.
2. Oliver C. Ibe, “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, Elsevier India Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi, Reprint-2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media (An imprint of
th
Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 8 Edition, 2011.
th
Edition, 2012.
th
3. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 4 Edition,
2010.
4. Hwei Hsu, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and Random
rd
Processes”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3 Edition, 2014.
5. Gupta, S.C., and Kapoor, V.K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand and Sons.
New Delhi, Reprint 2011.
15EE301 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
 Electrical & electronic instruments and measurements techniques.
 Calibration of meters.
 Measurement of Capacitance, Inductance and resistance.
 Measurement of Magnetic parameters, and Electronics Instruments.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
 Apply the basic laws governing the operation of the instruments.
 Calibrate electrical parameter measuring instruments.
 Apply analog and digital techniques to measure electrical quantities.
 Use various transducers.
UNIT I CHARACTERISTICS, ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS 9
Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Static and dynamic characteristics of measuring
instruments- Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in measurements - Statistical estimation of
measurements data (Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard deviation, Variance and Probable error of
mean) – Standards and calibration.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS 9
Classification of measuring instruments- Essential requirements of an instrument-Construction, working principle

and Torque equation of Permanent Magnet Moving Coil instruments - Attraction type and Repulsion type Moving
iron instruments- Electro-dynamometer type Wattmeter, Extension of voltmeter and ammeter range -
Construction, working principle of Instrument transformers -1φ and 3φ Induction type Energy meter.
UNIT III MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE, INDUCTANCE & CAPACITANCE 9
D.C Bridges: Wheatstone Bridge, Kelvin’s bridge, Kelvin’s double bridge - A.C bridges: Maxwell bridge,
33
Anderson bridge, Hays bridge, Schering bridge, Wein’s bridge.
UNIT IV MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS & ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS 9
Magnetic Measurements: Measurement of Flux density and Magnetizing force, Determination of B-H curve for
the magnetic material specimen, Measurement of Iron-loss using Maxwell’s bridge method-Weston frequency
meter- Multimeter- Servo-potentiometric type, Successive approximations type Digital Voltmeter-Construction,
working principle and applications of X – Y recorder, Paperless recorder.
UNIT V MEASUREMENT OF NON-ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES 9
Transducers: Classifications and Selection of transducers – Principle of operation of Resistance potentiometer-

Strain gauge transducers-Capacitive transducers-Linear Variable Differential Transducer, Piezo-electric
transducers - Measurement of Temperature: Resistance thermometers, Thermistors and Thermocouples- Speed
measurement: Contact and non-contact type.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sawhney A K, “A Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai &
Sons, New Delhi, 18th Edition, 2012.
2. Gupta J.B., “A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, Delhi, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Prithwiraj Purkait, Budhaditya Biswas, Chiranjib Koley “Electrical and Electronics Measurements and
Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill Education India, First Edition, 2013.
2. Golding E W, and Widdis F C, “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, A H Wheeler &
Company, Calcutta, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. Doeblin E., “Measurement Systems: Application and Design”, Mc-Graw Hill Book Co., Fifth Edition, New
Delhi, 2004.
4. Moorthy D.V.S, “Transducers and Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 2007.
5. Patranabi.D, “Sensors and Transducers”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2003.
6. Kalsi H.S, “Electronic Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill Education India, 3rd Edition, 2010.
15EE302 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Construction, theory, characteristics and applications of electronic devices, power supplies.
 Operation of amplifiers and oscillators.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of course students will be able to
 Analyze and compare the construction, theory and characteristics of the electronic devices.
 Design a power supply, regulator and filter.
 Identify and design a suitable amplifier/oscillator for a specific application.
UNIT I PN JUNCTION AND SPECIAL DIODES 9
PN junction diode-Operation, VI characteristics – Diode current equation: Drift and diffusion currents –
temperature effects - Diode equivalent circuits – diode junction capacitances - switching characteristics –Zener
diode – VI characteristics, LED, Schottky diode, varactor diode, photo diode and applications.
34
UNIT II RECTIFIERS, FILTERS AND REGULATORS 9
Diode clampers and clippers – Rectifiers: Half wave and full wave rectifiers, Average and RMS value, Ripple
factor, Regulation, Rectification efficiency, Filters: C, L, LC filters – Zener diode shunt Regulator.
UNIT III BJT AND ITS BIASING 9
Transistor construction, operation – Input and output characteristics – CE, CB and CC

configurations – hybrid model – transistor switching – transistor biasing: operating point, load line
and stability factor – base bias and voltage divider bias - Darlington connection - Phototransistor
and Opto couplers.
UNIT IV FIELD CONTROLLED DEVICES 9
JFET – construction, operation and characteristics, parameters, pinch-off voltage – small signal model.
MOSFET - construction, operation and characteristics – enhancement and depletion types – parameters –
MOSFET as voltage variable resistor.
UJT – characteristics, operation and saw tooth oscillators.
UNIT V AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9
BJT as an amplifier – CE amplifier small signal analysis – RC coupled amplifier – Differential amplifiers , CMRR
Feedback amplifiers : Voltage / current, series / shunt feedback
FET amplifiers :CS and CD amplifiers
Oscillators - condition for oscillation – Hartley, Colpitts, RC phase shift, Wienbridge and crystal oscillators-
Astable Multivibrator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Prentice Hall of India,
Eighth Edition, 2002.
2. Sedha R.S, “A Textbook of Electronic Devices and Circuits”, S. Chand & company Ltd. 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Albert Paul Malvino, “Electronic Principles”, McGraw Hill, 2002.
2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Prentice Hall India, Fourth Edition, 1999.
3. Millman and Halkias, “Electron devices and circuits”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2010.
15EE303 ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector fields.
 Concepts of electrostatics, electrical potential, energy density and their calculations.
 Concepts of magneto statics, magnetic flux density, scalar and vector potential and their calculations.
 Faraday’s laws, induced emf and their applications.
35
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply concepts and theories of electrostatics in field calculations.
 Apply concepts and theories of magneto statics in field calculations.
UNIT I VECTOR ANALYSIS 12
Vector fields – Different co-ordinate systems – Rectangular, Cylindrical, Spherical co-ordinate systems – Gradient,
Divergence and Curl – Divergence Theorem – Stoke’s Theorem.
UNIT II ELECTROSTATICS- I 12
Sources and effects of electromagnetic fields – Coulomb’s Law – Electric field intensity – Field due to point and
continuous charges – Gauss’s law and applications –. Electric potential – Energy density.
UNIT III ELECTROSTATICS- II 12
Electric field in free space, conductors, dielectric - Dielectric polarization - Dielectric strength - Electric field in
multiple dielectrics – Boundary conditions – Poisson’s and Laplace’s equations – Capacitance.
UNIT IV MAGNETOSTATICS 12
Magnetic field intensity – Biot–savart Law - Ampere’s Law and applications - Magnetic field due to straight
conductors, circular loop, infinite sheet of current – Magnetic flux density (B) –Magnetization –Boundary conditions –
Scalar and vector potential –Inductance – Energy density.
UNIT V ELECTRODYNAMIC FIELDS 12
Magnetic force – Lorentz Law of force, - Torque – Faraday’s laws, induced emf – Transformer and motional EMF –
Maxwell’s equations (differential and integral forms) – Displacement current – Derivation of generalized Wave
Equations from Maxwell’s equations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Mathew N. O. SADIKU, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University press Inc., First India Edition,
2007.
2. William H. Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, McGraw Hill, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Joseph. A.Edminister, “Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics”, Second Edition, Schaum Series,
McGraw Hill, 1993.
2. Kraus and Fleish, “Electromagnetics with Applications”, McGraw Hill International Editions, Fifth Edition,
1999.
3. Ashutosh Pramanik, “Electromagnetism – Theory and Applications”, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited,
New Delhi, 2006.
4. Gangadhar K.A., “Field Theory”, Khanna Publishers, Fifteenth Edition, Third Reprint 2004.
15EE304 NETWORK ANALYSIS AND SYNTHESIS L T P C

3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To analyze any given electrical network.
 To analyze the transient response of series and parallel A.C. circuits.
 To study two port model of circuit and circuit elements.
 To familiarize the fundamentals of filters.
36
 To gain knowledge about the concept of network synthesis.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
 Analyze any given electrical network based on network graphs.
 Analyze the transient response for given network
 Determine the parameters of a given network based on two port analysis.
 Design the various types of filters.
 Synthesis of networks from system equation.
UNITI NETWORK TOPOLOGY 12
Network graphs, Tree and Co-Tree, Twigs and Links, Incidence Matrix, Properties of incidence matrix, incidence
matrix and KCL, link current: Tie-set matrix, Cut Set and Tree branch Voltages
UNITII TRANSIENT RESPONSE OF DC AND AC CIRCUITS 12
Concept of complex frequency – Transform impedance and Transform Circuits - Transient response of RL, RC
and RLC Circuits using Laplace transform for DC input and sinusoidal input.
UNITIII TWO-PORT NETWORKS 12
Two port Networks: Characterization of two port networks in terms of Z, Y, ABCD and h parameters, inter
connection of two-port Networks.
UNITIV DESIGN OF FILTERS 12
Classification of filters, Filter elements, Equations of filter Networks, characteristics impedance in pass band and
stop bands, Constant – K Low pass filter, Constant – K high Pass filter, band pass filter,
UNITV NETWORK SYNTHESIS OF ELEMENTS 12
Hurwitz polynomials, Positive Real functions, synthesis of reactive one-ports by Foster’s method, synthesis of
reactive one-ports by Cauer method, synthesis of RL and RC network by Foster’s method and Cauer method.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. A. Sudhakar and Shyammohan S.Palli, “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, McGraw-Hill, 2006.
2. Sudakar A. and Shyam Mohan S.Palli , “Circuits and Networks (Analysis and Synthesis)”, McGraw Hill
Book Co., New Delhi, Third Edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. C. L. Wadhwa “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, New Age Publications, Delhi, 2004.
nd
2. Franklin F. Kuo, “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, 2 Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Limited.
3. M. E. Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, PHI Publications, Delhi, 2003.
15EE305 ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION AND UTILIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Electrical power generation and energy conservation
 Principle and design of illumination systems
 Methods of heating and welding
 Electric traction systems and their performance.
37
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
 Explain the different methods of electrical power generation
 Explicate the importance of electrical energy conservation and apply various measures for economic
aspects of utilising electrical energy
 Elucidate the working of various electric lamps and design a good lighting scheme
 Expound the various types of electric heating, electric welding and design a heating element
 Address the recent trends in electric traction.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION 9
Conventional methods – thermal, hydro and nuclear based power generation, Non-conventional methods of
power generation – fuel cells – tides – wind – geothermal – solar – bio-mass, Cogeneration, Distributed
generation.
UNIT II ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF GENERATION 9
Economic aspects of power generation – load and load duration curves – number and size of units – cost of
electrical energy – tariff, economics of power factor improvement – power capacitors, Importance of electrical
energy conservation – energy efficient equipments – Star Rating of devices.
UNIT III ILLUMINATION 9
Importance of lighting – properties of good lighting scheme – laws of illumination – types of lamps – Filament
lamps – Arc lamps – Fluorescent lamps – Mercury Vapour lamps – Sodium Vapour lamps – energy efficient
lamps – CFL – lighting calculations – basic design of illumination schemes for residential, commercial, street
lighting and sports ground.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND WELDING 9
Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating – induction heating – dielectric heating -
electric arc furnaces – Air-Conditioning.
Brief introduction to electric welding – welding generator, welding transformer and their characteristics.
UNIT V ELECTRIC TRACTION 9
Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems – mechanics of train
movement – Speed Time curve –tractive effort – specific energy consumption – traction motors and control
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
2. B.R. Gupta, ‘Generation of Electrical Energy’, Eurasia Publishing House (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. H. Partab, ‘Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, Third
Edition 2014.
2. E. Openshaw Taylor, ‘Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units’, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, Eleventh
Edition 2007.
3. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
4. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
5. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
38
6. N.V.Suryanarayana, ‘Utilisation of Electric Power: Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction’, New
Age International Publishers, Second Edition 2014.
15EE351 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To conduct experiments for measurement of various quantities

 To calibrate energy meter and current transformer
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Measure displacement, resistance, inductance, torque, angle etc.
 Select and design suitable bridges for measuring R, L and C.
 Determine the transient response of simple electrical circuits.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. DC bridges: Wheatstone bridge & Kelvin’s Double Bridge.
2. AC bridges: Maxwell’s bridge & Schering Bridge.
3. Measurement of Iron loss and permeability of a given Ring Specimen.
4. Calibration of Energy Meter by Phantom Loading.
5. Calibration of Current Transformers and Potential transformers.
6. Performance characteristics of Temperature Transducers.
7. Performance characteristics of Displacement and Pressure transducers.
8. Performance characteristics of Electromagnetic Transducer.
9. Non-contact Measurement of Speed.
10. Transients in RC & RLC series circuits by Digital simulation method.
11. Measurement of Torque and displacement angle.
12. Measurement of Power using three voltmeter and three ammeter method.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15EE352 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To conduct relevant experiments for determining the characteristics of various electronic devices.
 To design and test amplifiers and oscillators
 To design and test power supplies
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of course students will be able to
 design and construct a power supply and analyse the ripple factor with filters.
 draw characteristics of the electronic devices by conducting suitable experiments.
 draw the response characteristics of diode clippers and clampers by constructing them.
List of Experiments:
1. Realization of Passive Low Pass Filter and High Pass Filter
2. Characteristics of Semiconductor Diode and Zener Diode
3. Characteristics of Photo diode and Phototransistor
39
4. Simulation of diode clipper circuits
5. Simulation of diode clamper circuits
6. Single Phase Half wave rectifier with Capacitive and Inductive - Capacitive Filter
7. Single Phase Full wave rectifiers with Capacitive and Inductive - Capacitive Filter
8. Bipolar Junction Transistor - CE characteristics
9. Bipolar Junction transistor - CB characteristics
10. Characteristics of JFET
11. Characteristics of UJT
12. Transistor Astable Multivibrator
13. Simulation of RC Phase Shift Oscillator
14. Frequency Response of Common Emitter Amplifier
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15HS351 Presentation Skills Laboratory L T P C

(Common to Civil/EEE/CSE) 0 0 2 1
Course Objectives
 To hone the students’ proficiency in speaking skills

 To enhance their pronouncing skills
 To help the students acquire presentation skills
 To enable the students communicate effectively
Course Outcomes:
Students of Engineering and Technology will be able to
 recognize phonemes
 improve pronunciation
 acquire all strategies of presentation skills
 develop interpersonal skills
Phonetic Practice 6
English phonemes: Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants - Word Stress, phoneme recognizing practice
Listening Comprehension 3
Documentaries, Educational video clips, Oration of Great leaders, Radio & TV news, Listening to conversations,
Telephone etiquette, Reviewing news from Media.
Language Functions 4
Giving reasons, talking about future plans, Comparing & Contrasting, Making suggestions
Presentation Strategies 5
Presentation Strategies Defining Purpose; Audience & Locale; Organizing Contents; Preparing Outline; Audio-
visual Aids; Nuances of Delivery; Body Language; Proxemics; Setting Nuances of Voice Dynamics; Time-
Dimension.
Presentation and Appraisal Sessions 12
Importance of Journal articles – elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results,
40
discussion, conclusion, appendices, Bibliography and references), Preparation of scholarly papers based on the
internet Resources, Oral Presentations & Reviews.
TOTAL: 30 Periods
Reference Books
1. Laws, Anne. Presentations. Hyderabad: Orient Blackswan, 2011
2. Mandel, Steve. Effective Presentation Skills. New Delhi: Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
3. Gimson, AC. An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English. London: ELBS, 1989.
4. Oconnor, JD. Better English Pronunciation. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press, 1967.
15MA402 MATHEMATICS IV - NUMERICAL AND STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES L T P C

(Common to EEE and Mechanical Engineering)
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the techniques for solving the transcendental equations, system of equations and eigenvalue
problem
 To construct an approximate polynomial to represent the data and to find the intermediate values.
 To find differentiation and integration when the functions are in the analytical form which is too
complicated or the huge amounts of data are given.
 To acquire the notion of sampling distributions and knowledge of statistical techniques useful in making
rational decision in management problems.
 To expose the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific judgments
in the face of uncertainty and variation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to

 Apply the techniques for solving the transcendental equations, system of equations and eigenvalue
problem.
 Construct an approximate polynomial to represent the given data and know to find the intermediate
values.
 Obtain the differentiation and integration from the given data.
 Justify about the behavior of the samples
 Understand the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific judgments
in the face of uncertainty and variation.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS 12
Iteration method - Regula-Falsi method – Newton-Raphson method – Gauss elimination method – Gauss Jordan
method – Matrix inversion by Gauss Jordan method - Gauss-Seidel method – Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power
method and Gauss-Jacobi method
UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATIONS 12
Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation – Gauss forward and backward difference interpolation –
Newton’s divided difference interpolation – Lagrange’s interpolation – Cubic spline interpolation.
UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 12
Approximation of derivatives using Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation, Newton’s divided
difference interpolation and Lagrange’s interpolation – Numerical integration using Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s
1/3 and 3/8 rule – Gaussian two point and three point quadrature formula.
41
UNIT IV TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12
Sampling distributions – Type I and Type II errors - One sample and two sample tests for means and proportions
of large samples (z-test) - One sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test) - F-test for two
sample standard deviations - Chi-square distribution - Tests for independence of attributes and goodness of fit.
UNIT V DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12
Analysis of variance – One way classification – Completely Randomized Design (CRD) - Two way classification –
Randomized Block Design (RBD) - Latin square Design.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, Khanna Publishers,
th th
New Delhi, 9 Edition, 2010 (7 Reprint 2012).
2. R.A. Johnson and C.B. Gupta, “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson
th
Education, Asia, 8 Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Sankar Rao.K, “ Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers”, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India
Private, New Delhi, 2009.
2. P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy and K.Gunavathy, “Numerical Methods”, S. Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi,
rd
3 Edition, 2010.
3. Walpole, R. E., Myers, R. H. Myers R. S. L. and Ye. K, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
th
Scientists”, 8 Edition, Pearsons Education, Delhi, 2007.
4. Lipschutz. S and Schiller. J, “Schaum’s outlines - Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, Tata
st
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1 Edition, 2011.
5. Gupta, S.C, and Kapur, V.K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan hand, New Delhi,
Reprint 2014.
15EE401 DC Machines and Transformers L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Principles of electromechanical energy conversion in singly and doubly excited systems.
 Working principles of DC machines, types and characteristics, starting and methods of speed control.
 Estimation of various losses in D.C. machines by conducting different tests.
 Principle of operation, prediction of performance, the methods of testing the transformers and three
phase transformer connections.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Describe the concept of core losses and energy conversion of Electro mechanical devices.
 Apply specific DC Machine for particular applications.
 Estimate Transformer parameters and its performance.
UNIT I ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION 12
Principle of Energy conversion – Review of magnetic circuit analysis Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction –
Hysterisis and Eddy Current losses – AC operation of magnetic circuits - Singly and Doubly Excited magnetic
42
field systems – Design of permanent magnets – Torque production in rotating machines.
UNIT II DC GENERATORS 12
Constructional features of a DC machine – Principle of Operation of DC generator – EMF equation – Methods of

Excitation – Types of generator – No load and Load characteristics of DC generators – Commutation – Armature
Reaction and its effects – Parallel operation of DC shunt generators – Applications.
UNIT III DC MOTORS 12
Principle of operation – Back EMF & Torque equation – Characteristics of series, shunt & compound motors –
starting of DC motors– Types of starters– Speed control methods for DC shunt & series motors – Applications.
UNIT IV TESTING OF DC MACHINES 12
Losses & efficiency – Condition for maximum efficiency – Testing of DC machines – Brake test, Swinburne’s test
& Hopkinson’s test – Introduction to electric braking of DC shunt and series motor – Plugging, Dynamic &
Regenerative braking (Qualitative treatment only).
UNIT V TRANSFORMERS 12
Construction – Principle of Operation – EMF Equation –Transformer on no load and load – Phasor diagram –
Equivalent Circuit – Losses and efficiency.
Testing: Polarity test, Open Circuit and short circuit tests, Sumpner’s test – Efficiency and Voltage Regulation –
Auto Transformer –Tap Changing – Parallel operation of single phase transformers – Three phase transformer
connections.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nagrath, I.J.and Kothari, D.P.”, “Electrical Machines”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi,
Reprint 2011.
rd
2. Theraja A.K & Theraja B.L, “ A Text book of Electrical Technology (Vol II)”, S Chand & Co- .,3 Edition
2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Rajput, R.K, “Electrical Machines”, Laxmi publications, New Delhi 5 Edition, 2008.
2. Parkar Smith, N.N., “Problems in Electrical Engineering” CBS Publishers and Distributers, New Delhi,
9th Edition, 2003.
th
3. Say.M.G. “Alternating Current Machines”, ELBS & Pitman, London, 5 Edition,1992.
15EE402 CONTROL SYSTEMS ENGINEERING L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Transfer function modeling of electrical and mechanical systems.
 Time domain, frequency domain and stability analysis.
 Design of compensators.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
43
 develop mathematical models of electrical and mechanical systems
 Estimate the time domain and frequency domain specifications
 Analyze the performance and stability of system through time domain and frequency domain approach.
 Design the lag and lead compensators for desired system performance
 Design state space model of a system.
UNIT I SYSTEM MODELLING AND REPRESENTATION 12

System concepts- Classifications of control system-Transfer function Modeling of Electrical systems, Mechanical
systems (Translational & Rotational systems) - AC and DC Servomotors- Electrical Analogy of Mechanical
Systems - Block diagram reduction techniques –Signal flow graphs– Mason’ gain formula.
UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS 12
Standard test signals- Time response of First-order system for different input Signals - Time response of Second-
order systems for step input signal - Time domain specifications - Steady state error constants: Position, Velocity
and Acceleration error constants- Generalized error series –Transfer function model and characteristics of P, PI,
PD and PID controllers.
UNIT III STABILITY ANALYSIS 12
Characteristics equation –Concepts of Stability - Location of roots in S-plane for stability- Routh-Hurwitz Stability
criterion – Necessary and sufficient conditions for stability– Root locus concept-Rules for construction of root loci-
Root locus plot for stability analysis.
UNIT IV FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 12

Frequency domain specifications – Peak resonance, Resonant frequency, Bandwidth and Cut-off rate-
Correlation between time and frequency responses for second order systems-Gain margin and phase margin –
Bode plot method - Polar plot method - Stability analysis using Gain and Phase margin- Nyquist plot method.
UNIT V COMPENSATOR DESIGN & STATE VARIABLE MODEL 12

Compensators: Performance criteria – Lag and Lead compensators networks– Design of Lag and Lead
compensators using Bode plot method. Concepts of state, state variable, state model-State models for simple
electrical system– Phase variable model – Canonical model.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nagrath.J and Gopal.M,” Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, 5th Edition,
2012.
2. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, 5th Edition, Education / Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gopal.M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, McGraw- Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Palani.S,“Control Systems Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd, 4th Edition ,2012.
3. Richard C. Dorf & Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, 12th Edition 2011.
4. Schaum’s Outline Series, “Feedback and Control Systems”, McGraw- Hill, 2nd Edition, 2011.
5. Dhanesh N.Manik, “Control Systems”, Cengage Learning, Delhi, 1st Edition, 2012.
6. Benjamin C Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, John wiley & sons, inc., 9th Edition, 2009.
44
15EE403 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop expressions for the computation of transmission line parameters..
 To obtain the equivalent circuits for the transmission lines based on distance and operating voltage for
determining voltage regulation and efficiency. Also to improve the voltage profile of the transmission
system.
 To analyses the voltage distribution in insulator strings and cables and methods to improve the same.
 To understand the operation of the different distribution schemes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 calculate the sag for transmission lines.
 distinguish insulators and determine the string efficiency of insulator and predict the performance
parameters of UG cable.
 design the transmission line parameters for specific performance and estimate the voltage drop in
distributors.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND CALCULATION OF SAG 12
Structure of electric power system - operating voltages of generation, transmission and distribution – advantage
of higher operating voltage for AC transmission - Right of Way.
Mechanical designs of transmission line – sag and tension calculations- effect of ice and wind,
UNIT II TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS 12
Resistance, inductance and capacitance calculations: single and three phase transmission lines - double circuits
- solid, stranded and bundled conductors - symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing – transposition of lines -
concepts of GMR and GMD - skin and proximity effects – interference with neighbouring communication circuits,
UNIT III MODELLING AND PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES 12
Transmission line classification - short line, medium line and long line – equivalent circuits –Sending end voltage,
current, voltage regulation and transmission efficiency- ABCD constants- real and reactive power flow in lines –
power angle diagram - surge-impedance loading - Ferranti effect - surge impedance. Corona discharge
characteristics – critical voltage and corona loss.
UNIT IV INSULATORS AND UG CABLES 12
Insulators: Types - Characteristics and classification – voltage distribution in insulator string - improvement of
string efficiency.
Underground cables: constructional features of LT and HT cables – insulation resistance, capacitance, and
dielectric stress – tan δ and power loss - grading of UG cables - thermal characteristics.
UNIT V DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 12
Feeders, distributors and service mains. DC 2-wire distributor – radial and ring main distribution. AC distribution –
single phase (with concentrated and distributed loads) and three phase 3-wire and 4-wire distribution with
balanced and unbalanced loads.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
45
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gupta B.R., “Power System Analysis and Design”, S. Chand, New Delhi, 2008.
2. Soni M L, Gupta P V, Bhatnagar U S and Chakrabarthi A, "A Text Book on Power System
Engineering", Dhanpat Rai & Co., New Delhi, 2008.
3. Kothari D P and Nagrath J, “Power System Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company New Delhi,
second Edition 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Uppal S L, "Electrical Power", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Thirteenth Edition, 1995.
2. Wadhwa C L, "Electrical Power Systems", New Age International Publishers, Delhi, 2006 Fourth Edition
Reprint Aug, 2007.
3. Mehta V K, Rohit Mehta , "Principles of Power Systems", S.Chand & Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
4. Gupta J B, “A Course in Electrical Power”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2003
5. Singh S.N., “Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2002.
15EC405 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits.
 To outline the design procedure of applications using operational amplifiers, analog multipliers and PLL.
 To understand the operation of ADC and DAC
 To introduce the concepts of waveform generation and introduce some special function ICs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Describe the fabrication methods and characteristics of op-amp and Time ICs
 Design different applications using general purpose op- amp and application specific ICs.
 Design multipliers and PLL, and design of applications using Timer IC.
UNIT I IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification, fundamental of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and etching, diffusion of
impurities, Active and passive components of ICs, Fabrication of a typical circuit. Realization of monolithic ICs
and packaging. Fabrication of diodes, capacitance, resistance and FETs. Thin and Thick film technology. State of
the art Technology trends in IC fabrication.
UNIT II CHARACTERISTICS OF OPAMP 9
Ideal OP-AMP characteristics, Basic op-amp configurations, Ideal op-amp circuit analysis, Loop gain, General
operational amplifier stages -and internal circuit diagrams of IC 741, differential amplifier; frequency response of
OP-AMP, DC and AC performance characteristics, slew rate, FET operational amplifier. Analysis of data sheets
of an op-amp
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF OPAMP 9
Applications of op-amp – summer, differentiator and integrator, Instrumentation amplifier, AC amplifier, first order
active filters, V/I & I/V converters, comparators, op-amp circuits using diodes, S/H circuit, Log and anti-log
amplifier, Multiplier and divider, Power amplifiers, D/A and A/D converters.
46
UNIT IV TIMER AND PLL 9
555 Timer circuit – Functional block, characteristics & applications; 566-voltage controlled oscillator circuit; 565-
phase lock loop circuit functioning and applications, Triangular wave generator, Saw-tooth wave generator,
UNIT V APPLICATION ICs 9
IC voltage regulators -723 regulator, switching regulator, MA 7840, LM 380 power amplifier, ICL8038 function
generator, Frequency to Voltage and Voltage to Frequency converters, isolation amplifiers, opto coupler, opto
electronic ICs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
nd
1. Roy Choudhary.D, SheilB.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age, 2 Edition, 2003.
th
2. Ramakant A.Gayakward, “Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, Pearson Education, 4 Edition,
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jacob Millman, Christos C.Halkias, “Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital circuits system”,
McGraw Hill, 2003.
th
2. Robert F.Coughlin, Fredrick F.Driscoll, “Op-amp and Linear ICs”, Pearson Education, 4 Edition, 2002 /
PHI.
rd
3. Sergio Franco, “Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits”, 3 Edition, McGraw-
Hill, 2007.
nd
4. David A.Bell, “Op-amp & Linear ICs”, Prentice Hall of India, 2 Edition, 1997
5. Salivahanan S &KanchanaBhaskaran V.S, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, 2008.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Category:Linear_integrated_circuits
2. www.gobookee.org/linear-integrated-circuits-notes
15EC406 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce basic theorems of Boolean algebra and gate level minimization and implementation.
 To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential
circuits
 To introduce the concept of memories and programmable logic devices.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Design both combinational and synchronous and asynchronous sequential logic circuits.
 Describe the behavior of digital components by using hardware description languages
 Describe the function of different memory systems and programmable logic devices.
 Analyze the behavior of Asynchronous Sequential Logic Circuits
UNIT I BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND GATE LEVEL MINIMIZATION 9
Boolean theorems and properties – Boolean functions - Logic gates – Gate Level Minimization using Karnaugh
47
map, POS simplification, Don’t Care conditions and Quine - McCluskey method. Implementations of Logic
Functions using gates-NAND–NOR implementations- concept of bus.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC 9
Design of adders,subtractor, Adder with Look Ahead Carry, Subtraction using adder, Multiplexers-Combinational
logic design using Multiplexers- Demultiplexers and their use in combinational logic design-Magnitude
comparators, Code Converters- BCD to Binary and Binary to BCD, Priority Encoders- Decimal to BCD, Octal to
Binary, Decoders- BCD to Decimal and BCD to Seven Segment Display driver.
UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 9
Latches, Flip-flops - SR, JK, D, T, and Master-Slave – Characteristic table and equation –Application table –
Edge triggering – Level Triggering– Analysis of clocked sequential circuits, State reduction –State assignment
and Design Procedure
UNIT IV COUNTERS AND MEMORIES 9
Ring counter – Shift counters- Design of Synchronous counters: state diagram- State table –State minimization –
State assignment - Excitation table and maps-Circuit implementation, Modulo–n counter, Synchronous counters -
Asynchronous Ripple or serial counter.
Memories: ROM - PROM – EPROM – EEPROM – EAPROM–Programmable Logic Devices – Programmable
Logic Array (PLA) - Programmable Array Logic (PAL).
UNIT V ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 9
Structure and Operation – Design of fundamental mode and pulse mode asynchronous sequential circuits –
Primitive State Table, State Minimization, State Assignment, Excitation and output maps, Incompletely specified
State Machines, Problems in Asynchronous Sequential Circuits – Cycles, Races and Hazards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Salivahanan S and Arivazhagan S, “Digital Circuits and Design”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2006.
2. Morris Mano M and Michael D. Ciletti.,“Digital Design”, Prentice Hall, 5thEdition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Charles H.Roth. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Thomson Learning, 2003.
th
2. Donald P.Leach and Albert Paul Malvino, “Digital Principles and Applications”, 6 Edition, Mc Graw Hill,
2003.
nd
3. Raj Kamal, “Digital systems-Principles and Design”, Pearson education 2 Edition, 2012.
4. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, Pearson Education Inc, New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_electronics
2. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/2319/Digital-Systems-Design/3
15EE451 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students to know about the operation & performance of D.C. machines and transformers
48
and give them experimental ability.
 To enable the students to be familiar with the speed control of DC Motors and No load and Load
characteristics of DC Generators.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Determine the performance characteristics of DC machines.
 Calculate the Equivalent Circuit parameters, and performance of Transformer.
1. Open circuit and load characteristics of separately excited DC shunt generators.

2. Open circuit and load characteristics of self excited DC shunt generators.
3. Load characteristics of DC compound generator with differential and cumulative connection.
4. Load characteristics of DC shunt and compound motor.
5. Load characteristics of DC series motor.
6. Swinburne’s test and speed control of DC shunt motor.
7. Hopkinson’s test on DC motor – generator set.
8. Load test on single-phase transformer and three phase transformer connections.
9. Open circuit & short circuit test and polarity tests on single phase transformer.
10. Sumpner’s test on transformers.
11. Separation of no-load losses in single phase transformer.
12. Study of D.C motor starters.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15EE452 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the students conduct experiments
 For determining the transfer function model of electro mechanical system.
 To analyse performance of first and second order systems using MATLAB.
 On P, PI, PID controller design concepts.
 For stability analysis of linear system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Model electromechanical systems.
 Obtain the performance of first and second order systems.
 Design a controller for the given system specifications.
 Determine the stability of linear systems.
1. Transfer Function of Separately Excited D.C Shunt Generator

2. Transfer Function of Field Controlled D.C Motor
3. Transfer Function of Armature Controlled D.C Motor
4. Transfer Function of A.C Servomotor
49
5. Closed Loop DC & AC Position Control Systems
6. Analog Simulation of Type - 0, 1st Order and 2nd Order Systems.
7. Digital Simulation of First-Order Systems for obtaining the time response of a system to various inputs.
8. Digital Simulation of Second-order Systems for obtaining the time response of a system under various
damping conditions
9. Stability Analysis of Linear Systems using Bode, Root locus & Nyquist plots method using simulation
software.
10. Estimate the Effect of P, PI, PD and PID Controllers on the Linear Second-order system.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15EC453 LINEAR AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the students conduct experiments
 To familiarize the ac and dc characteristics of Opamp 741 and the basic operations of Digital ICs.
 To outline and design procedure of the different applications of IC 741 and IC 555.
 To introduce the functions of counter, shift register and MUx-DeMUX circuits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Demonstrate the characteristics of op-amp and Timer ICs
 Design different applications using linear integrated circuits.
 Design multiplexers and data converters.
1. Applications of Op-Amp using IC741: Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Adder, comparator,
Integrater and Differentiator and Slew rate verifications.
2. Study of Analog to Digital Converter and Digital to Analog Converter: Verification of A/D conversion and
D/A conversion using IC 74147 and IC 0808.
3. Study of VCO and PLL ICs:
i. Voltage to frequency characteristics of NE/ SE 566 IC.
ii. Frequency multiplication using NE/SE 565 PLL IC.
4. Timer IC application: Study of NE/SE 555 timer in Astable, Monostable operation.
5. Study of Basic Digital IC’s. (Verification of truth table for AND, OR, EXOR, NOT, NOR, NAND, JK FF,
RS FF, D FF)
6. Implementation of Boolean Functions, Adder/ Subtractor circuits.
7. Code converters, Parity generator and parity checking, Excess-3, 2s Complement, Binary to Gray code
using IC7486, IC7404, IC7432, IC7408.
8. Encoders and Decoders: Design and Implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO
modes using IC7404, IC7411, IC7432, IC 74147 and IC 7445.
9. Counters: Design and implementation of 4-bit modulo counters as synchronous and Asynchronous
types using IC7476, IC7408, IC7432, IC7400.
10. Shift Registers: Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO modes
using IC7474, IC7408, IC7432.
11. Multiplex/ De-multiplex: Study of 4:1; 8:1; 16:1multiplexers and Study of 1:4; 1:8; 1:16 demultiplexers
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
50
15EE501 INDUCTION AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Operation of AC generators and motors (Both three phase and single phase)
 Methods for determining regulation of AC generator
 Concept involved in the predetermination of parameters of three phase induction motor.
 Starters and speed control methods of three phase induction motor.
 Operation of single phase induction motor and special machines.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explain the principle and operation of AC generators and motors.
 Select starters and control the speed of induction motors.
 Determine various parameters and performance of AC machines
UNIT I SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR 12
Constructional details – Types of rotors – EMF equation – Synchronous reactance – Armature reaction – Voltage
regulation – EMF, MMF, ZPF and ASA methods – Synchronizing and parallel operation – Synchronizing torque -
Operating characteristics - Capability curves– Salient pole Machine: Two reaction theory – Determination of
direct and quadrature axis synchronous reactance using slip test – Phasor diagram using Xd, Xq – Expression for
power developed
UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR 12
Principle of operation – Torque equation – Operation on infinite bus bars - V-curves – Power input and power
developed equations – Starting methods – Current loci for constant power input, constant excitation and constant
power developed – Hunting – natural frequency of oscillations – damper windings - Applications
UNIT III THREE PHASE INDUCTION MACHINES 12
Constructional details – Types of rotors – Principle of operation – Slip – Equivalent circuit – Slip-torque
characteristics - Condition for maximum torque – Losses and efficiency – Load test - No load and blocked rotor
tests - Circle diagram – Separation of no load losses – Cogging – Crawling - Double cage rotors –Induction
generator – Doubly fed induction generator – Synchronous induction motor.
UNIT IV STARTING AND SPEED CONTROL OF THREE PHASE INDUCTION 12

MOTOR
Need for starters – Types of starters: Primary resistor, Autotransformer and Star-delta starters and Rotor
resistance – Speed control: Change of voltage, frequency, number of poles and V/f control – Cascaded
connection – Slip power recovery scheme
UNIT V SINGLE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS AND SPECIAL MACHINES 12
Constructional details of single phase induction motor – Double revolving field theory and operation – Equivalent
circuit –– Starting methods of single-phase induction motors - Shaded pole induction motor - Linear induction
motor - reluctance motor – Repulsion motor - Hysteresis motor - AC series motor.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kothari D.P and Nagrath I.L., “Electric Machines”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd , Fourth
51
Edition,2010.
2. Bhimbhra P.S., “Electrical Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, 2003
3. Theraja B.L., “ A Text of Electrical Technology, Volume-II”, S.Chand & Co Ltd, 2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fitzgerald A.E., Charles Kingsley, Stephen.D.Umans, “Electric Machinery”, McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., 2003.
2. Gupta J.B., “Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines”, S.K.Kataria and Sons, 2002. Cotton H.
“Advanced Electrical Technology “ Pitman, London, 1967.
3. Say M.G., “Alternating current Machines”, ELBS & Pitman, London, IV Edition, 1993
15EE502 POWER ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Different types of power semi-conductor devices and their switching characteristics.
 The operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.
 The operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
 The different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand the harmonic
reduction methods.
 The operation of AC-AC converters.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify and select the switching devices for different power converter applications.
 Design a suitable power converter for given dc load specification from AC input.
 Design and analyze the single or three phase inverters.
 Analyze different ac to ac converters
UNIT I POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Introduction to Power Electronics - Study of switching devices: structure, operation, static and switching
characteristics of Power DIODE, SCR, TRIAC, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT.
SCR: Two Transistor model, Triggering Methods, Commutation Circuits and Snubber circuits.
UNIT II PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9
1-pulse, 2-pulse converters - circuit, operation, waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage and average
load current for continuous current operation - Input power factor estimation for ripple free load current - Effect of
source inductance – Single phase dual converters - 3-pulse and 6-pulse converters – circuit, operation,
waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage.
UNIT III DC TO DC CONVERTER 9
Step-down and Step-up chopper - Time ratio control and Current limit control – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost
converter - Concept of Resonant switching.
UNIT IV INVERTERS 9
Types of Inverter – Voltage Source Inverter and Current Source Inverter – VSI: Single phase and three phase
0 0
inverters (both 120 mode and 180 mode) - PWM techniques: single, multiple, sinusoidal PWM – Voltage and
harmonic control - CSI: single phase ASCI - UPS – types of UPS.
52
UNIT V AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase AC voltage controllers –Integral cycle control, phase angle control - Estimation of RMS load
voltage, RMS load current and input power factor - sequence control - Single phase to single phase
cycloconverters.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Rashid M H, " Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson Education Inc, India, 3
Edition, 2014.
2. P.S.Bimbhra P.S., “Power Electronics“ Khanna Publishers, 5th Edition 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ned Mohan, Undeland and Robbins, “Power Electronics - Converters, Applications and Design”, John
Wiley & sons, 2003.
2. Vedam Subrahmanyam, "Power Electronics", New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 1996.
3. Philip T Krein, “Elements of Power Electronics”, Oxford University Press, Inc., New York, 2003.
4. Sen P.C., “Power Electronics”, McGraw Hill publishers Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
15EE503 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Architecture of 8085 & 8051
 Addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 & 8051.
 The need & use of Interrupt structure 8085 & 8051.
 Developing skill for writing simple programs in 8051 & 8085 and applications
 Interfacing peripheral interface ICs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Develop programming of 8085 microprocessor based on its architecture.
 Design and Implement the Memory & Peripheral Devices interface with 8085 Processor
 Develop programming of 8051 microcontroller based on its architecture.
 Design and Implement the Memory & Peripheral Devices interface with 8051 microcontroller
UNIT I ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING OF 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Functional Block Diagram - Instruction formats – Addressing modes – Instruction set – Need for Assembly language
– Development of Assembly language programs – Assembler Directives - Machine cycles and Timing diagrams
UNIT II INTERRUPTS AND MEMORY INTERFACING 9
Interrupts: Interrupt feature – Need for interrupts - Types of Interrupts – Interrupt structure and their handling.
Memory Interfacing: Interface requirements -Wait states – Memory control signals – Read and write cycles –
Typical ROM and RAM Interfacing. Memory mapped I/O scheme – I/O mapped I/O scheme –Simple I/O ports
UNIT III I/O AND PERIPHERAL IC INTERFACING 9
Study of Architecture and programming of ICs: 8255 PPI, 8251 USART, 8279 Key board display controller and
8253 Timer/ Counter – Interfacing with 8085
53
UNIT IV 8051 MICRO CONTROLLER 9
Functional block diagram - Instruction format and addressing modes – Instruction Set –Simple programs interrupt
structure, Timer –I/O ports – Serial communication, Memory interfacing.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER 9
Seven segment LED Display systems - Interfacing LCD Display - Stepper motor control - Interfacing A/D Converter
–D/A Converter – Waveform generators - Generation of Gate signals
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gaonkar R.S., “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and its Applications with 8085”, Penram
Publications, 6th Edition, 2013.
2. Senthil Kumar N.,Saravanan M.,Jeevananthan.S, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers” Oxford
University Press, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Kenneth Ayala, “8051 Microcontroller”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd 2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, R.D.Kinley “The 8051 Micro Controller and Embedded
Systems”, PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003.
2. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Eastern Company Edition, Prentice – Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2007.
3. Rafiquzzaman. M, “Microprocessors Theory and applications - Intel and Motorola”, Prentice Hall
India, 2001.
4. Douglas V.Hall, “Microprocessors and Digital Systems”, McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. 1980.
15EE551 INDUCTION AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire practical knowledge in determining regulation of synchronous machine, performance
characteristics of synchronous & induction machines and predetermining performance of induction
machines.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 perform load test on generators & motors and to obtain performance characteristics.
 apply various methods and techniques to determine regulation of alternators.
 predetermine the performance characteristics of induction machines.
1. Regulation of three phase alternator by EMF and MMF methods.

2. Regulation of three phase alternator by ZPF and ASA methods.
3. Regulation of three phase salient pole alternator by slip test.
4. Load test on Alternator (with resistive, inductive and capacitive loads)
and study of paralleling two alternators.
54
5. V and Inverted V curves of Three Phase Synchronous Motor.
6. Load test on three-phase induction motor.
7. Predetermination of performance characteristics of three-phase
induction motor by circle diagram and equivalent circuit.
8. Separation of No-load losses of three-phase induction motor.
9. Load test on single-phase induction motor.
10. Equivalent circuit of single-phase induction motor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15EE552 OOPS LABORATORY FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS L T P C
0 2 4 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 basic concepts of Object Oriented Paradigm.
 implementation of Object Oriented concepts in C++ programming language.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
 Address the concept of Object-Oriented Programming and how object-oriented concepts are
incorporated into C++ programming language.
 Apply the concepts of data encapsulation and inheritance to the applications of varying complexities.
 Apply the concepts of operator overloading, Template and Exception handling in C++
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Simple class design in C++, objects creations
2. Class design in C++ using dynamic memory allocation, destructor, constructor
3. Implementation of copy constructor and friend functions
4. Function overloading, default arguments in C++ - application to solve electric circuits, line parameters, etc.,
5. Unary and Binary Operator overloading
6. Overloading assignment operator- type conversions – application for conversion between polar and
rectangular
7. Inheritance, run-time polymorphism – application to find I & V in different types of DC motors/generators
8. Implementation of Function Template in C++
9. Implementation of Class Template in C++
10. Exception handling mechanism in C++
SYLLABUS
Object oriented programming concepts – Introduction to C++- objects-classes - - dynamic memory allocation -
constructors and destructors
Copy constructor – function overloading - operator overloading - friend functions- type conversions- templates -
Inheritance – virtual functions- runtime polymorphism.
Exception handling -namespace
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
55
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Robert Lafore, “Object Oriented Programming in C++”,Galgotia Publications, 2001.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Object Oriented Programming with C++”, McGraw Hill, IInd Edition,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Herbert Schildt, “C++ - The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, Addison Wesley, 2000.
3. John .R .Hubbard, “Schaums Outline Programming with C++”, McGraw Hill, 2003.
4. Lippman S.B., Josee Lajoie, Barbara E. Moo, “C++ Premier”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition,2005.
15HS551 Professional Communication Skills Lab L T P C

(Common to Civil/EEE/CSE)
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives
 To enable the students of engineering and technology attain effective professional communication skills
 To make them successful corporates
 To upgrade the language proficiency level of engineering students
 To train the aspirants to get through interviews successfully
Course Outcomes:
Students of Engineering and technology will be able to
 attain effective communication skills

 enhance business communication
 acquire language proficiency
 face interviews with confidence.
Vocabulary Building 9
Synonyms & antonyms, grammar: error spotting exercise, listening exercise, reading comprehension exercises,
sequencing the jumbled sentences, cloze test
Business Correspondence 9
Report Writing: types of Reports- Project report – report format, Preparation of a report based on the newspaper
article. Writing memos, notice, agenda and circular.
Group Discussion 9
Group Discussion-an introduction, Sample videos on GD and appraisal, Participation in Group Discussion-
Persuasive skills, Negotiating ability, team skills and leadership Quality.
Interview Skills and Soft Skills 9
Resume designing, Online Resume, Successful interview skills, mock interviews, and Motivation – self-image –
goal setting – managing changes – corporate etiquette, body language, and power dressing- time management –
stress management, Career and life planning.
Theatre Art and an Introduction to International Examinations 9
Master of Ceremony, Welcome Address, Role play activities, dramatics, An Introduction to International English
Language Testing System (IELTS) – Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), Cambridge Advanced
English(CAE)– Graduate Record Examination (GRE) – Civil Service (Language related)
TOTAL: 45 Periods
56
Reference books
1. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. New Delhi: Pearson
Education, 2001.
2. Berry, Thomas Elliott. Most Common Mistakes in English Usage. New Delhi: TMH Publication Company
Limited, 2012.
3. Thorpe,E and Heaton,S. ObjectiveEnglish. Ed: Pearson Education, II Edition, New Delhi: 2007.
4. Bhatnagar, R.P. English for Competitive Examination. 3 ed. Macmillan, New Delhi: 2012.
5. Bhatnagar, R.P., NITINBhatnagar and Mamta. Communicative English for Engineers & Professionals.
Noida: Pearson Education, 2010.
15EE601 ELECTRICAL DRIVES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the basic knowledge of Electrical Drives.

 To analyze the operation of controlled rectifier and chopper fed DC Drives.
 To analyze and design the current and speed controllers for solid state DC motor drives.
 To study and understand the speed control of Induction motor and synchronous motor drives.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Design and analyze the operation of the various controlled rectifier and chopper fed DC drive.
 Analyze and design the current and speed controllers for solid state DC motor drives.
 Analyze the various speed control methods of induction motor and synchronous motor drives and the
selection of drives for industrial applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL DRIVES 9
Introduction to electrical drives – drive system, types, choice of electrical drives; Dynamics of electrical drives-
fundamental torque equation, multi-quadrant operation, equivalent values of drive parameters, components of
load torques, classification of load torques, steady state stability, modes of operation.
UNIT II DC MOTOR DRIVE 9
DC motor Fundamental relations- Analysis of separately excited DC motor fed single-phase semi converter,
single-phase full converter and three phase full converter with continuous conduction mode- Time ratio and
current limit control of chopper- Performance analysis of chopper controlled separately excited DC motor drive for
motoring and braking operation- four quadrant chopper controlled DC motor drive.
UNIT III DESIGN OF CONTROLLERS FOR DC DRIVES 9
Transfer function of separately excited DC motors, Design of controllers: Current controller and speed controller -
Converter selection and characteristics- Closed loop control of armature and field control- PLL and
microcomputer control of DC drives.
UNIT IV INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 9
Introduction - Equivalent circuit, speed-torque characteristics, Steady state performance equations, Stator
Voltage Control - Constant Voltage Variable Frequency operation - Constant V/f operation, VSI and CSI fed
induction motor drives- Closed loop control- Concept of slip power recovery scheme.
UNIT V SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES AND SELECTION OF DRIVES 9
Wound field cylindrical rotor motor – Equivalent circuit– synchronous motors variable speed drives-separate
57
control and self controlled synchronous motor drive using load commutated thyristor inverter–Permanent magnet
AC motor drives.
Selection of drives: Textile mills, cement mills and paper mills.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dubey G.K., “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, Second Edition ,2015
2. Krishnan R., “ Electric Motor & Drives: Modelling, Analysis and Control”, Pearson Education, 2015
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bimal K Bose, “Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives” Pearson Education., 2016
2. Vedam Subramanyam, “Electric Drives – Concepts and Applications”, McGraw Hill, Second Edition
,2010
3. Sen P.C “Thyristor DC Drives”, John Wiely and sons, 1981.
4. Pillai S.K., “A First Course on Electrical Drives”., New Age International Publishers, Third Edition, 2013.
5. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Education,
Third Edition, 2004.
15EE602 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To become familiar with different aspects of modeling of system components
 To model steady-state operation of large-scale power systems
 To solve the power flow problems using efficient numerical methods suitable for computer simulation.
 To understand the concept of symmetrical and un-symmetrical faults in power system studies.
 To model and analyse the dynamics of power system for small-signal and large signal disturbances
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explain the concept and methods for power flow analysis in power system
 Model and analyse power systems under abnormal (fault) conditions.
 Analyse the system stability.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
Basic Components of a power system and its modeling - Single line diagram -Per Phase Analysis -Per unit
system - Simple building algorithms for the formation of Y-Bus matrix and Z-Bus matrix.
UNIT II POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 12
Importance of power flow analysis in planning and operation of power systems-Statement of power flow problem
- Bus Classifications – power flow solution methods -Gauss Seidal method - Newton Raphson method (polar
form) - Fast decoupled method (qualitative study only) - Flow charts - Comparison.
UNIT III SYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 12
Need of short circuit analysis - Symmetrical three phase fault- Short circuit capacity- systematic fault analysis
using bus impedance matrix (Bus frame analysis).
58
UNIT IV UNSYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 12
Fundamentals of symmetrical components – sequence impedances – sequence networks representation – single

line to ground fault – line to line fault - Double line to ground fault – unsymmetrical fault analysis using bus
impedance matrix (algorithm and flow chart).
UNIT V POWER SYSTEM STABILITY ANALYSIS 12
Importance of stability analysis in power system planning and operation -Basic concepts and definitions – Swing
equation- Solution of swing equation((Method 2) - Rotor angle stability – An elementary view of transient stability
– Equal area criterion – critical clearing angle and time- Numerical integration methods (Algorithm and flow chart)
– Euler method – modified Euler method
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John J. Grainger and W.D. Stevenson Jr., “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill International Book
st
Company, 1 Edition, 2003.
2. Nagrath I.J. and Kothari D.P., “Modern Power System Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 2003.
3. Hadi Saadat, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2002.
4. P. Venkatesh, B. V. Manikandan, A. Srinivasan, S. Charles Raja, “Electrical Power Systems: Analysis,
Security and Deregulation” Prentice Hall India (PHI), 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wadhwa C L, "Electrical Power Systems", New Age International Publishers, Delhi, 2006 Fourth Edition
Reprint Aug, 2007.
2. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill, Publications, 2013
3. Olle. I. Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems Theory – An Introduction”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2013.
4. Pai M.A., “Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis”, McGraw – Hill Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 2003.
5. Gupta B.R., “Power System Analysis and Design”, S. Chand, New Delhi, 2003.
15EE603 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide sound knowledge on the design of various electrical machines.

 To impart knowledge on thermal rating of electrical machines.
 To make the students design armature and field systems for D.C. machines.
 To enable the students design core, yoke, windings and cooling systems of transformers.
 To facilitate the students design stator and rotor of induction machines and synchronous machines.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Calculate the Temperature Rise of Machines under different loading conditions.
 Design the different parts of D.C. Machines Design a Transformer.
 Design the different parts of Synchronous Machines and Induction Machines.
59
Major considerations in Electrical Machine Design - Electrical Engineering Materials – Space factor – Choice of
Specific Electrical and Magnetic loadings – Thermal considerations - Rating of machines – Standard
specifications.
UNIT II DC MACHINES 12
Output Equations – Main Dimensions - Magnetic circuit calculations – Carter’s Coefficient - Net length of Iron –
Real and Apparent flux densities – Selection of number of poles – Design of Armature – Design of commutator
and brushes.
UNIT III TRANSFORMERS 12
Output Equations – Main Dimensions - kVA output for single and three phase transformers – Window space
factor – Overall dimensions – Temperature rise – Design of Tank - Methods of cooling of Transformers –
Dissolved Gas Analysis.
UNIT IV INDUCTION MOTORS 12
Output equation of Induction motor – Main dimensions – Length of air gap - Rules for selecting rotor slots of
squirrel cage machines – Design of rotor bars and slots – Design of end rings – Design of wound rotor –
Magnetizing current - Short circuit current .
UNIT V SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS 12
Output equation – Design of salient pole machines – Short circuit ratio – shape of pole face – Armature design –
Armature parameters – Estimation of air gap length – Design of rotor – Determination of full load field mmf –
Design of field winding – Design of turbo alternators – Rotor design.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sawhney, A.K., 'A Course in Electrical Machine Design', Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, Fifth Edition,
2014.
2. Sen, S.K., 'Principles of Electrical Machine Designs with Computer Programmes', Oxford and IBH
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Reprint 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Shanmugasundaram A., Gangadharan.G, Palani R., “Electrical Machine Design Data Book”, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2007.
2. Balbir Singh, ‘Electrical Machine Design', Vikas Publishing House Private Limited, 1981.
15EE651 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Programming of 8085 and its instruction set.
 Interfacing peripheral devices such as keyboard, ADC, DAC and stepper motor with 8085.
 Programming of 8051 based controller using the Keil development tool.
60
 Interfacing peripheral devices such as keyboard, ADC, DAC, stepper motor and USART with 8051.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Develop programming of 8085 microprocessor based on its architecture and instruction set.
 Design and Implement the Peripheral Devices interface with 8085 Processor
 Develop programming of 8051 microcontroller based on its architecture and instruction set.
 Design and Implement the Peripheral Devices interface with 8051 hardware components
1. Addition, subtraction, multiplication and division using 8085 processor
2. Programming of array handling and sorting using looping and counting using 8085 microprocessor
3. Interfacing ADC with 8085
4. Interfacing DAC with 8085
5. Interfacing matrix keyboard and multiplexed display with 8058 using 8279
6. Multi precision addition, multiplication and division using 8051 based controller
7. Code conversion: binary to ASCII and binary to BCD code conversion using 8051
8. Stepper motor interface using 8051
9. LCD interface with 8051
10. Study of Integrated Development Environment tool for 8051 based system
11. PWM signal generation using timer interrupts
12. Study of C compiler for serial communication
13. Frequency measurement using microcontroller
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15EE652 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Single phase and three phase AC-DC converters fed dc drives.
 Chopper fed dc motor drives and Inverter fed induction motor drives.
 Simulation of basic topological power converter circuits
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Design and analyze the controlled rectifiers.
 Design and analyze the choppers and chopper fed dc drives.
 Analyze the inverter operation and inverter fed induction motor drives.
EXP.NO LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Characteristics of SCR and TRIAC.

2. Characteristics of MOSFET and IGBT.
3. Single phase semi converter with R, RL and RLE load.
4. Single phase full converter with R, RL and RLE load.
5. Three phase full converter with R Load.
6. Step down Chopper with R, RL and RLE load.
7. Step up Chopper with R and RL load.
8. Single Phase PWM inverter.
61
9. Speed control of three phase induction motor using inverter.
10. Single phase AC voltage Controller
11. Generation of PWM signals using micro controller.
12. Single Phase cycloconverter
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15EE653 TECHNICAL SEMINAR L T P C
0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To help students to acquire communication and presentational skills and their application in social
communication.
 To enrich their knowledge on recent technical topics.
 To create conditions for acquirement of other special skills important for effective functioning of
graduates in practice.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Communicate their interest and present more effectively.
 Prepare quality and focused presentation.
 Learn skills essential for becoming successful student researchers, such as strategies for negotiating
the research process and critical analysis of research papers.
 Face the placement interviews with confidence.
In this course, every student has to present at least two technical papers on recent advancements in
engineering/technology referring IEEE and other reputed international journal papers and will be evaluated by the
course instructor. During the seminar session, each student is expected to present a topic, for duration of about
18 to 20 minutes which will be followed by a discussion for 5 minutes. Each student is responsible for selecting a
suitable topic that has not been presented previously. Every student is expected to participate actively in the
ensuing class discussion by asking questions and providing constructive criticism.
15EE701 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Operation of power system
 Modeling the power system for real power-frequency and reactive power – voltage control.
 Concepts of computer control of power systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Describe power system behavior, operations and control.
 Analyze the optimal dispatch problems and unit commitment in various power plants
 Describe basic principles of SCADA systems and its implementation in real time
62
System load – variation - load characteristics - load curves and load-duration curve (daily, weekly and annual) -
load factor - diversity factor-Introduction to ABT. Importance of load forecasting -simple techniques. An overview
of power system operation and control.
UNIT II REAL POWER - FREQUENCY CONTROL 9
Fundamentals of speed governing mechanism and modeling - speed-load characteristics – load sharing between
two synchronous machines in parallel. Concept of control area- LFC control of a single-area system. Static and
dynamic analysis of uncontrolled and controlled cases. Integration of economic dispatch control with LFC. Two-
area system – modeling – static and dynamic analysis - uncontrolled case, tie line with frequency bias control of
two-area system, state variable model –two area system.
UNIT III REACTIVE POWER–VOLTAGE CONTROL 9
Basics of reactive power control. Types of Excitation system – AVR modeling. Static and dynamic analysis -
stability compensation - generation and absorption of reactive power. Relation between voltage, power and
reactive power at a node.
Method of voltage control - tap-changing transformer, SVC (TCR + TSC) and STATCOM. System level control
using generator voltage magnitude setting, tap setting of OLTC transformer.
UNIT IV ECONOMIC DISPATCH AND UNIT COMMITMENT 9
Introduction- economic dispatch problem – cost of generation – incremental cost curve - co-ordination equations
without loss and with loss, solution by direct method and λ-iteration method. (No derivation of loss
coefficients).Base Point and participation factors. Economic dispatch controller added to LFC control.
Statement of Unit Commitment problem – constraints; spinning reserve, thermal unit constraints, hydro
constraints, fuel constraints and other constraints. UC Solution methods - Priority-list methods. Numerical
problems only in priority-list method using full-load average production cost.
UNIT V COMPUTER CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS 9
Need of computer control of power system. Energy control centre: Functions - system monitoring - data
acquisition and control. System hardware configuration – SCADA and EMS functions. Network topology - state
estimation - security analysis and control. Various operating states (Normal, alert, emergency, in-extremis and
restorative) showing various state transitions and control strategies- System Black out (Case studies).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Olle. I. Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems Theory – An Introduction”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Allen.J.Wood and Bruce F.Wollenberg, “Power Generation, Operation and Control”, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., 2013.
3. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
4. Abhijit Chakrabarti, Sunita Halder, “Power System Analysis Operation and Control”, PHI learning Pvt.
Ltd., Third Edition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kothari D.P., Nagrath I.J., “Modern Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,
Third Edition, 2013.
2. Mahalanabis A.K., Kothari D.P., Ahson S., “Computer Aided Power System Analysis and Control”,
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 1988.
3. Gupta B.R., Vandana Singhal ‘Power System operation and control’, S.Chand Publications, Reprint
2014.
63
4. Murty P.S.R., ‘Operation and Control in Power Systems’, B.S. Publications, First Edition, 2007.
5. Kirchmayer, Leon.K, ‘Economic Operation of Power Systems’ Wiley Eastern Limited, 1985.
6. Weedy. B.M., Cory B.J., ‘Electric Power Systems’ John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2004.
7. Hadi Saadat, ‘Power System Analysis’, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 21st reprint, 2010.
8. Ramana N.V., “Power System Operation and Control,” Pearson, 2011.
9. Gross C.A., “Power System Analysis,” Wiley India, 2011.
15EE702 PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the importance of protection, protection schemes and earthing.

 To study the characteristics, functions and application areas of fuses, relays and circuit breakers.
 To acquire practical knowledge about common faults in power system apparatus and applying suitable
protective schemes.
 To understand the problems associated with circuit breaking.
 To discuss about the various circuit breakers and methods of testing.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the importance of protective schemes and earthing.
 Describe the various relays, circuit breakers and their applications.
 Identify appropriate protective schemes for protection of apparatus from various faults.
Importance of protective schemes for electrical apparatus and power system. Types of protective schemes -
Types of faults, fault statistics and effects of faults - relay terminologies – essential qualities of protection. Power
System earthing and types of earthing - Arcing ground - Peterson Coil.
UNIT II PROTECTIVE TRANSFORMERS AND RELAYS 9
Protective Transformers: CTs and PTs – operating principle and construction – types and applications.
Relays: Electromagnetic relays – over current, directional and non-directional, distance, negative sequence,
differential and under frequency relays – Introduction to static relays and Numerical relays.
UNIT III APPARATUS PROTECTION 9
Alternator : Stator protection - Percentage differential protection - Protection against stator inter-turn faults -
Stator overheating protection - Rotor protection - Field ground fault protection - Loss of excitation - Rotor
overheating protection – Field suppression.
Transformer: Common faults – Buchholtz relay – differential protection.
Motor: Comprehensive protection scheme.
Transmission line: Time graded protection - distance protection of HV and EHV lines - Pilot wire protection -
Carrier current protection
UNIT IV THEORY OF CIRCUIT INTERRUPTION 9
Physics of arc phenomena and arc interruption. Theories for arc interruption - AC circuit breaking - restriking
voltage and recovery voltage - rate of rise of recovery voltage - resistance switching - current chopping -
interruption of capacitive current. DC circuit breaking.
64
UNIT V CIRCUIT BREAKERS 9
Types of circuit breakers – Construction and working principle-Oil, air blast, air break, SF6 and vacuum circuit
breakers –Advantages and disadvantages of various circuit breakers – Selection of CBs – Ratings of CBs
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. M.L. Soni, P.V. Gupta, V.S. Bhatnagar, A. Chakrabarti, ‘A Text Book on Power System Engineering’,
Dhanpat Rai & Co., 1998.
2. Badri Ram, Vishwakarma, ‘Power System Protection and Switchgear’, McGraw Hill, 2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sunil S. Rao, ‘Switchgear and Protection’, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 2013.
2. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Electrical Power Systems’, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2000.
3. B. Ravindranath, and N. Chander, ‘Power System Protection & Switchgear’, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2005.
4. Y.G. Paithankar and S.R. Bhide, ‘Fundamentals of Power System Protection’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi–110001, 2003.
15EE751 POWER SYSTEM SIMULATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To assist the students acquire software development skills and experience in the usage of standard
packages necessary for analysis and simulation of power system required for its planning, operation and
control.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Develop C/C++ programs for the Computation of parameters and modelling of transmission lines,
formation of bus admittance and impedance matrices and for Unit Commitment and Economic Dispatch.
 Use standard software packages for Power flow analysis, Fault analysis, Transient stability analysis and
Load-Frequency Dynamics and control of power system.
1. Computation of Parameters and Modelling of Transmission Lines.
2. Formation of Bus Admittance Matrix of a network.
3. Formation of Bus Impedance Matrix of a network.
4. Load Flow Analysis by Gauss-Seidel Method.
5. Load Flow Analysis by Newton-Raphson and Fast-Decoupled Methods.
6. Symmetrical Fault Analysis.
7. Unsymmetrical Fault Analysis.
8. Transient Stability Analysis of Single-Machine Infinite Bus System.
9. Load – Frequency Dynamics of Single- Area and Two-Area Power Systems.
10. Economic Dispatch in Power Systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
65
15EE752 MINI PROJECT L T P C
0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The aim of the mini project work is to deepen comprehension of principles by applying them to new
technical problems which may be the design and manufacture of a device/system, a research
investigation, a computer or management project.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify and formulate the technical problem.
 Make effective literature survey for the identified problem.
 Finalization of project specification and requirements.
 Presentation / Demonstration about the work done.
 Implement Project successfully (Hardware / Software / both).
 A consolidated report.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES:
The students will carry out a project in one of the following Electrical and Electronics Engineering areas
but with substantial multidisciplinary component:
 Electrical and Electronic circuits.
 Electrical Machines and drives.
 Analog and Digital Electronic circuits.
 Power systems engineering
 High voltage engineering
 Power Electronics and drives.
 Applied electronics
 Instrumentation and control system
 Renewable power generation System
 Embedded systems.
 PC based electrical system analysis
 PLC and SCADA etc.
Student groups will be formed (2/3 in a group) and a faculty member will be allocated to guide them. There will be
three reviews. First review will not carry any marks but the project topic will be finalized in it. Of remaining 2
reviews one will be carried out in the mid-semester and the last one by the end of semester.
GUIDELINES:
1. Students should select a problem which addresses some basic home, office or other real life
applications.
2. Students should understand testing of various components.
3. Soldering of components should be carried out by students.
4. Students should develop a necessary PCB for the circuit.
5. Students should see that final circuit submitted by them is in working condition.
6. Minimum of 10-20 pages report to be submitted by students.
7. Group of maximum three students can be permitted to work on a single mini project.
66
8. The mini project must have hardware part. The software part is optional.
9. Department may arrange demonstration with poster presentation of all mini projects developed by the
students at the end of semester.
10. It is desirable that the electronic circuit/systems developed by the students have some novel features.
15EE753 COMPREHENSIVE SKILL DEVELOPMENT L T P C
0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The aim of the comprehension course is to enhance the employability skills of students with a special focus on
Presentation skills, Group discussion skills, Interview skills, and also the Arithmetic, Analytic & Verbal knowledge
skills through periodic exercise which are necessary for the workplace situations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Enhance the employability skills.

 Prepare and present Technical Seminar effectively.
 Find out optimum solution for societal problem through group discussion.
 Succeed in competitive examination.
Ex.1. WEEKLY NEWS 5
 From Dailies, weekly and other Magazines, State News, National News.
International News, Science and Technology development news and Sports News.
Ex.2. TECHNICAL SEMINAR 5
 Making presentations: introducing a topic -Preparing effective PPTs – presenting the visuals effectively–
Technical seminars- answering questions – individual presentation practice.
From the previous UG projects, Academic subjects, from Electronics for You, from Electrical India, other
Technical Magazines & Journals.
Ex.3. GROUP DISCUSSION: 5
 Participating in group discussions – understanding group dynamics – brainstorming the topic.
Ex.4. APTITUDE TEST: 5
(i) Technical
(ii) General (Arithmetic, Analytic, Verbal)
Apply technical knowledge to write Technical Aptitude test for succeeding in any competitive examinations. Apply
Arithmetic, Analytic and Verbal knowledge to write General Aptitude test and for succeeding in any competitive
examinations.
Ex.5. MOCK INTERVIEW 5
Imparting training in soft skills - persuasive skills – People skills - questioning and clarifying skills – Interview
67
etiquette – dress code – body language – mock interview.
Enable them to gain confidence to face the placement interviews & react to the questions posed.
TOTAL: 25 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma. “Technical Communication- Principles and Practice”,
Oxford University Press, 2009.
2. Dhanavel.S.P, “English and Communication Skills for Students of Science and Engineering”, Orient
Blackswan Ltd., 2009.
3. Agarwal.R.S , “Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations”, S.Chand Limited 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Abhijit Guha, “Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations”, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2011.
2. Edgar Thrope, “Test of Reasoning for Competitive Examinations”, McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
15EE851 PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 0 12 6
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The aim of the project work is provide students the opportunity to apply their theoretical knowledge to
substantiate Electrical and Electronics engineering problems, which requires analytical, and/or design and/or
experimental effort.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
 Plan an engineering project with resource and time constraints. Conduct research into an engineering
problem including the use of printed and computer-based literature
 Apply technical knowledge and skills to solving an engineering problem as part of a project team.
 Manage an engineering project with respect to a plan incorporating intermediate and final goals.
 Communicate the results of an engineering project by means of an oral presentation, by means of
written reports and by means of a practical demonstration of the project outcomes during an
examination day.
SELECTION & ASSESSMENT OF PROJECT WORK:

The aim of the project work is to deepen comprehension of principles by applying them to a new
problem which may be the design and manufacture of a device, a research investigation, a computer or
management project or a design problem.
Project work may be allotted to a single student or to a group of students not exceeding 3 per group. A
Project topic must be selected either from published lists or the students themselves may propose suitable topics
in consultation with their guides. Project group students must maintain daily log register (mentioning day to day
progress of the project). Cost estimation of the project has to be done by each group.
The Professor and Head shall constitute a review committee. There shall be three reviews during the
semester by the review committee. The student shall make presentation on the progress of the project made by
him / her before the committee. The internal assessment marks will be awarded based on the reviews,
attendance and the performance assessed by the guide.
A project report is to be submitted at the end of the semester. The end semester examination for project work
shall consist of evaluation of the final report submitted by the student or students of the project group by an
internal and external examiner, followed by a viva-voce examination conducted by a committee consisting of the
external examiner, the guide of the project group and internal examiner.
68
15EEC01 PROCESSING OF DIGITAL SIGNALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Classification of signals and systems & their mathematical representation.
 Analysis of discrete-time systems using different types of transforms.
 Design of Digital Filters
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the concepts of digital signal processing.
 Analyze the discrete-time systems using different types of transforms.
 Design suitable digital filter for the required specifications.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of A/D conversions-Signals and systems (types of signals and operations)- Basics of Z transform, Fourier
transform - filters concepts.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, linear, causal, stable, dynamic, recursive, time variance;
classification of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power; mathematical representation of signals;
operation of signals, spectral density; sampling techniques, quantization, quantization error, Nyquist rate, aliasing
effect.
UNIT II DISCRETE TIME SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9
Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation – Solution by z-transform, application to
discrete systems - Stability analysis, frequency response – Convolution – Analysis of L TI Systems in z-domain.
FIR & IIR filter realization – Direct, Parallel & cascade forms.
UNIT III DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM & COMPUTATION 9
DFT properties, magnitude and phase representation - Computation of DFT using FFT algorithm – DIT & DIF -
FFT using radix 2 – Butterfly structure – Application of DSP in power quality analysis.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF FIR FILTERS 9
FIR design: Windowing Techniques (Rectangular, Triangular, Hamming, Hanning windows only) – Need and
choice of windows – Linear phase characteristics.
UNIT V DESIGN OF IIR FILTERS 9
IIR design: Analog filter design - Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations - digital design using impulse
invariant and bilinear transformation - Warping, prewarping.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John G Proakis, Dimtris G Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and Application”,
PHI, 3rd Edition, 2012.
2. Salivahanan S, “Digital Signal Processing”, McGraw-Hill / TMH, 2014.
69
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alan V Oppenheim, Ronald W Schafer, John R Back, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, PHI, 2nd
Edition, 2000.
2. Johny R.Johnson, “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall, 2002.
3. Mitra S.K., "Digital Signal Processing - A Computer based approach", McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2001.
15EEC02 FIELD COMPUTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Concept of the fundamentals of Electromagnetic Field Theory.
 Concept of problem formulation and computation of Electromagnetic Fields using analytical and
numerical methods.
 Concept of mathematical modeling and design of electrical apparatus.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the fundamentals of Electromagnetic Field Theory.
 Describe the basics in formulation and computation of Electromagnetic Fields using analytical and
numerical methods.
 Design of electrical apparatus through mathematical modeling
Basics of Field Theory – Laplace and Poisson’s Equation & Maxwell’s Equation – Relation between various
parameters of Electric and Magnetic Fields - Basics of Electrical Machines - Method of solving differential
equation.
UNIT I MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION OF FIELD PROBLEMS 9
Review of basic field theory – Electrical Scalar Potential – Magnetic Vector Potential - Maxwell’s equations –
Constitutive relationships and Continuity equations – Laplace, Poisson and Helmholtz equation – Energy stored
in Electric and Magnetic Field – Principle of energy conversion – Force/Torque calculation - Capacitance –
Inductance.
UNIT II SOLUTION METHODS FOR FIELD EQUATIONS 9
Limitations of the conventional design procedure - Need for the field analysis based design - Problem definition,
boundary conditions - Solution by analytical methods - Direct integration method – Variable separable method –
Method of images.
UNIT III SOLUTION BY NUMERICAL METHODS 9
Finite Difference Method - Finite Element method - Variational Formulation - Energy minimization - Discretisation
– Shape functions – Stiffness matrix – Solution techniques.
UNIT IV COMPUTATION OF BASIC QUANTITIES USING FEM PACKAGES 9
Elements of a CAD system – Preprocessing – Modelling – Meshing – Material properties – Boundary conditions –
Setting up solution – Postprocessing.
70
UNIT V DESIGN APPLICATIONS 9
Design of Insulators – Solenoidal actuators – Transformers – Rotating machines – SRM – Induction Machines
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nathan Ida, Joao P.A.Bastos , “Electromagnetics and calculation of fields”, Springer-Verlage, 1992..
2. Matthew. N.O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Fourth Edition, Oxford University Press, First
Indian Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Binns K.J., Lawrenson P.J., Trowbridge C.W., “The analytical and numerical solution of Electric and
magnetic fields”, John Wiley & Sons, 1993.
2. Nicola Biyanchi , “Electrical Machine analysis using Finite Elements”, Taylor and Francis Group, CRC
Publishers, 2005.
3. Salon S.J., “Finite Element Analysis of Electrical Machines” Kluwer Academic Publishers, London, 1995,
distributed by TBH Publishers & Distributors, Chennai, India.
4. Silvester and Ferrari, “Finite Elements for Electrical Engineers” Cambridge University press, 1983.
15EEC03 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basics of Digital Control Systems
 Digital PID controllers
 State variable formulation of digital systems
 Different methods of stability analysis and Digital control system design
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the basic digital control knowledge to simple position, velocity control.
 Develop state space representation for the digital systems
 Analyse the stability of digital systems using different techniques
 Design of Digital control (compensator / Controller / Observer) systems.
Basics of Difference Equations – Z Transforms - Laplace Transforms – Linear Control System Analysis –Simple
system theory concepts.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
Advantages of Digital control systems – Basic concepts of sampled data control systems – principles of sampling
and quantization – reconstruction of signals – Sample and Hold circuits – Basic discrete time signals – Time
domain models for discrete time systems.
UNIT II MODELS OF DIGITAL CONTROL DEVICES AND SYSTEMS 9
z-domain description of sampled continuous time plants – models of A/D and D/A converters – z-domain
description of systems with dead time – Implementation of digital controllers – digital PID controllers – position,
velocity algorithms.
UNIT III STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9
State space representation of discrete time systems – solutions of discrete time state space equation – state
71
transition matrix – Decomposition techniques – Controllability and Observability.
UNIT IV STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Mapping between S-plane and z-plane – Jury stability test – Bilinear transformation and Extended Routh array –
Root locus method – Liapunov stability analysis of discrete time systems.
UNIT V DESIGN OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 9
Z-plane specifications of control system design – Digital compensator design – Frequency response method,
state feedback – pole placement design – full order state observer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gopal M., “Digital Control and State Variable Methods – Conventional and Intelligent Control Systems”,
th
4 Edition, Third Reprint 2013 McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kuo B.C., “Digital Control Systems”, Oxford University Press, Inc. 2003.
2. Ogata K., “Discrete Time Control Systems”, Prentice Hall International, New Jersey, USA 2002.
3. Houpis C.H. and Lamont C.B., “Digital Control Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1999.
L T P C
15EEC04 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEM
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Various models, analysis and design using state variable techniques.

 Phase plane analysis, describing function analysis and stability analysis of linear and non-linear
systems.
 Basic concepts of optimal control.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to

 Derive models, analyse and design the controller thro’ State Variable approach for LTIV continuous
systems.
 Evaluate the performance and stability analysis of non-linear system thro’ Phase plane and Describing
Function methods respectively.
 Analyse the stability of linear and non-linear systems thro’ various concepts.
Transfer function model of a system, Time domain analysis and Frequency domain analysis, Matrix operation
(Simple Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication), Fundamentals of Integration.
UNIT I STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9
Concept of state and State variable - State models for LTIV continuous-time systems (Physical, Phase Variable
and Canonical) – Transfer function from State model – Diagonalisation - Solution of state equations- State
Transition Matrix .
UNIT II CONTROLLABITY, OBSERVABILTY AND DESIGN 9
Controllability and Observability- Kalman’s and Gilbert’s tests – Effect of pole–zero cancellation in TF on
72
Controllability and Observabilty - Pole Placement by state feedback – Full order Observer Design
UNIT III PHASE PLANE ANALYSIS 9
Features of linear and non-linear systems - Common physical non-linearities – Methods of linearising non-linear
systems – Phase plane method: Basic Concept – Phase trajectory and phase portraits – Singular points –
Construction of phase trajectories: Analytical, Delta and Isocline methods.
UNIT IV DESCRIBING FUNCTION ANALYSIS 9
Describing function: Basic concepts-Describing functions for common nonlinearities – Stability analysis by
describing function method– Limit cycles and their types – Jump resonance.
UNIT V STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Introduction – Concept of stability – Equilibrium points- Lyapunov’s stability theorems -Lyapunov’s direct method
for LTIV systems – Lyapunov’s method for non-linear systems – Determination of Lyapunov function using
Krasovskii’s and Variable Gradient methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nagrath I.J. and Gopal M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, Fourth Edition,
2012.
2. Gopal M., “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, McGraw –Hill Publishing Company Limited, New
Delhi, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ashish Tewari, “Modern Control Design with Matlab and Simulink”, John Wiley, New Delhi, 2002
2. Gopal M., “Modern Control System Theory”, New Age International Publishers, 2005.
3. Gene F.Franklin, J.David Powell, Abbas Emami-Naeini, “Feedback control of dynamic systems”, Pearson
Education,2005.
4. Bernard Friedland, “Control System design: An introduction to state space methods”, Dover
Publications,2005.
5. John D'Azzo and Constantine Houpis, “Linear Control System Analysis And Design: Conventional and
Modern”, McGraw-Hill Companies; 4 Sub Edition, 1995.
15EEC05 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge about the stand alone and grid connected renewable energy systems.
 To explain concept of various forms of renewable sources of energy
 To outline division aspects and utilization of renewable energy sources for both domestics and industrial
applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Differentiate the types and applications renewable energy and its environmental impacts.
 Analyse the environmental and cost economics of using renewable energy sources compared to fossil
fuels.
73
Different energy resources, Electro-chemistry
Classification of energy sources-Features of Renewable energy- Renewable energy scenario in India–Solar

Energy: Sun and Earth-Basic Characteristics of solar radiation- angle of sunrays on solar collector-Estimating
Solar Radiation Empirically
UNIT II SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Equivalent circuit of PV Cell- Photovoltaic cell-characteristics: PV and I-V curve of cell-Impact of Temperature
and Insolation of I-V characteristics-Shading Impacts on I-V characteristics-Bypass diode-Blocking diode- Boost
converter based Maximum power point tracking (MPPT)-MPPT algorithms: P&O and Incremental conductance
algorithm
UNIT III PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM DESIGN 9
PV systems classification- Stand-alone PV system configurations-Design of PV-powered DC pump-Design of

stand-alone system with battery and AC or DC load-Hybrid PV systems – Grid connected solar photovoltaic
system – Grid integration issues.
UNIT IV WIND ENERGY 9
Origin of Winds: Global and Local Winds- Aerodynamics of Wind turbine-Derivation of Betz’s limit- Power
available in wind-Classification of wind turbine: Horizontal Axis wind turbine and Vertical axis wind turbine-
Aerodynamic Efficiency-Tip Speed-Tip Speed Ratio-Solidity-Blade Count-Power curve of wind turbine -
Configurations of wind energy conversion systems: Type A, Type B, Type C and Type D Configurations- Grid
Integration.
UNIT V FUEL CELL AND HYBRID RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS 9
Fuel cell – principle of working of phosphoric acid Fuel cell –VI Characteristics of Fuel cell-.Introduction to Hybrid
Renewable Energy System - Need for Hybrid Systems- Range and type of Hybrid systems- Quantitative study of
Diesel-PV and Wind- PV system
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chetan Singh Solanki, “Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications”, PHI
Learning Private Limited, 2012.
2. Twidell, J.W. and Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., 2005.
3. B.H.Khan, “Non Conventional energy resources”, McGraw-Hill Education,2nd Edition,2009.
4. Sukhatme S P, Nayak J K, “Solar Energy: Principles of Solar Thermal Collection and Storage”, McGraw
Hill, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kothari D. P & Singal K. C & Ranjan, Rakesh, “Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging
Technologies”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Tasneem Abbasi & Abbasi Sa, “Renewable Energy Sources”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi,
2013.
3. Gilbert M. Masters, “Renewable and Efficient Electric Power Systems”, Second Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 2013.
4. Rashid .M. H “power electronics Hand book”, Academic press, 2001.
74
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press,
U.K, 1996.
2. Veziroglu, T.N., “Alternative Energy Sources”, Vol 5 and 6, McGraw-Hill, 1990.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.renewableenergyworld.com/rea/tech/home
2. www.eschooltoday.com/energy/renewable-energy
15EEC06 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Causes of over voltages and protection against them.
 Breakdown phenomenon in Gas, Liquid, Solid and Composite Dielectrics.
 Generation of high AC& DC voltages and Impulse voltage & Current.
 Various methods of measurement of High Voltages and Currents.
 Testing for power apparatus as per Indian Standard Specification.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Demonstrate with the natural causes of over voltages and protection of power system components..
 Analyze the various breakdown mechanisms in Gas, Liquid, Solid and Composite Dielectrics.
 Generate and Measure the High DC, AC and Impulse voltages and currents.
 Test the various power system apparatus as per Indian Standard Specification.
Basic Linear Algebra -Circuit theory –Network theory - Diode Rectifiers – Electrical transformer.
UNITI OVER VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to over voltages-Natural Causes of over voltages – Charge formation in the clouds - Lightning
phenomenon –, Mechanism of lightning stroke, Mathematical modeling of lightning - Switching surges- Causes-
its effect on power system – Control of switching surges in power system - Protection of transmission lines
against over voltages.
UNITII ELECTRICAL BREAKDOWN IN GAS, LIQUID and SOLID DIELECTRICS 9
Gaseous breakdown - Uniform field – Townsend criterion, Streamer theory- Pachen’s law - Non-uniform fields –
Corona discharges – Vacuum breakdown - Conduction and breakdown in pure and commercial liquids –
Breakdown mechanisms in solid dielectrics.
UNITIII GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9
Generation of High DC Voltages: Voltage doubler, Cockcroft Walton Voltage multiplier and Vande-Graff
generator- Generation of high AC voltages: Cascaded transformer, Resonant transformer, and Tesla coil -
Generation of Impulse voltage: Multistage impulse generator - MARX circuit and generation of impulse current –
Tripping and control of impulse generators.
75
UNITIV MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9
Measurement of High DC voltages - AC voltages: Power frequency, High frequency and impulse - High DC
currents- AC currents: Power frequency, High frequency and impulse- PD Measurements - Cathode Ray
Oscillograph for Impulse Voltage and Current measurements.
UNITV HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS 9
Terminologies and Definitions - High voltage testing of electrical power apparatus as per standards: Insulators,
Bushings, Isolators, Circuit Breakers, Cables, Transformers, and Surge Arrester - Insulation Coordination -
Layout of High Voltage Laboratory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Naidu M.S. and Kamaraju V., “High Voltage Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2013.
2. Wadhwa C.L., “High Voltage Engineering’’, New age publishers, 3rd Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kuffel E. and Zaengl W.S., “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals”, Pergamon press, Oxford,
London, 2005.
2. RavindraArora, Wolfgang Mosch ,”High Voltage Insulation Engineering” ,New age international
Publishers, 1995,\Reprint 2013
3. Alston,L.L., “High Voltage Technology”,Oxford University Press,Oxford,2006
4. Dieter Kind and Hermann Karner, “High Voltage Insulation Technology”, (Translated from German by
NarayanaRao Y., Friedr. Vieweg&Sohn, Braunschweig), 1985.
5. Dieter Kind, Kurt Feser, “High Voltage Test Techniques”, SBA Electrical Engineering Series, New Delhi,
2001.
ST
6. Begamudre, R D, “High Voltage Test Techniques”, New age publishers, 1 Edition, 2010,\Reprint 2011.
15EEC07 ILLUMINATION, WIRING AND ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Energy efficient lighting system
 Different wiring methods
 Estimation for electrical wiring
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explicate the advancement in energy efficient lighting schemes
 Explain about different wiring methods
 Estimate the conductor size and cost of a wiring system.
Basic Electrical Engineering, Electrical Power Utilization, awareness about artificial lighting, Algebra,
Trigonometry.
UNIT I ENERGY EFFICIENT LAMPS AND WIRING METHODOLOGY 9
Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) – Selection of CFL – Lumens output – Disposal of waste CFL – Limitations of
CFL – LED – Terminologies – Choice of LED Lamps for different lighting requirements – Benefits of LED lighting
76
– CFL Vs LED lighting,12V DC home wiring – Solar powered lamps – Importance – Constraints in 12V DC wiring
– Voltage Regulation devices – wiring and distribution, Necessary Appliances.
UNIT II TYPES AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS 9
Types of wires, Factors influencing the choice of wiring system, Types of wiring system, Conduit Wiring System,
Accessories, Advantages and Disadvantages of Conduit Wiring Systems, IE rules, 1956: rules 50, 56, 57, 58,
60,61 – Internal wiring systems – Looping-in system – Ring system – tree system - Position of switches, cutouts,
main switch board, sub-distribution boards. Domestic Wiring Protection equipments: Miniature Circuit Breaker –
Residual Current Circuit Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker.
UNIT III ELEMENTS OF ESTIMATION 9
Introduction ,Purpose of Estimating and Costing:, Qualities of a good Estimator, Essential Elements of Estimating
and Costing, Tender, Guidelines for Inviting Tenders, Quotation, Other Important Factors of Estimating and
Costing.
UNIT IV DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATES 9
Estimation of load requirements-Estimation of connected load, Maximum demand, and type of supply required for
a domestic building and related problem- Determination of size of distribution boards – Different types of
commonly available distribution boards-Estimation of Accessories required, wiring materials and labour
requirement for a domestic building and related problem-Pre-commissioning tests for domestic wiring Installation:
Visual Inspection, Testing- Special features applicable for High-Rise apartment buildings.
UNIT V ESTIMATION OF CONDUCTOR SIZE FOR INTERNAL WIRING AND 9

SERVICE LINES
Estimation of conductor size for main circuit, room- Estimation of conductor size for an electric motor in an
industry-IE rules regarding the installation of Service lines-Estimation of service mains for a double storey
building-Estimation of wiring materials for computer centre, street light services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Uppal S.L, “Electrical Wiring - Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, Sixth edition 2011.
2. Giridharan M.K., “Electrical Systems Design”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Raina K.B., Bhattacharya S.K., “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing” New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gupta J.B., “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, Ninth
Edition, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES
1. http://eartheasy.com/live_energyeff_lighting.htm
2. http://dreamgreenhouse.com/designs/12v/index.php
3. http://www.treehugger.com/sustainable-product-design/big-steps-in-building-change-our-wiring-to-12-
volt-dc.html
15EEC08 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge about the constructional features and operating principles of various types of
77
special electrical machines.
 To compare and analyze the characteristics of special electrical machines.
 To provide the knowledge about the different types of drive systems and controllers used in special
electrical machines.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Know the construction and operating principles of special electrical machines.
 Analyze the characteristics and performance of special electrical machines.
 know the different types of controllers and control techniques
Fundamentals of Power Electronics and Electrical Machines
UNIT I STEPPER MOTORS 9
Constructional features and principle of operation: Variable reluctance, Permanent and Hybrid Stepper motor -
torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepping motor – Static and Dynamic Characteristics - Linear and
Non Linear Analysis - Drive systems circuits and current suppression schemes for stepper motor
UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTORS 9
Constructional features of axial and radial air gap Motors - operating principle –Phasor diagram-Derivation of
reluctance torque from phasor diagram - motor characteristics- Controller for Synchronous Reluctance motor-
Applications
UNIT III SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS 9
Constructional features-principle of operation-Inductance profile-Torque equation- Converters for SRM– Current

control schemes: Hysteresis and PWM – Torque Speed Characteristics–Microprocessor based controller and
Sensorless Controller-Applications
UNIT IV BRUSHLESS DC MOTORS 9
Commutation in DC motors- Difference between mechanical and electronic commutator-Position sensors: Hall
sensors, Optical sensors- Advantages and Disadvantages of BLDC motor-Principle of operation of BLDC motors-
-Torque and EMF equation-Torque-Speed characteristics-Magnetic Circuit Analysis-Microprocessor based
controller for BLDC-Sensorless control of BLDC motor
UNIT V PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 9
Construction and Principle of operation – EMF and Torque equations - Phasor diagram– Torque speed
characteristics – Self control, Vector control schemes- Comparison of BLDC and PMSM-Applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Miller, T.J.E., “Brushless permanent magnet and reluctance motor drives ", Clarendon Press, Oxford,
1989.
2. Kenjo, T. “Stepping motors and their microprocessor control ", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
3. Kenjo, T and Naganori, S “Permanent Magnet and brushless DC motors ", Clarendon Press, Oxford,
1989.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Krishnan R., “Electric Motor Drives – Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2003.
78
2. Krishnan R., “Switched Reluctance Motor Drives: Modeling, Simulation, Analysis, Design and
Applications” CRC Press, 2001
3. Athani V.V, “Stepper Motors: Fundamentals Applications and Design”, New Age International, 1997.
4. Hamid A. Toliyat, Gerald B. Kliman, “Handbook of Electric Motors”, CRC press, 2004
5. Bose B.K., “Modern Power Electronics & AC drives”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2001.
15EEC09 POWER SYSTEM TRANSIENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basic concepts related to generation of switching transients.
 Laplace transform methods for handling transients.
 Impacts of voltage transients due to switching.
 Principles of propagation of voltage and current waves along power lines
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explain the causes of transients and their effects on power system.
 Demonstrate the basic concepts of switching surges in a system
 Illustrate the impact of voltage transients due to various switching surges
 Develop the theoretical aspects of travelling waves.
 Estimate the transient voltages in integrated power system.
Electric circuit transient, Transmission and distribution basics, Laplace Transform techniques (basics), Time
domain analysis.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION ABOUT ELECTRICAL TRANSIENTS 9
Review and importance of the study of transients – Physical Interpretation of Transients-Circuit characteristics-
causes for transients. Sources of electrical transients-basic mathematical concepts for transient analysis.
RL circuit transient with sine wave excitation - double frequency transients – Different types of power system
transients - effect of transients on power systems – role of the study of transients in system planning.
UNIT II BASIC CONCEPTS OF SWITCHING TRANSIENTS 9
Basic simulation of switching –Closing and opening of a switch-Recovery voltage in circuit breaker-Current
chopping in dc systems and ac systems-compound transients-switching surges in capacitive circuits-switching
surges in distributed constant systems.
UNIT III TRANSFORMS OF SWITCHING TRANSIENTS 9
Basic transforms of the RLC circuit transients- equivalent circuit for interrupting the resistor current - load
switching and equivalent circuit - waveforms for transient voltage across the load and the switch - normal and
abnormal switching transients. Current suppression - effective equivalent circuit. Capacitance switching - effect of
source regulation - capacitance switching with a restrike, with multiple restrikes Illustration for multiple restriking
transients - ferro resonance
UNIT IV WAVE PROPAGATION 9
Wave equation-velocity of travelling waves-Relation between the voltage and current waves-Line of finite length:
79
Point of discontinuity-Examples of line terminations-Line terminated by surge impedance-open circuited line-short
circuited line- Line terminated by complex impedance- -Multiple reflections –Lattice diagram-Examples of Multiple
reflections.
UNIT V TRANSIENTS IN INTEGRATED POWER SYSTEM 9
The short line and kilometric fault - distribution of voltages in a power system -Line dropping and load rejection -
voltage transients on closing and reclosing lines - over voltage induced by faults - switching surges on integrated
system-Qualitative application of EMTP for transient computation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
rd
1. Allan Greenwood,”Electrical Transients in power systems”, Wiley Interscience,New York,3 Edition,
2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pribindra Chowdhuri, “Electromagnetic transients in power systems”, Pearson Education Limited, 2004
2. Begamudre R.D., “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003
3. Mazen Abdel-Salam, Hussein Anis, “High Voltage Engineering”, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 2010.
4. Wadhwa C.L., “Power Systems Engineering”, New Age International, Fourth Edition 2006.
5. Harold A. Peterson, ‘Transients in Power Systems’, John Wiley and sons, 1966.
15EEC10 POWER SYSTEM STABILITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basic concepts related to power system stability and swing equation for determining stability
 Understanding Transient stability and steady state stability in detail and methods to improve it
 Types of excitation systems and voltage regulators and its effect on stability
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Deduce the swing equation
 Apply the different approaches for solving swing equation
 Evaluate critical clearing angle and clearing time and its effect on stability
 Analyze the different types of excitation systems and automatic voltage regulators and their effect on
stability
 Estimate the Steady state stability limit.
Concepts of Single Machine Infinite Bus System, Equal area criteria, Swing equation
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO STABILITY OF ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS 9
Concept and importance of stability to power system operation and design-Steady state, transient and dynamic
stability-A simple two-machine stability problem-Bad effects of instability-General Background: Review on
principles of Mechanics-Swing equation for a Synchronous Machine-Reduction of a power system to a single
equivalent machine connected to infinite bus-Equivalent power angle curve of two finite machines-Stability of
multi machine system.
UNIT II SWING EQUATION AND ITS SOLUTION 9
Solution of swing equations by step-by-step method (I & II)- Runge–kutta and Modified Euler’s methods-Digital
80
computer in power system simulation
UNIT III TRANSIENT STABILITY 9
Equal Area criterion-Determination of the maximum sudden increase of generator output-Application of equal
area criterion to transient stability under sudden switching and fault conditions(single line to ground, double line to
ground and three phase faults)-Determination of critical clearing angle-Fault clearing-Effect of reclosure towards
stability(Single circuit and Double circuit line)- Pre-calculated swing curves-Effects of fault clearing time on
transient stability limit-Techniques for improving transient stability.
UNIT IV EXCITATION SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATORS 9
Definitions of excitation systems-Schemes of excitation-Quick response excitation-Types of excitation systems
and automatic voltage regulators-Calculation of exciter response by Graphical integration and step by step
methods-Effect of speed governing system, inertia and damping on steady state and transient stability.
UNIT V STEADY STATE STABILITY 9
Significance of steady state stability-Power limit of transmission system-Clarke’s diagram two machine systems
with and without losses-Power angle characteristics and steady state stability limit of cylindrical rotor and salient
pole synchronous machines-Effect of inertia, damping and governor operation on stability-steady state stability
with automatic voltage regulators on two finite machines and one machine connected to infinite bus with and
without external reactance-Damping on steady state and transient stability.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. S.S.Vadhera: Power System Analysis and Stability, Khanna publishers.2013
2. K.A.Gangadhar: Electric Power System Analysis, Stability and Protection, Khanna Publishers,2009.
nd
3. MadhavaRao: Power system Protection static relays with microprocessors applications, 2 edition, TMH,
2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Edward William Kimbark: Power System Stability Volume I – Elements of Stability calculatuions, IEEE Press,
Wiley Interscience publishers, 1995
2. M.L.Soni,P.V.Gupta,U.S.Bhatnagar,A.Chakrabarti:A text book on Power System Engineering, Dhanpat Rai
& Co,2009 Edition
3. I.J.Nagrath and D.P.Kothari: Power System Engineering, TMH, 1994.
4. B.R.Gupta:Power System Analysis and Design, S.Chand & Co, 2005
15EEC11 SCADA AND DCS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basic concepts of implementation of digital controllers for industrial process.
 Components of SCADA and DCS.
 Architecture of DCS.
 Information about the programming languages and the interfaces used in DCS and Computer Controlled
Systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Implement the SCADA and DCS on industrial process.
 Interface the digital controllers with PC.
 Identify required architectural interface for the industrial process.
81
Measurements and Instrumentation – Logic circuits – Basic knowledge on networking – Multiplexing and
Demultiplexing.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL CONTROLLERS 9
Introduction - Computer in process control - Data loggers, Data acquisition systems (DAS) – Data storage with
time stampings - Direct Digital Control (DDC), Supervisory Digital Control (SCADA) - Controller software -Man-
machine interface- Management Information System.
UNIT II COMPUTER CONTROLLED SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS OF SCADA 9
Basic building blocks of Computer controlled systems – SCADA – Data Acquisition System – Supervisory Control
– Direct digital Control. SCADA: - Hardware and software, Remote terminal units, Master Station and
Communication architectures.
UNIT III DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9
DCS – Various Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process interfacing issues – Communication
facilities.
UNIT IV INTERFACES IN DCS 9
Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces – Displays - Engineering interfaces – Low level
and high level engineering interfaces – Factors to be considered in selecting DCS.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF SCADA & DCS IN INDUSTRIES 9
Applications of SCADA & DCS in Thermal power plant, Cement manufacturing Industries, Sugar Industries,
paper manufacturing Industries and Water Treatment plant.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Krishna kant, “Computer based industrial control”, PHI, second edition, 2010.
2. Michael P. Lukas, “Distributed Control System”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada, 1995.
3. David Bailey & Edwin Wright, “Practical SCADA for Industry”, Elsevier 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Krishna Kant, “Digital control systems”, ISTE learning materials centre, First edition 2001.
2. Clarke, G., Reynders, D. and Wright, E., “Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: “DNP3, 60870.5 and
Related Systems”, Newnes, 1st Edition, 2004.
15EEC12 COMPUTER NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 the basic concepts of computer networks.
 various protocols used in layered architecture.
 addressing and routing mechanisms used in internet.
 basic mechanism of network security.
82
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 to understand the functions of layered reference models and functional component namely protocol
used for data communication.
 to comprehend various flow control and congestion control mechanisms.
 to know how nodes in the networks are uniquely addressed globally and various routing algorithms used
for identifying the path to reach the destination
 to understand the various security mechanisms used securing the data packets in a network.
Data communications – different topology of cable connections – signal processing – basics of Digital
communication
UNIT I INTRODUCTION (Qualitative only) 9
Introduction: Networks – Protocols and standards – Standards organizations – Line configurations – Topology –
Transmission mode – Categories of networks – Inter networks.
OSI model: Functions of the layers.
Transmission media: Guided media – Unguided media – Transmission impairment – Performance.
UNIT II DATA LINK PROTOCOLS AND ERROR CONTROL (Qualitative only) 9
Data link protocols: Asynchronous protocols – Synchronous protocols – Character oriented protocols – BIT
oriented protocols
Data link control: Line discipline – Flow control – Error Detection: Types of errors – Detection – Vertical
Redundancy Check (VRC) – Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) – Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) – Check
sum.
Wired LAN: Project 802 – Ethernet – Token bus – Token ring – FDDI.
Switching: Circuit switching – Packet switching – Message switching.
UNIT III INTERNETWORKING (Qualitative only) 9
Internetworking : IP - ARP – Reverse Address Resolution Protocol – Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol –
Internet Control Message Protocol
Routing algorithms: Distance vector routing – Link state routing
Addressing – Subnetting – CIDR – Inter domain routing – IPv6
UNIT IV TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYERS (Qualitative only) 9
Transport Layer: User Datagram Protocol (UDP) – Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) – Congestion control –
Flow control – Congestion Avoidance Mechanisms–Techniques to improve QoS–FIFO, Priority, Weighted fair
queuing-Traffic shaping.
Application layer: Domain Name System (DNS) – Telnet – File Transfer Protocol (FTP)– Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol (SMTP) – E-mail – World Wide Web (HTTP)
UNIT V DATA COMPRESSION AND INTERNET SECURITY (Qualitative only) 9
Data Compression : Introduction to JPEG, MPEG, and MP3

Internet security: Cryptography – symmetric-key – public-key – authentication – key distribution – key
agreement– Transport layer security – Firewalls
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
83
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Behrouz A Foruzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Fourth edition, McGrawHill, New Delhi,
2006.
2. Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”, Fourth Edition,
Elsevier Publishers Inc., 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communication”, Sixth edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2000.
2. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internets”, Second Edition, Pearson
3. Education Asia, New Delhi, 2002.
4. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Fourth Edition, PHI, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://compnetworking.about.com/od/basicnetworkingconcepts/a/network_types.html
2. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc0793.txt
3. http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip1.html
4. http://beej.us/guide/bgnet/
5. http://people.cs.uchicago.edu/~mark/51081/labs/LAB6/sock.html
6. http://cr.yp.to/ftp.html
15EEC13 ADVANCED POWER ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Advancement in AC-DC conversion
 Advancement in DC-AC conversion
 Advancement in DC-DC conversion and Modeling of DC-DC converter
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explicit the advancement in AC-DC conversion
 Explain the working of different Multilevel Inverters
 Develop the advanced models of DC-DC converter
Fundamentals of Electric circuits, magnetic circuits and Power Electronics, Transfer function model of an
electrical circuit
UNIT I ADVANCED AC-DC CONVERSION 9
Generation of current harmonics from AC to DC converter- Harmonics standard and recommended practice-
Need for improved utility Interface- Diode rectifier-fed boost converter -Working of Three phase PWM rectifier and
its advantages- Interface for bidirectional power flow single phase and three phase
UNIT II MULTILEVEL INVERTER 9
Features of Multilevel inverter-Multilevel concept – Principle of operation and Features of: diode clamped, flying
capacitor, cascade type multilevel inverters - Comparison of multilevel inverters - application of multilevel
inverters
84
UNIT III ISOLATED DC-DC CONVERTERS 9
Need of isolated DC-DC converter- Working principle and Derivation of output voltage for: Fly back converter,
Forward converter, Push pull converter, half bridge converter and Full bridge converter
UNIT IV ADVANCED DC-DC CONVERTER 9
SEPIC converter-Multi output boost converter-L-Type ZCS Resonant converter-M-type ZCS Resonant converter-
Zero voltage resonant converter
UNIT V DC- DC CONVERTER DYNAMICS 9
Block diagram explanation of closed loop control of DC-DC Converter- Steps involved in state space averaging-
Derivation of Transfer function of Ideal buck, boost converter using state space averaging- Converter Non
Idealities
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Mohan, Undeland, Robbins,” Power Electronics: Converters Applications and Design”, John Wiley &
Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003.
th
2. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 4
Edition, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science &
nd
Business Media, 2 edition 2001.
15EEC14 POWER QUALITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 various Power Quality issues.
 power quality problems and methods of control.
 various methods of power quality monitoring and suppression.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze the various power quality issues.
 Analyze the power quality events and assessment.
 Mitigate the power quality problems using relevant devices.
Fundamentals of Electric circuits and Electrical Engineering, Power in AC circuits, Fourier series.
Terms and definitions: Transients, short duration and long duration voltage variations, Voltage imbalance,
waveform distortion, Voltage fluctuations, Power frequency variation, Power acceptability curves – Computer
Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve.
85
UNIT II VOLTAGE SAGS AND INTERRUPTIONS 9
Sources of sags and interruptions –Estimation of sag magnitude in radial systems: Influence of fault distance,
Transformer, area of cross section of conductor-Estimation of Motor Starting sags-Voltage Tolerance Ranges for
different equipment- Area of Vulnerability Equipment-sensitivity on voltage sag on different equipments-
Mitigation of voltage sag at End user Level: Active series compensators - Custom power devices.
UNIT III HARMONICS 9
Harmonics and its types-Harmonics versus Transients- Harmonic indices: THD,TDD and Related Problems-
Power Systems Quantities under Non-sinusoidal Condition: Sinusoidal Voltage Source Supplying Non-linear
Load Current Non-sinusoidal Voltage Source Supplying Non-linear Loads-Distortion Power-True Power
UNIT IV SOURCES, EFFECTS AND MITIGATION OF HARMONICS 9
Harmonic sources from commercial and industrial loads – Effect of Harmonics on Transformer, AC motors,
Capacitor banks, Protective Devices, Energy and demand Metering-Devices for controlling Harmonic Distortion:
In-line Reactor, Zigzag Transformers, Passive filters, Active filters-Harmonic Standards on Harmonics
UNIT V POWER QUALITY BENCH MARKING AND MONITORING 9
Benchmarking Process-RMS Voltage Variation Indices: SARFI, SMARFI,STARFI-Power Quality Contracts-Power

Quality Insurance-Monitoring considerations
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Roger.C.Dugan, Mark.F.McGranagham, Surya Santoso, H.Wayne Beaty, “Electrical Power Systems
Quality”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2013.
2. Math H.J.Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems-Voltage Sag & Interruptions”, (New York:
IEEE press, 2000).
3. Arindam Ghosh, “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices”, Springer International
Edition, 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. C.Sankaran, “Power Quality”, CRC press, 2002.
2. J.Arrilaga, N.R.Watson, S.Chen, “ Power System Quality Assessment”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000
WEB REFERENCES:
1. NPTEL Course on Power Quality in Power Distribution Systems
(Web link: http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106025/)
15EEC15 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 electrical type flow meters
 level measurement techniques
 Various measurement techniques for Viscosity, Humidity and Moisture content.
86
 Fibre optics instrumentation and their applications.
 Virtual instrumentation, its applications, programming and DAQ cards and modules.
 Exposure to telemetry, modulation techniques and multiplexing.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze Instrumentation systems and their applications to various industries.
 Apply fibre optics in measurement system.
Basics of Instrument technologies, transducers
UNIT I ELECTRICAL TYPE FLOW METERS 9
Concept of two wire 4-20mA - Principle and constructional details of Electromagnetic flow meter – Ultrasonic flow
meters – Laser Doppler anemometer – Vortex shedding flow meter – Target flow meter – Guidelines for selection
of flow meter – Solid flow rate measurement.
UNIT II LEVEL MEASUREMENTS TECHNIQUE 9
Level measurement: – Float gauges - Displacer type – D/P methods -Bubbler system-Load cell – Electrical types
– Conductivity sensors – Capacitive sensors – Nucleonic gauge - Ultrasonic gauge – Boiler drum level
measurement :– Differential pressure method and Hydrastep method -Solid level measurement.
UNIT III MEASUREMENT OF VISCOSITY, HUMIDITY AND MOISTURE 9
Viscosity – Saybolt viscometer-Rotameter type viscometer – Consistency meters – Humidity - Dry and wet bulb
psychrometers – Resistive and capacitive type hygrometers – Dew cell – Commercial type dew meter – Moisture
measurement in solids-.
UNIT IV VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION 9
Virtual instrumentation (VI) – Definition, flexibility – Block diagram and architecture of virtual instruments – Virtual
instruments versus traditional instruments – Software in virtual instrumentation - VI programming techniques –
DAQ cards for VI applications – DAQ modules with serial communication.
UNIT V FIBRE OPTIC INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM & TELEMETRY 9
Fibre optic instrumentation system – Fibre optic sensors for Measurement of current, voltage, strain, pressure,
temperature, and liquid level.
General telemetry system – voltage, current and position telemetry systems – Radio frequency telemetry –
Frequency modulation, pulse-amplitude modulation and pulse-code modulation telemetry – Frequency and time
multiplexing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Doebelin, E.O.and Manik,D.N., Measurement Systems Application and Design, Special Indian Edition,
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
rd
2. Patranabis, D. Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, 3 Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Jerome J., “Virtual Instrumentation using Lab VIEW”, Prentice Hall India Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Liptak, B.G., Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement), CRC Press, 2005.
2. Singh,S.K., Industrial Instrumentation and Control, McGrawHill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
3. Jain, R.K., Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.
87
4. Sanjay Gupta, “Virtual Instrumentation using Lab view”, McGraw-Hill Education, 2010.
5. N. Mathivanan ,”PC based Instrumentation” , Prentice Hall India Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.
6. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and
Control Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2014.
15EEC16 SMART GRID L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Evolution, challenges and benefits of smart grid
 The basic concepts of Smart Grid technologies, smart meters and advanced metering infrastructure.
 Power quality management issues in Smart Grid.
 Computing applications for Smart Grid
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Address the issues related to smart grid technology deployment.
 Explain the various smart grid technologies, metering infrastructure and computing applications for
smart grid
 Analyse the Power Quality issues and power quality conditioners
Power System Operation and Control, Power System Economics, Power System Analysis, Data
communications, signal processing
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID 9
Evolution of Electric Grid- Concept- Definitions and Need for Smart Grid- Smart grid drivers- functions-
opportunities- challenges and benefits- Difference between conventional & Smart Grid- Concept of Resilient &
Self-Healing Grid- Present development & International policies in Smart Grid- Diverse perspectives from experts
and global Smart Grid initiatives.
UNIT II SMART METERS AND ADVANCED METERING INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Introduction to Smart Meters- Advanced Metering infrastructure (AMI) drivers and benefits-AMI protocols-
standards and initiatives- AMI needs in the smart grid- Phasor Measurement Unit(PMU)- Intelligent Electronic
Devices(IED) & their application for monitoring & protection.
UNIT III SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES 9
Technology Drivers- Smart energy resources- Smart substations- Substation Automation- Feeder Automation -
Transmission systems: EMS- FACTS and HVDC- Wide area monitoring - Protection and control- Distribution
systems: DMS- Volt/VAr control-Fault Detection- Isolation and service restoration- Outage management-High-
Efficiency Distribution Transformers- Phase Shifting Transformers- Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV).
UNIT IV COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR SMART GRID 9
Local Area Network (LAN) - House Area Network (HAN) - Wide Area Network (WAN)- Broadband over Power
line (BPL)- IP based Protocols- Basics of Web Service and CLOUD Computing to make Smart Grids smarter-
Cyber Security for Smart Grid.
88
UNIT V POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN SMART GRID 9
Power Quality & EMC in Smart Grid- Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable Energy Sources- Power
Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid- Web based Power Quality monitoring- Power Quality Audit
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Stuart Borlase “Smart Grid :Infrastructure- Technology and Solutions”,CRC Press, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Janaka Ekanayake- Nick Jenkins- KithsiriLiyanage- Jianzhong Wu- Akihiko Yokoyama- “Smart Grid:
Technology and Applications”- Wiley.
2. Vehbi C. Güngör- DilanSahin- TaskinKocak- SalihErgüt- ConcettinaBuccella- Carlo Cecati- and Gerhard
P. Hancke- Smart Grid Technologies: Communication Technologies and Standards IEEE Transactions
On Industrial Informatics- Vol. 7- No. 4- November 2011.
3. Xi Fang- SatyajayantMisra- GuoliangXue- and Dejun Yang “Smart Grid – The New and Improved Power
Grid: A Survey” - IEEE Transaction on Smart Grids.
15EEC17 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide an introduction to the emerging area of intelligent control and optimization.

 To impart knowledge on expert systems, fuzzy logic systems, artificial neural networks and optimization
techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explain the concept of intelligent control and their applications.
 Analyze Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks through case studies.
 Optimise the system through Genetic Algorithm.
Basic understanding of problem solving, design and analysis of algorithms, Algebra, Elementary differential
Calculus, probability, basic knowledge on human nervous system and nervous cells.
Approaches to intelligent control – Architecture for intelligent control – Symbolic reasoning system – rule-based
systems – the AI approach – Knowledge representation – Expert systems.
UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Concept of Artificial Neural Network and its basic mathematical model – McCulloch-Pitts neuron model – simple
perceptron – Adaline and Madaline – Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron – Learning and Training the neural
network – Hopfield network – Self-organizing network – Neural Network based controller.
UNIT III FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM 9
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets – basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning – Introduction to
fuzzy logic modeling and control – Fuzzification – inferencing and defuzzification – Fuzzy knowledge and rule
bases – Neuro-Fuzzy system.
89
UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ANT-COLONY OPTIMIZATION 9
TECHNIQUE
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detailed algorithmic steps – Flowchart – GA operators – adjustment of
GA parameters, Concept of ant-colony search technique for solving optimization problems.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of Neural Network to electrical engineering problems – GA applications to electrical engineering

optimisation problems – Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for non-linear systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sivanandam S.N., Deepa S.N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2012.
2. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E., “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing: A Computational Approach
to Learning and Machine Intelligence”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jacek.M.Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
2. KLIR G.J., FOLGER T.A., “Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
1993.
3. Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.
4. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H., Reinfrank M., “Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Narosa Publishers, 2001.
5. Goldberg D.E., “Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine learning”, Addison Wesley,
1989.
6. Padhy N.P., “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent System, Oxford University Press, 2005.
7. Allain Bonnet, “Artificial Intelligence – Promise and Performance, Prentice Hall International Publishers,
1985.
8. Sivanandam S.N., Paulraj M., “Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd., First Edition, 2003.
9. Donald A. Waterman, “A Guide to Expert Systems”, Addison-Wesley Publishers, Second Edition, 1993.
15EEC18 ROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Historical development and Laws of robotics.
 Concept of various kinds of actuators, sensors and vision systems of robots.
 Robot programming and path planning.
 Recent advancement and Applications of Robotics.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Select the suitable robot configuration for specific applications.
 Identify and select the Components like Actuators, End effectors for Robot applications / projects
 Solve the kinematics involved in robot projects
 Select and interface sensors for physical quantities and object recognition
 Develop control techniques for small robots to automate the processes.
90
Simple linear algebra and basic mathematics, Basic knowledge on measurements and instrumentation, basics of
number system, fundamentals of transducers and sensors, coordinates, basics of control system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS 9
History of Robotics, laws of robotics, Robot Definitions, Robot Systems and Robot Anatomy – Link – Joint –
manipulator – Wrist – End effectors – Actuators – Sensors – Controller, Classification of robots, Robots
Geometry and workspace, Specifications of Robots - Accuracy, resolution and repeatability.
UNIT II ROBOT DRIVES AND POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Robot drive mechanisms - Hydraulic and Pneumatic systems - Electric Drives - servomotor- stepper motor,
Mechanical Transmission method – Gear Transmission – Belt Drive – Cables – Roller Chains, Motion conversion
- Rotary to Rotary - Rotary to Linear – Rack and pinion drives, Lead screws, Ball Bearing screws, Variable Speed
Arrangement, Robot end effectors - Types.
UNIT III TRANSFORMATION AND KINEMATICS 9
Homogeneous coordinates – Coordinate reference frames Rotation Matrix, Composition of Rotation matrices -
Euler Angles - Homogeneous Transformations for the manipulator, The forward and inverse problem of
manipulator kinematics, Motion generation - Manipulator dynamics - Representation of Standard Robot using
Denavit - Hartenberg matrices
UNIT IV SENSORS AND VISION SYSTEM FOR ROBOTICS 9
Sensor Characteristics and Requirements, Review of Sensors – Encoders - Resolvers - Proximity Sensors,
Touch sensors, Accelerometers - Gyroscope - Force and torque sensors - Resistance sensor, Robot Vision
systems: Block Diagram of Robot Vision System – Image Capture Cameras – vidicon and Solid state – Image
representation – Image Segmentation - Feature extraction - Object Recognition.
UNIT V ROBOT CONTROL AND AUTOMATION 9
Block Diagram of Robot control System, Motion Control – Computed Torque Control, Force Control – Indirect
Force control, Path Planning: Point-To-Point Motion – Motion Through sequence of Points, Applications: Flexible
Manufacturing Systems concept - Automatic feeding lines, automatic inspection – Material transfers: Machine
loading and unloading - Processing operations - Assembly and inspection – Automatic welding Robot.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Saeed B Niku, “Introduction to Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications”, Prentice Hall of India P Ltd,
New Delhi,2003.
2. Mittal R K and Nagarath I J, “Robotics and Control”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ashitava Ghosal, “Robotics: Fundamental Concepts and Analysis”, Oxford University Press, 2006.
2. Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N. Nagel and Nicholas G. Odrey, “Industrial Robotics:
Technology, Programming and Applications”, Mc-Graw Hill Publisher, 2011.
3. Reza N. lazar, “Theory of Applied Robotics Kinematics, Dynamics, and Control”, Springer Science and
Business Media, LLC, 2007.
4. Stefan Florczyk, “Robot Vision”, WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, 2005.
5. Bruno Siciliano, Lorenzo Sciavicco, Luigi Villani & Giuseppe Oriolo, “Robotics Modelling, Planning and
Control”, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2009.
91
15EEC19 NUMERICAL PROTECTION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basic concepts related to numerical distance protection.
 Fundamentals related to numerical differential protection.
 Protection of distribution and transmission networks using numerical distance protection
 Protection of generator, motor, lines and bus bars using numerical distance protection
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explain the principle and operation of numerical distance and differential relays.
 Apply various scheme for the protection of generator, motor, transformer, lines and bus bars.
 Analyze importance of advanced protection of power system components.
Basics of Electrical apparatus protection, Operation of Relays
UNITI 9
NUMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION - BASICS
Fundamentals of distance protection, relay impedance, impedance diagram, distance protection, directional fault
discrimination, distance zones, zone and timer control. Numerical distance measurement, numerical direction
determination (polarization), circular characteristics with numerical technology.
UNITII 9
PROTECTION OF DISTRIBUTION AND TRANSMISSION NETWORKS
Distribution networks – Basics, Distance protection of isolated or compensated systems, distance protection with
low impedance star point earthing and distance protection in industrial networks.
Transmission networks – Protection concepts, High voltage OH line, EHV line, ring bus bar, double circuit line,
three terminal line and series compensated lines.
UNIT III 9
NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION - FUNDAMENTALS
Definition, modes of operation, Basic principle, current differential protection, Biased differential protection,
Differential protection with two pilot wires, Operating characteristics, High impedance differential protection and
partial differential protection.
UNIT IV 9
PROTECTION OF GENERATOR, MOTOR AND TRANSFORMER
Generator/Motor – Generator differential protection, Motor differential protection. Transformer – Basics,
Numerical measured value processing, high impedance differential protection, relays for transformer differential
protection and application examples
UNIT V 9
PROTECTION OF TRANSMISSION LINES AND BUS BARS
Lines – Three core pilot wire differential protection, Two core pilot wire differential protection, line differential
protection with digital communication, phase comparison protection with digital communication and differential
protection of feeders including transformers
Bus bars – Low impedance bus bar differential protection, response of numerical bus bar protection in case of CT
saturation and high impedance bus bar protection.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
92
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gerhard Ziegler, Numerical Distance Protection: Principles and Applications, John Wiley & Sons
th
Publishing, 4 Edition, 2011.
2. Gerhard Ziegler, Numerical Differential Protection: Principles and Applications, John Wiley & Sons
st
Publishing, 1 Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rao T.S.M., “Digital/Numerical Relays”, McGraw Hill Education, First Edition, 2005.
15EEC20 HIGH VOLTAGE DIRECT CURRENT TRANSMISSION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The basic concepts of HVDC with existing HVDC projects.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Address the modern trends and planning of HVDC system.
 Analyze various converters and associated control strategy used in the HVDC system.
 Design AC and DC filter to eliminate Harmonics in the HVDC system
 Model the HVDC systems for Digital Dynamic Simulation.
Electronic devices and circuits -Power Converter - Power Inverter - Network theory - Analog Circuits, Power
System Analysis - Fourier Analysis and Fourier Transforms – Trigonometry concepts.
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO HVDC SYSTEM 9
Introduction of DC Power transmission technology – Comparison of AC and DC transmission – Application of DC

transmission – Description of DC transmission system –Ground Electrodes for HVDC systems-Planning for
HVDC transmission – Modern trends in DC transmission.
UNITII ANALYSIS OF HVDC CONVERTERS 9
Pulse number – Choice of converter configuration –Analysis of Graetz bridge circuit with and without overlap –
Converter bridge characteristics – Characteristics of a twelve pulse converter – Detailed analysis of Line
commutated converters.
UNITIII HVDC SYSTEM CONTROL 9
Principles of DC link control– Converter Control Characteristics(CIA,CEA and CC control) –Power Reversal in a
DC link- VDCOL-Control Hierarchy - Firing Angle control: IPC & EPC – Tap Changer Control - Starting and
Stopping of HVDC link.
UNITIV HARMONICS AND FILTERS 9
Introduction – Generation of harmonics – Characteristics and Non-Characteristics harmonics – Definition of Wave

Distortion or Ripple - Harmonics Filters – Types – Effect of Network Impedance on Filtering - Design of AC filters
– Types of AC filters – Single Tuned Passive filters – Minimum Cost Tuned Filters – Design of High Pass
Damped Filter- Design of DC filters –- PLC/RI noise filters.
93
UNITV MODELLING AND SIMULATION OF HVDC SYSTEMS 9
Simulation: Introduction to system simulation – Philosophy and tools – HVDC Simulator– Parity Simulator –
Digital Dynamic Simulation - Modeling of HVDC systems for digital dynamic simulation - Graph Theoretic
Analysis – Transient Simulation of DC and AC networks.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw-Hill, 1993.
2. Kimbark E.W., “Direct Current Transmission” John Wiley & Sons.
3. Padiyar K.R., , “HVDC Power Transmission Systems”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J.Arrillaga, “High Voltage Direct Current Transmission”, Peter Pregrinus, London 1983.
2. Erich Uhlmann, “Power Transmission by Direct Current”, BS Publications, 2004.
3. Sood V.K., “HVDC and FACTS controllers – Applications of Static Converters in Power System”, Kluwer
Academic Publisher,April 2004.
4. Kakshaish S., Kamaraju V., “HVDC Transmission”, McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2012.
5. Rao S., “EHV AC and HVDC Transmission Engineering and Practice,” Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
1990.
15EEC21 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basics of power flow control and compensation.
 FACTS technology.
 Variable impedance type and converter type shunt and series compensators.
 Operation of versatile FACTS devices.
 Features of FACTS projects around the world and FACTS controller co-ordination.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Demonstrate the importance of compensation and appropriate compensators.
 Explain the functions and capabilities of various FACTS devices.
 Select appropriate FACTS device for alleviating specific power system related problems.
 Address need for FACTS controller co-ordination.
AC Transmission System, Simple Machine Infinite Bus system, Power- angle curve, Power-Voltage curve, Equal
area criterion, Operation of Thyristor, Working of Voltage Source Converters (VSC)
UNIT I GENERAL SYSTEM CONSIDERATION AND BASICS OF FACTS 9

CONCEPTS
Active & Reactive Power flow between Two synchronous sources in AC Systems - Constraints of maximum
transmission line loading – Relative importance of controllable parameters. Compensation - Uncompensated line,
shunt compensation. Series compensation, Effect of compensation on power transfer capacity. Definition and
types of FACTS controllers - Benefits of FACTS Technology
94
UNIT II VARIABLE IMPEDANCE BASED STATIC SHUNT COMPENSATORS 9
Objectives of shunt compensation – Variable Impedance type static VAR generators: Operation, control and
characteristics of TCR, TSR, TSC, FC-TCR and TSC-TCR- Functional control scheme for the FC-TCR and TSC-
TCR type static VAR generator
UNIT III VARIABLE IMPEDANCE BASED STATIC SERIES COMPENSATION 9
Objectives of series compensation– Need for Variable-Series Compensation-Variable impedance type series
compensator: Operation, control, characteristics and control schemes of TSSC and TCSC
UNIT IV CONVERTER BASED COMPENSATORS 9
STATCOM: Operation and VI Characteristics-Control Scheme for STATCOM- Comparison between SVC and
STATCOM- SSSC – Capability, control range and VA rating-Control Scheme for SSSC- Features of SSSC-
UPFC: Basic operating principle- IPFC : Basic operating principle
UNIT V INSTALLATION OF FACTS CONTROLLERS & CO-ORDINATION 9

ASPECTS
Introduction , planning aspects, operational aspects and results of Slatt’s TCSC, Sullivan’s STATCOM-
Introduction to Co-ordination of FACTS controllers-Controller Interactions-Different interaction between FACTS
controllers: Steady state interactions, electro mechanical interaction, Small signal interaction, SSR interaction,
High frequency interaction
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. N.G. Hingorani & L. Gyugyi, “Understanding FACTS: Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC
Transmission Systems” IEEE Press, 2000
2. R. Mohan Mathur, Rajiv K. Varma, “Thyristor-Based FACTS Controllers for Electrical Transmission
Systems”, IEEE press and John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John A.T., “Flexible AC Transmission System”, Institution of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE),
1999
2. Padiyar K.R., “FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution”, New Age International, First
Edition, Reprint 2013.
15EEC22 RESTRUCTURED POWER SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students understand the operation of restructured power system,

 To understand the issues related to Restructuring
 To know about the technical challenges in restructuring
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Elucidate the concept of Deregulation, different entities, market structures and bidding
 Understand the transmission pricing issues and Ancillary services
 Address the technical challenges in Restructuring
95
Power System Operation and Control, Power System Economics, Synchronous Machines, Power System
Analysis.
UNIT I 9
DEREGULATION OF ELECTRIC SUPPLY INDUSTRY
Introduction about deregulation – Structure of restructured electric utility – Different entities – Deregulation
situation around the world (Qualitative treatment) – Benefits from competitive electricity market – After effects of
deregulation. Role of Load Managers
UNI II POWER SYSTEM OPERATION IN COMPETITIVE ENVIRONMENT 9
Role of ISO – Comparison of two different market structures – Operational planning activities of ISO – ISO in
bilateral markets – Operational planning activities of GENCO – GENCO in pool and bilateral markets – Market
participation issues – Competitive bidding
UNIT III TRANSMISSION OPEN ACCESS AND PRICING ISSUES 9

Power wheeling – Types of transmission services in open access – Cost components in transmission – Pricing of
power transactions – Pricing mechanisms in various countries.
UNIT IV ANCILLARY SERVICES MANAGEMENT 9
General description of some ancillary services – Ancillary service management in various countries – Reactive
power as an ancillary service – Synchronous generators as ancillary service providers
UNIT V TECHNICAL CHALLENGES AND AVAILABILITY BASED TARIFF 9
Total Transfer Capability – Limitations - Margins – Available transfer capability (ATC) – Procedure - Methods to
compute ATC – Static and Dynamic ATC –Concept of Congestion Management – Bid, Zonal and Node
Congestion Principles - Generation Rescheduling. Availability based tariff – Necessity – Working Mechanism –
Beneficiaries – Day Scheduling Process – Deviation from Schedule – Unscheduled Interchange Rate – 24*4
block – System Marginal Rate – Trading Surplus Generation – Applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kankar Bhattacharya, Math H.J. Bollen and Jaap E. Daalder, “Operation of Restructured Power
Systems”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001.
2. Loi Lei Lai, “Power system Restructuring and Regulation”, John Wiley sons, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Shahidehpour.M and Alomoush.M, “Restructuring Electrical Power Systems”, Marcel Decker Inc., 2001.
2. G.Zaccour, “Deregulation of Electric Utilities”, Kluwer Academic Publishers 1998.
3. M.Illic, F.Galiana and L.Fink, “Power Systems Restructuring: Engineering and Economics”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2000.
15EEC23 POWER SYSTEM DYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basic concepts related to power system dynamics.
 Modeling of Synchronous machine and SSR analysis.
96
 Controllers to maintain stability in the power system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyse dynamic modeling of a synchronous machine.
 Develop the models for excitation and speed governing system.
 Ezplain the fundamental concepts of stability of dynamic systems.
 Address the small signal stability problem in power systems.
Power system stability, Control system basics, Power System analysis
Basics of system dynamics – numerical techniques – introduction to software packages to study the responses.
Concept and importance of power system stability in the operation and design - distinction between transient and
dynamic stability.
UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE MODELLING 9

Synchronous machine - flux linkage equations - Park’s transformation - per unit conversion -normalizing the
equations - equivalent circuit - current space model - flux linkage state space model. Sub-transient and transient
inductances - time constants
UNIT III MACHINE CONTROLLERS 9
Exciter and voltage regulators - function and types of excitation systems - typical excitation system configuration -
block diagram and state space representation of IEEE type 1 excitation system - saturation function - stabilizing
circuit. Function of speed governing systems.
UNIT IV STEADY STATE STABILITY 9
System response to small disturbances - linear model of the unregulated synchronous machine and its modes of
oscillation - regulated synchronous machine - distribution of power impact – linearization of the load equation for
the one machine problem – simplified linear model– dynamic performance measure
UNIT V SUB SYNCHRONOUS RESONANCE 9
Problems at power frequency- Phenomenon of Sub Synchronous Resonance (SSR) – Problems associated with
SSR-Induction Generator effect- Torsional interaction-Effects and Counter measures for Transient Torque
Problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. “Power system dynamics – Stability and control”, K. R. Padiyar, BSP publications, 2008
2. R. Ramanujam, “Power System Dynamics, Analysis and Simulation”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, January
2010.
3. P. Kundur, ‘Power System Stability and Control’, McGraw Hill Inc., USA, 1994.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pribindra Chowdhuri, “Electromagnetic transients in power systems”, Research Studies Press Limited,
2004.
2. M.A.Pai and W.Sauer, ‘Power System Dynamics and Stability’, Pearson Education Asia, India,
2002.
3. James A.Momoh, Mohamed.E. EI-Hawary. “Electric Systems, Dynamics and stability with Artificial
Intelligence Application”, Marcel & Dekker Inc., 1999.
97
15EEC24 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The course is designed to make the student acquire an adequate knowledge of the physiological
systems of the human body and relate them to the parameters that have clinical importance. The
fundamental principles of equipment that are actually in use at the present day in the health centre are
introduced.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Acquaintance of the physiology of the heart, lung, blood circulations, respirations, patient monitoring and
electrical safety in clinical environment.
 Obtain the in-depth knowledge in various electrical origins of recording methods of ECG, EEG, EMG
and ERG.
 Know how to use the latest medical equipments available for measurement of non-electrical parameters
in the physiological systems of the human body and also the modern methods of imaging techniques
used for diagnostic purpose in the health care centre.
 Know the latest procedure adopted for providing Medical assistance through telemetry and the
Therapeutic equipments used for diagnostic and surgery purposes.
Basic knowledge in Human Physiological System- Fundamentals of Measurements & Instrumentation-Electronic

Devices & Circuits - Digital Signal Processing.
UNIT I HUMAN PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEM 9
Cell and its Structure – Action potential – Resting potential – Propagation of Action potential and Sodium pump
action – Nerve cell: Neuron – Axon – Synapse – Central Nervous System-Peripheral Nervous System –
Respiratory System-Electro Physiology of Cardiopulmonary Circulation system.
UNIT II NON-ELECTRICAL PARAMETER MEASUREMENTS 9
Measurement of Blood pressure – Cardiac Output measurement – Measurement of Heart Sounds –

Phonocardiography – Measurement of Partial pressure of Carbon dioxide (PaCO2) and Partial pressures of
Oxygen (PaO2) in the Arterial blood – Measurement of lung volumes: Spirometry.
UNIT III ELECTRO–PHYSIOLOGICAL PARAMETERS MEASUREMENTS 9
Basic components of a Biomedical system – Bio-Electrodes : Micro, Needle and Surface Electrodes – Different
Lead configurations and recording methods of Electrocardiograph(ECG) – Electroencephalograph(EEG) – Brain
Waves: Alpha, Beta, Theta and Delta waves and their frequency spectrum – Electromyography (EMG)-
Electroretinography (ERG).
UNIT IV PATIENT LIFE ASSISTING AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS 9
Pacemakers and its types –Defibrillators: D.C and AED – Ventilators: Pressure limited, Volume limited and Servo
controlled ventilators – Nerve and Muscle stimulators-Surgical diathermy machines: Short wave, Microwave and
Ultrasonic diathermy – Hemo and Peritoneal dialyzers.
98
UNIT V MEDICAL IMAGING EQUIPMENTS & PATIENT MONITORING 9
SYSTEMS
Block diagram, operations and applications of X-Ray machines– Computer Tomography – Magnetic Resonance
Imaging (MRI) System – Ultrasonography – Medical Thermography – Bio-telemetry systems – Patient monitoring
and Electrical safety in Clinical environment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Khandpur R.S., “Handbook of Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd., 2013.
2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J.Weibell, Erich A.Pfeiffer, “Bio-Medical Instrumentation and Measurements”,
nd
Pearson Education, 2011 / PHI,2 Edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, John Wiley and sons, India, 3
Edition, 2013.
rd
2. Geddes L.A. and Baker L.E., “Principles of Applied Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, John Wiley & Sons, 3
Edition, 2013.
nd
3. Ed. Joseph D. Bronzino, “The Biomedical Engineering HandBook”, Boca Raton, CRC Press LLC, 2
Edition, 2000.
4. Barbara L. Christe, “Introduction to biomedical Instrumentation” Cambridge University Press, 2009.
ALLIED ELECTIVES – SYLLABUS
Offered by Civil Department
15CEA01 INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of sustainability.

 To know environmental regulations.
 To realize the environmental pollution
 To understand the air pollution control methods
 To know the principles of water treatment
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
 Identify the importance of sustainability and its indicators, strategies and barriers.
 Implement the environmental regulations, policies and Regulations for clean environment
 Familiarize the pollution and its regulating standards
 Apply the different air pollution control methods gases and particulates
 Apply the principles of water treatment and recovery methods.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Environmental Science
99
UNIT I SUSTAINABILITY 9
Industrial activity and environment - Industrialization and sustainable development - Indicators of sustainability-
Sustainability strategies - Barriers to sustainability - Pollution prevention in achieving sustainability
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS 9
Prevention vs. control of industrial pollution - Environment policies and Regulations to encourage pollution
prevention - Environment friendly chemical processes - Regulations for clean environment and implications for
industries
UNIT III POLLUTION 9
Definition of pollutant - Types of pollution - Air - Water - Land - Noise - Adverse effects of pollutants eco system
and human health - Need for effluent treatment and toxicity control - Standards for portable water - Agricultural
and left-off streams- Air standards for cities - Industrial areas and Resorts.
UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION CONTROL METHODS 9
Particulate Emission Control- Gravitational Settling Chambers- Cyclone separators - Fabric filters - Electrostatic
Precipitators - Wet scrubbers - Absorbers - Control of sulphur di oxide - Oxides of nitrogen - Carbon monoxide
and hydrocarbons - Noise pollution measurements and its control.
UNIT V PRINCIPLES OF WATER TREATMENT 9
Primary, secondary and tertiary treatments - Advanced waste water treatments - Recovery of metals from
process effluents
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Bishop.P, "Pollution Prevention: Fundamentals and Practice", McGraw Hill International, McGraw Hill Book
Co., Singapore, 2010
2. Freeman.H.M, "Industrial Pollution Prevention Hand Book", McGraw Hill, 1995
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rose.G.R.D, “Air pollution and Industry”, Van No strand Reinhold Co., New York 1972
2. Pandey.G.N and Carney.G.C, “Environmental Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1989
3. James. G. Mann and Liu.Y.A, "Industrial Water Reuse and Waste WaterMinimization", McGraw Hill, 1999
EXTENSIVE READING:
th
1. Kapoor.B.S, “Environmental Engineering”, 5 Edition, Khanna publishers,2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
15CEA02 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the basic knowledge about the Engineering Seismology

 To create the awareness about the earthquake recording instruments and seismic records
 To instruct the knowledge about the earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment
100
 To understand the various seismic hazard analysis
 To introduce the different types of risk and vulnerability assessment
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Categorize the various components of engineering seismology

 Identify the different types of seismic recording instruments
 Classify the various earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment
 Do the various seismic hazard analysis
 Analyze the types of risk and vulnerability
Knowledge on basics on earthquake
UNIT I ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY 9
Introduction to engineering seismology - Terminologies and definitions - Earthquake types - Overview of plate
tectonics - Earthquake source mechanisms - Source models - Types of faults - Activity and fault studies -
Concepts of seismic magnitudes and intensity -Earthquake size, different magnitude scales and relations, Theory
of wave propagation - Seismic waves, body and surface waves.
UNIT II EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTS 9
Earthquake recording instrumentations - Concept of seismograph - Seismic station - Sensors and data loggers -
Mechanical and digital sensors - Interpretation of Seismic Records -Acceleration, Velocity and Displacement -
Frequency and Time Domain parameters - Response Spectra and Spectral parameters - Epicentre and
magnitude determination.
UNIT III EARTHQUAKE HAZARDS AND SEISMIC HAZARD ASSESSMENT 9
Introduction to earthquake hazards -Strong ground motions and site effects - World great Earthquakes - Large
and Damaging Earthquakes of India - Instruction to seismic zones and codes - Global and National seismic
hazard assessment mapping programs - Safety of individual site - Concept of seismic micro zonation - Need for
Micro zonation - Types and Scale – Methodology.
UNIT IV SEISMIC HAZARD ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to Seismic Hazard Analysis- Methods - Deterministic and Probabilistic - Attenuation models and
Simulation of Strong Ground Motion - Introduction to Site characterization - Different methods and experiments -
Geotechnical properties - Site classification and worldwide code recommendation.
UNIT V RISK CLASSIFICATIONS AND MAPPING 9
Concept of site response - Local site effects and evaluation methods - Ground motion amplifications and
estimation - Development of response /design spectrum - Introduction to liquefaction - Mechanism and factors
causing liquefaction - estimation methods and procedures- Mapping - Earthquake induced landslide - Landslide
hazard mapping - Tsunami hazard and Consideration for Tsunami hazard mapping.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1. Stein, S., and M. Wysession, “An Introduction to Seismology, Earthquakes, and Earth Structure”, 1 edition,
Malden, MA: Blackwell, September 2003.
2. Steven L Kramer, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2003
101
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bozorgnia, Y. and Bertero, V.V., “Earthquake Engineering - From Engineering Seismology to Performance -
Based Engineering” CRC Press, Washington, 2004.
2. Leon Reiter, “Earthquake hazard Analysis - Issues and Insights”, Columbia University Press, New York,
1990.
3. Havskov, J. and Alguacil, G.,“Instrumentation in Earthquake Seismology”,Springer,Netherlands, 2004.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Science, 1999
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nisee.berkeley.edu/
2. http://www.ethiopians.com/earthquake_engineering_resources.htm
15CEA03 SOLAR ENERGY UTILIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to acquire knowledge of solar radiation data and its measurement.
 To explain the concept of various forms of solar thermal systems.
 To create basic knowledge on direct steam generation systems.
 To learn the maintenance and implementation of solar photovoltaic.
 To recognize the latest heat energy storages in buildings.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the students will be able to,
 Recognize the concepts of solar radiation data and its measurement.

 Understand the working process of various solar thermal systems.
 Appreciate the principles of solar parabolic concentrators and direct steam generation systems.
 Know the importance of solar photovoltaic maintenance and their implementation.
 Identify the orientation and design of buildings by using latest heat energy storages.
Knowledge on energy conservation
UNIT I SOLAR RADIATION 9
Sun and earth geometry- Solar radiation- Beam and diffuse radiations- Measurement of solar radiation –
Pyranometer-Pyrheliometer- Sunshine recorder-Solar collectors and applications.
UNIT II SOLAR THERMAL SYSTEMS 9
Flat plate and evacuated tube collectors- Domestic hot water and process heat systems- Solar cooker- Solar
dryer-Solar desalination and solar pond.
UNIT III SOLAR POWER PLANT 9
Principles of solar parabolic concentrators- Trough and dish types- Compound parabolic concentrators- Fresnel
102
lens collectors- Central receiver plant- Direct steam generation systems-Solar furnaces.
UNIT IV SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Solar photovoltaic theory- Mono and polycrystalline silicon technologies- PV modules and integrated systems-
implementation and maintenance.
UNIT V SOLAR-CONSCIOUS BUILDINGS 9
Orientation and design of buildings- Passive solar heat- Thermal capacity -Insulation- Solar cooling-refrigeration
and air-conditioning- Space heating- Sensible and latest heat energy storages in buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sukhatme.K, Suhas P. Sukhatme, “Solar energy: Principles of thermal collection and storage”, Tata McGraw
Hill publishing Co. Ltd, 8th edition, 2008.
2. Soteris A. Kalogiru, “Solar Energy Engineering: Processes and systems”, First edition, Academic press,
2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Duffie.J.A, &Beckman.W.A, “Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes”, 3 edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
2006.
2. Martin A. Green, “Third generation Photovoltaics: Advanced energy conversion”, 1st edition, 2005.
3. Garg.H.P, Prakash.J, “Solar energy fundamentals and applications”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co. Ltd,
2006.
4. Yogi Goswami.D, Frank Kreith, Jan F.Kreider, “Principle of solar engineering”, 2nd edition, Taylor and
Francis, 2nd edition, 2000.
5. Tiwari.G.N, “Solar energy: Fundamentals, Design, Modeling and Applications”, CRC Press Inc., 2002.
15CEA04 ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the physics and chemistry of soil

 To know inorganic and organic geochemistry.
 To realize contaminant fate and transport in soil
 To understand the soil remediation technologies
 To find the principles behind site selection and methods of disposal
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Classify theIndex properties, classification and exchange capacity.

 Analyse the inorganic and organic geochemistry and Distribution of metals in soils
 Identify the contaminant fate and transport in soil
 Apply the soil remediation technologies available in the affected soil
 Procure idea in site selection and disposal methods
103
Knowledge on basic soil mechanics

UNIT I PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF SOIL 9
Soil formation - Composition - soil fabric - Mass volume relationship - Index properties and soil classification -
Hydraulic and consolidation characteristics - Chemical properties - Soil pH - Surface charge and point of zero
charge - Anion and Cation exchange capacity of clays - Specific surface area - Bonding in clays - Soil pollution -
Factors governing soil - Pollutant interaction.
UNIT II INORGANIC AND ORGANIC GEOCHEMISTRY 9
Inorganic Chemistry - Metal contamination - Distribution of metals in soils - Geochemical processes controlling
the distribution of the metals in soils - Chemical analysis of metal in soil - Organic geochemistry - Organic
contamination - Distribution of NAPLs in soils - Process controlling the distribution of NAPLs in soil - Chemical
analysis of NAPLs in soils.
UNIT III CONTAMINANT FATE AND TRANSPORT IN SOIL 9
Transport processes - Advection - Diffusion - Dispersion - Chemical mass transfer processes - Sorption and
desorption - Precipitation and dissolution - Oxidation and reduction - Acid base reaction - Complexation - Ion
exchange - Volatilization - Hydrolysis - Biological process - Microbial transformation of heavy metals.
UNIT IV SOIL REMEDIATION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Contaminated site characterization – Containment – Soil vapor extraction – Soil washing – Solidification and
stabilization – Electro-kinetic remediation – Thermal desorption – Vitrification – In-situ and Ex-situ Bioremediation
– Phytoremediation – Soil fracturing – Biostimulation – Bioaugumentation – Chemical oxidation and reduction.
UNIT V SITE SELECTION AND METHODS OF DISPOSAL 9
Criteria for sites for waste disposal facilities – Current practices for waste disposal – Sub surface techniques –
Passive contaminant system – Leachate contamination – Application of geo-membranes – Rigid and flexible
membrane liners
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Calvin Rose, “An introduction to the Environmental Physics of Soil, Water and Water Sheds”, Cambridge
University Press, 2004.
2. Paul Nathanail C. and Paul Bardos R., “Reclamation of contaminated Land”, John Wiley & Sons Limited,
2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hari D. Sharama and Krishna R.Reddy, “Geo-Environmental Engineering: Site Remediation, Water
Contamination and Emerging Water Management Technologies”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2004.
2. Marcel Vander Perk, “Soil and Water contamination from Molecular to catchment Scale”, Taylor &Franncis,
2006.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. William J. Deutsch, “Groundwater Geochemistry: Fundamentals and Applications to Contamination”, Lewis

Publishers, 1997.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
104
15CEA05 PRINCIPLES OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Introduce students to the basic principles of Global Positioning System

 Familiarize with GPS signals and data
 Impart knowledge on GPS data processing
 Know about various errors in GPS data
 provide students with the skills required to link locational data to certain projections and present same as
maps
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Acquaint with the fundamentals of Global Positioning System

 Employ various methods to collect GPS data by receiving signals from receiver
 Perform basic GPS receiver operation and data processing
 Check the accuracy of GPS data and able to do necessary adjustments.
 Produce a simple map from field data acquired using hand-held GPS
Knowledge on Surveying
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GPS 9
Components of GPS - GPS receivers - Reference coordinates systems - Datum, geoid, ellipsoid, WGS 84
system –Time and signal propagation through atmosphere- Their modelling and estimation - Satellite orbit
andEngineering Applications.
UNIT II GPS SIGNALS AND DATA 9
Navigational data - Collection methods - static positioning, kinematic positioning, Pseudo - Kinematic and stop
and go methods -Observation planning and strategy.
UNIT III GPS OBSERVABLES 9
Pseudo range and carrier phase parameters - Estimations, data handling, cycle slip detection and correction,
ambiguity resolution- GPS data processing -Single, Double and Triple differences.
UNIT IV ERRORS IN GPS DATA 9
Satellite geometry -Errors in different segments - Multipath errors - accuracy of GPS data and measures -
Network adjustments.
UNIT V DATUM TRANSFORMATION AND DIFFERENTIAL GPS 9
Reduction of observation -Transformation to various map projection systems - Real time kinematic GPS -Multiple
reference stations -Virtual reference stations.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Satheesh, Gopi, “Global Positioning System and its Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
105
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Leick, A., “GPS Satellite Surveying”, John Wiley, 2004

2. Kaplan, E.D. and Hegarty, C.J., “Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications”, Artech House, 2006
nd
3. Gunter, S., „Satellite Geodesy“, 2 Ed., WalterbdeGruyter, 2003.
4.
15CEA06 NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of with various sources of Non-conventional energy
such as solar wind, small hydro, ocean & wave energy
 To understand the working of solar thermal power plants
 To know various aspects of geo-thermal energy
 To have knowledge in wind and Thermo-electrical energy
 To have exposure on biomass energy management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the curse student will be able to

 Learn fundamentals of solar radiation geometry, application of solar energy
 Selection of sites for wind farm, different types of wind generators.
 Realize the basic of small hydro, ocean & wave energy.
 Have knowledge in geo-thermal energy
 Appreciate bio mass energy management
Knowledge on alternate energy resources
UNIT I NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES 9
Various non-conventional energy resources- Introduction, availability, classification, relative Merits and Demerits -
Solar Cells - Theory of solar cells - Solar cell materials -Solar cell array -Solar cell power plant -Limitations.
UNIT II SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY 9
Solar radiation- Flat plate collectors and their materials - Applications and performance - Focussing of collectors
and their materials -Applications and performance -Solar thermal power plants - Thermal energy storage for solar
heating and cooling - Limitations.
UNIT III GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9
Resources of geothermal energy - Thermodynamics of geo-thermal energy conversion- Electrical conversion and
non-electrical conversion -Environmental considerations - Magneto-hydrodynamics (MHD) - Principle of working
of MHD Power plant - performance and limitations - Fuel Cells - Principle of working of various types of fuel cells
and their working, performance and limitations.
UNIT IV WIND ENERGY 9
Wind Energy - Wind power and its sources- Site selection- Criterion - Momentum theory- Classification of rotors-
Concentrations and augments- Wind characteristics- Performance and limitations of energy conversion systems -
Thermo-electrical and thermionic Conversions - Principle of working - Performance and limitations.
106
UNIT V BIO-MASS 9
Bio-mass - Availability of bio-mass and its conversion theory - Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC) -
Availability, theory and working principle -Performance and limitations -Wave and Tidal Wave - Principle of
working -Performance and limitations -Waste Recycling Plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John Twideu and Tony Weir, “Renewal Energy Resources” BSP Publications, 2006.
2. M.V.R. KoteswaraRao, “Energy Resources: Conventional & Non-Conventional”, BSPPublications, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. D.S. Chauhan, “Non-conventional Energy Resources”, New Age International, 2002

2. C.S. Solanki, “Renewal Energy Technologies: A Practical Guide for Beginners”, PHI Learning, 2006
3. Raja, “Introduction to Non-Conventional Energy Resources”,SciTech Publications, 2008
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Peter Auer, "Advances in Energy System and Technology - Vol. 1 & 2", Academic Press, 2005.
15CEA07 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of energy conservation measures.

 To understand conservation measures in steam systems
 To know energy conservation aspects of fluid machinery
 To have knowledge in electrical energy conservation in various industries
 To have exposure on energy management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will be able to
 Have knowledge of energy conservation measures

 Appreciate conservation measures in steam systems
 Realize energy consumption and energy saving potentials
 Have knowledge on electrical energy conservation
 Practice energy management
Knowledge on energy conservation
UNIT I ENERGY CONSERVATION PRINCIPLES 9
Energy scenario - Principles of energy conservation - Resource availability - Energy savings - Current energy
consumption in India - Roles and responsibilities of energy managers in industries.
UNIT II ENERGY CONSERVATION IN STEAM SYSTEMS 9
Power plant components, conservation measures in steam systems - Losses in boiler - Methodology of upgrading
boiler performance - Blow down control - Excess air control - Pressure reducing stations - Condensate recovery -
107
Condensate pumping - Thermo compressors - Recovery of flash steam - Air removal and venting - Steam traps -
Cooling towers.
UNIT III ENERGY CONSERVATION IN FLUID MACHINERY 9
Centrifugal pumps - Energy consumption and energy saving potentials - Design consideration - Minimizing over
design - Fans and blowers -Specification - Safety margin - Choice of fans - Controls and design considerations -
Air compressor and compressed air systems - Selection of compressed air layout - Energy conservation aspects
to be considered at design stage.
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION 9
Potential areas for electrical energy conservation in various industries - Conservation methods - Energy
management opportunities in electrical heating, lighting system - Cable selection - Energy efficient motors -
Factors involved in determination of motor efficiency - Adjustable AC drives - Variable speed drives - Energy
efficiency in electrical system.
UNIT V ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9
Organizational background desired for energy management persuasion -Motivation - Publicity role, Tariff analysis
- Industrial energy management systems - Energy monitoring - Auditing and targeting - Economics of various
energy conservation schemes – Energy policy and energy labelling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1. Reay.D.A, “Industrial energy conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1 edition, 2003.
2. White.L.C, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilization”, Hemisphere Publishers, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Smith.C.B, “Energy Management Principles”, Pergamon Press, 2006.

2. Trivedi.P.R and Jolka.K.R, “Energy Management”, Common Wealth Publication, 2002.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Hamies, “Energy Auditing and Conservation;Methods, Measurements,Management and Case study”,

Hemisphere, 2003.
15CEA08 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concepts of sustainability and EIA
 To expose the students to the need, methodology of EIA
 To realize the documentation and application of Environmental Impact Assessment
 To Understand the pollution control methods
 To develop the skill to prepare Environmental Management Plan
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will be able to
 Identify the impact on environment by the Infrastructural projects
 Impart the knowledge in legal and regulatory aspect in India according to MoEF.
108
 Comprehend the various components of EIA and its methods.
 Appreciate the Methodologies, prediction and Assessment.
 Prepare Environmental Management plan for Infrastructure engineering project.
Knowledge on environmental science
UNIT I BASIC FUNDAMENTALS COMPONENTS OF EIA 9

Historical Development of Environmental Impact Assessment - EIA in Project Cycle - Legal and Regulatory
Aspects in India - Types and Limitations of EIA - Cross Sectorial Issues and terms of references in EIA - Public
Participation in EIA.: EIA Process- Screening and Scoping - Setting - Analysis and Mitigation.
UNIT II METHODOLOGY 9
Matrices - Networks - Checklists - Connections and Combinations of Processes-Cost benefit analysis - Analysis
of Alternative - Software Packages for EIA - Expert Systems in EIA.
UNIT III PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9
Prediction tools for EIA - Mathematical modelling for impact prediction - Assessment of Impacts on Air, Water and
Soil - Assessment of Impacts on Biological Community - Cumulative Impact Assessment - Documentation of EIA
findings -Report Preparation.
UNIT IV SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT ASSESSMENT 9
Definition of Social Impact Assessment - Social Impact Assessment model and the planning process - Rationale
and measurement for SIA variables- Relationship between social impacts and change in community and
institutional arrangements - Individual and family level impacts - Communities in transition - Neighbourhood and
community impacts - Selecting, testing and understanding significant social impacts - Mitigation and
enhancement in social assessment - Environmental costing of projects.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9
Environmental Management Plan - Preparation - EMP - Implementation and Review - Mitigation and
Rehabilitation plans - Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes - Post Project Audit - Ethical
and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment - Case Studies - EIA related to infrastructure,
Construction and Housing - Mining - Industrial Projects - Thermal Power - River Valley and Hydroelectric- Coastal
Projects -Nuclear Power.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Petts, J., “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Vol., I and II”, Blackwell science, London, 1999.
2. Canter, L.W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lawrence, D.P., “Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical Solutions to recurrent problems”, Wiley-
Interscience, New Jersey, 2003.
15CEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF SUPPLY CHAIN L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the fundamentals of the supply chain.

 To provide knowledge on designing the supply chain network
109
 To provide exposure on various types of facility location and network design
 To impart knowledge on planning and managing of inventories in a supply chain.
 To provide experience on sourcing, transportation and pricing products.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to;
 Comprehend the concepts behind the supply chain network.

 Design the supply chain network.
 Locate the facilities and design the network.
 Plan and manage the inventories in a supply chain.
 Do the sourcing, transportation and pricing products.
Knowledge on Engineering Economics & Cost analysis
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SUPPLY CHAIN 9
Supply chain systems -Stages and decision phases and process view of supply chain - Supply chain flows -
Examples of supply chains -Competitive supply chain strategies -Drivers for supply chain performance.
UNIT II DESIGNING THE SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK 9
Distribution Networking –Role, Design - Supply Chain Network - SCN – Role –Factors -Framework for design
decisions.
UNIT III FACILITY LOCATION AND NETWORK DESIGN 9
Models for facility location and capacity location - Impact of uncertainty on SCN -Discounted cash flow analysis -
Evaluating network design decisions using decision trees - Analytical problems.
UNIT IV PLANNING AND MANAGING OF INVENTORIES IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 9
Inventory concepts -Trade promotions -Managing multi-echelon cycle inventory -Safety inventory determination -
Impact of supply uncertainty aggregation and replenishment.
UNITV SOURCING, TRANSPORTATION AND PRICING PRODUCTS 9
Role of sourcing -Supplier- Scoring and assessment - Selection and contracts -Design collaboration -Role of
transportation -Models of transportation and designing transportation network - Revenue management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Blanchard, D., “Supply chain management: Best practices”, John Wiley &Sons,New Jersey,2007.
2. Simchi-Levi, David, Xin Chen, and JulienBramel,“The Logic of Logistics: Theory, Algorithms, andApplications
nd
for Logistics and Supply Chain Management” 2 edition. Springer, New York, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Graves, S. C., and A. G. De Kok, “Handbook in operations research and management science” Vol.
11,Elsevier Publishing Company, 2003.
110
15CEA10 COASTAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on various aspects of coastal engineering

 To provide an overview of the analysis and design procedures used in the field of coastal engineering
 To understand the various issues connected with coastal sediment transport
 To familiarize with planning and design of various coastal protection works
 To impart knowledge on various types of modeling aspects
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Acquire knowledge on wave theory

 Apply these engineering principles to solve the problems
 Understand the basic concepts of coastal sediment transport
 Design shore defense structures
 Develop site specific physical and numerical models
Knowledge on Water Resources Engineering
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COASTAL ENGINEERING 9
Introduction - Wind and waves - Sea and Swell - Introduction to small amplitude wave theory -Use of wave
tables- Mechanics of water waves - Linear (Airy) wave theory.
UNIT II WAVE PROPERTIES AND ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to non-linear waves and their properties - Waves in shallow waters - Wave Refraction - Diffraction
and Shoaling - Hinds east wave generation models -Wave shoaling -Wave refraction -Wave breaking - Wave
diffraction random and 3D waves- Short term wave analysis -Wave spectra and its utilities - Long term wave
analysis- Statistics analysis of grouped wave data
UNIT III COASTAL SEDIMENT TRANSPORT 9
Dynamic beach profile -Cross-shore transport -Along shore transport (Littoral transport) -Sediment movement
UNIT IV COASTAL DEFENSE 9
Field measurement -Models, groins, sea walls, offshore breakwaters and artificial nourishment -Planning of coast
protection works - Design of shore defence structures –Case studies
UNIT V MODELING IN COASTAL ENGINEERING 9
Physical modeming in Coastal Engineering - Limitations and advantages - Role of physical modelling in coastal
engineering - Numerical modelling - Modelling aspects -Limitations - Case studies using public domain models
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research
Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2. Kamphuis, J.W. “Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2000.
111
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research
Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2. Kamphuis, J.W. “ Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2000
3. Dean, R.G. and Dalrymple, R.A. “ Water wave mechanics for Engineers and Scientists”, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1994
4. Sorenson, R.M. “Basic Coastal Engineering”, Wiley-Interscience Publication, New York, 1978.
15CEA11 MANUFACTURING COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of cost estimation and different types of cost estimating methods.
 To impart clear knowledge on cost and various factory expenses.
 To gain knowledge on budget and measures of cost economics.
 To compute the cost estimation in different shops.
 To calculate machining time and cost for the different process.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Comprehend the different types of cost estimating methods.

 Gain knowledge on calculating cost and expenses of various factory processes.
 Acquire knowledge on measures of cost economics and able to create budget for the industry.
 Calculate the process cost involved in different shops.
 Work out machining time and cost for the different process.
Knowledge on Estimation
UNIT I COST ESTIMATION 9
Objective of cost estimation- Costing -Cost accounting- Classification of cost-Elements of cost- Types of
estimates -Methods of estimates -Data requirements and sources- Collection of cost- Allowances in estimation.
UNIT II COSTS AND EXPENSES 9
Aims of costing and estimation - Functions and procedure - Introduction to costs- Computing material cost- Direct
labor cost-Analysis of overhead costs - Factory expenses-Administrative expenses-Selling and distributing
expenses - Cost ladder - Cost of product.
UNIT III COST ECONOMICS 9
Budget -Need and Types - Budgetary control - Objectives and Benefits - Measures of cost economics - Make or
buy decision and Analysis - Depreciation - Causes of depreciation -Methods of Depreciation - Allocation of
overheads.
UNIT IV ESTIMATION OF COSTS IN DIFFERENT SHOPS 9
Estimation in Forging shop - Losses in forging - Forging cost-Estimation in welding shop - Gas cutting - Electric
welding-Estimation in foundry shop - Pattern cost - Casting cost - Illustrative examples.
112
UNIT V ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIMES AND COSTS 9
Estimation of machining time for lathe operations - Drilling, Boring, Shaping, Planning, Milling and Grinding
operations - Illustrative examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. Kesavan, C. Elanchezhian, B. VijayaRamanath, “Process Planning And Cost Estimation”, New Age
International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015
2. Chitale.A.K and Gupta.R.C, “Product Design and manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Sixth
Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Adithan. M, “Process Planning And Cost Estimation”, New Age International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015.
2. Banga.T.R and Sharma.S.C, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing including contracting”, Khanna publishers,
New Delhi, 2012.
3. Joseph G. Monks, “Operations Management, Theory and Problems”, McGraw Hill Book Company, New
Delhi, 2001.
4. Narang.G.B.S and Kumar.V, “Production and Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Fourth edition 2010.
5. Adithan.M. and Pabla.B.S, “Estimating and costing for the Metal Manufacturing Industries”, CRC press,
1992.
Offered by ECE Department
L T P C
15ECA01 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce analog and digital communication techniques.

 To impart knowledge on data and pulse communication techniques.
 To introduce source and Error control coding.
 To develop knowledge on multi–user radio communication
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply analog and digital communication techniques.
 Apply data and pulse communication techniques.
 Analyze Source and Error control coding.
 Utilize multi–user radio communication.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basic knowledge of Bessels function, Time domain and frequency domain signals representation, Basicelectronic
circuits,
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION 9
Principles of amplitude modulation – AM envelope, frequency spectrum and bandwidth – modulation index
and percent – modulation, AM Voltage distribution, AM powerdistribution – Angle modulation – FM and PM
waveforms – phase deviation and modulation index – frequency deviation and percent modulation – Frequency
analysis of angle modulated waves – Bandwidth requirements for Angle modulated waves.
113
UNIT II DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9
Amplitude shift keying – frequency shift keying – FSK bit rate and baudrate – FSK transmitter – BW
consideration of FSK – FSK receiver – phase shift keying – binary phase shift keying – QPSK – Quadrature
Amplitude modulation – bandwidth efficiency – DPSK.
UNIT III DATA AND PULSE COMMUNICATION 9
Data Communication:History of Data Communication – Standards Organizations for Data Communication –

Data Communication Circuits – Data Communication Codes – Error Detection and Correction Techniques –
Data communication Hardware – serial and parallel interfaces.
Pulse Communication: Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) – Pulse Time Modulation (PTM) – Pulse code
Modulation (PCM) – Comparison of various Pulse Communication System (PAM – PTM – PCM).
UNIT IV SOURCE AND ERROR CONTROL CODING 9
Entropy – Source encoding theorem – Shannon Fano coding – Huffman coding – mutual information – channel
capacity – channel coding theorem – Error Control Coding – linear block codes.
UNIT V MULTI–USER RADIO COMMUNICATION 9
Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) – Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) – Code division
multiple access (CDMA) – Cellular Concept and Frequency Reuse – Channel Assignment and Hand off –
Satellite Communication – Bluetooth.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”, 6 Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
th
2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4 Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. Rappaport T.S, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice", 2 Edition, Pearson Education,
2007.
rd
2. Martin S.Roden, “Analog and Digital Communication System”, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
nd
3. B.Sklar,”Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications” 2 Edition PearsonEducation,
2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.wirelesscommunication.nl/reference/chaptr01/telephon/amps.html
2. http://ecee.colorado.edu/~liue/teaching/comm_standards/gsm/index.html
3. http://edu.eap.gr/pli/pli23/documents/Parallila_Keimena/GSM.pdf
4. https://www.eff.org/files/filenode/global_system_for_mobile_communication_technology.pdf
5. http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~jandrews/publications/cdma_talk.pdf
6. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M5L8.pdf
7. www.intel.com/education/.../lectures/lecture_06_80211bandBT.ppt
15ECA02 MICROPROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To apply knowledge of the architecture for programming of 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
114
 To develop skills in interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Write assembly language program for 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
 Interface peripheral devices with 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
 Design 8085 and 8086 microprocessor based system.

PRE REQUISITES:
Digital logic circuits, binary and other number systems, electronic circuits, memory and interfacing concepts,
UNIT I 8 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING 9
Microprocessor based system blocks – Number system – Address bus – data bus – control bus – Tristate bus –
Data Transfer Scheme – 8085 Microprocessor Architecture – Instruction set – Assembly Language Programming
– Interrupts
UNIT II 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE 9
Intel 8086 Internal Architecture – signals– Minimum mode and Maximum mode operation and bus cycles –
Interrupts – Interrupt Service Routines – Memory Interfacing
UNIT III 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTION SET AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE 9
PROGRAMMING
Programmer’s model of 8086 – operand types – operand addressing – assembler directives,instruction set –
Data transfer group – Arithmetic group – logical group – Flag manipulation group – control transfergroup –
Shift/rotate group – Machine or processor control group – 8086 Assembly Languageprogramming.
MICROPROCESSOR PERIPHERAL CHIP INTERFACING
UNIT IV 9
Introduction to I/O Ports – Architecture and interfacing of Programmable Peripheral Interface (8255) – Serial
Communication (8251) – Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254) – Keyboard and Display Controller
(8279)
UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROPROCESSORS 9
Switches and LEDs – Seven–segment Displays – D to A converter – A to D converter – Relay, Motor Control –
DC & Stepper Motor – Case studies – Microprocessor based Digital Scale system – Temperature controller –
Traffic Light control
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture – Programming and application with 8085”, 4
Edition,Penram International Publishing, New Delhi, 2000.
2. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” TMH, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Barry B. Brey, “Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing”, Pearson Prentice Hall,
2009.
2. M. Rafi Quazzaman, “Microprocessors Theory and Applications” Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
3. A.K. Ray and K.M.Burchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals”, Tata McGraw–Hill Education,
2013.
4. Sunil Mathur, “Microprocessor 8086: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.
2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.zseries.in/embedded%20lab/
115
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/pdf/Teacher_Slides/mod1/M1L3.pdf
3. http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/106108100/
15ECA03 MATLAB PROGRAMMING L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To gain knowledge of the MATLAB functions to manipulate complex values, arrays and matrices.
 To develop skills in M File Programming and Elementary Solution Methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze the MATLAB Concepts and Debugging methods.
 Create M–files using IF, SWITCH, FOR, WHILE statements.
 Evaluate the results of Elementary Solution Methods.
PRE REQUISITES:
Familiarity with using Windows applications, calculus, Boolean laws, probability,arrays and vectors, use of a
scientific calculator,
UNIT I MATLAB CONCEPTS 6+3
Directory and Defined Path – Menus and the toolbar – Saving & Loading Files – Using the command line to call
functions – Computing with MATLAB – Reading and Writing from a file: Reading and Writing data from/to a .mat
file, MATLAB Help System.
Lab Component: Get and Set values – Numerical computations
UNIT II DATA STORAGE AND MANIPULATION 6+3
Rational Operators on Single Values – Boolean Operators on Single Values – MATLAB functions to manipulate
complex values – Arrays and Matrices – Declaring a vector – Dot product – Cross Product.
Lab Component: Matrix generators – Data conversion & Data Normalization.
UNIT III GRAPHICS 6+3
2D Graphics: XY– plotting functions, Subplots and Overlay plots – Special Plot types, Bar, Grid, Legend,
Lineseries properties, Semilogx, Regression – 3D Graphics – Mesh – Contour – Developing GUI.
Lab Component: Multiple data sets in one plot – Setting x and y axis limits to match the actual range of the
data using xlim and ylim.
UNIT IV m FILE PROGRAMMING 6+3
m-files– syntax guidelines – Nested functions – Placing comments – Control Flow: IF statement, SWITCH
statement, FOR statement, WHILE statement – Program Flow: Arithmetic errors – Indexing errors, Assignment
errors, Struct array errors.
Lab Component: Histogram – Interpolation – Break and Continue – Fibonacci series
UNIT V MATHEMATICAL MANIPULATIONS 6+3
Operations – Linear Algebraic Equations : Elementary Solution Methods, Statistics and probability, Special
Matrices– Row reduced echelon form – Inverse, Cofactor, minor
Lab Component: Differential equation solver – factorial finding – Eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
L : 30 ; P : 15 ; TOTAL:45 Periods
TEXTBOOK:
1. Linda Coulson, “MATLAB Programming”, Global Media, Delhi,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William J. Palm III,” Introduction to Matlab 7 for Engineers”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
116
rd
2. G. H. Golub and C. F. Van Loan,” Matrix Computations”, 3 Editon, Johns Hopkins University
Press,1996.
th
3. Stephen J. Chapman, “MATLAB Programming for Engineers”, 4 Edition ThomsonLearning,2007
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.mathworks.com/academia/student_center/tutorials/launchpad.html
2. http://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res–18–002–introduction–to–matlab–spring–2008/
L T P C
15ECA04 ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the working principles of various types of antenna.
 To study various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas.
 To know various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze the properties and parameters of antenna
 Analyze the operation of different antennas
 Design antenna array systems
PRE REQUISITES:
electromagnetic field theory, analog electronics, Maxwell's equations, electromagnetic wave propagation,
polarization
UNIT I 9
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS
Review of electromagnetic theory: Vector potential – Solution of wave equation – retarded vector and scalar
potential –Hertzian dipole. Antenna characteristics: Radiation pattern, Beam solid angle, Directivity, Gain, Input
impedance, Polarization, Beam width, Bandwidth, Reciprocity – Equivalence of Radiation patterns – Equivalence
of Impedances – Effective aperture – Effective length – Antenna temperature.
UNIT II 9
WIRE ANTENNAS
EM radiation and working of Short dipole – Radiation resistance and Directivity – Half wave Dipole – Monopole –
Small loop antennas.
UNIT III 9
ANTENNA ARRAYS
Linear Array and Pattern Multiplication – Two–element Array – Uniform Array – Polynomial representation –
Array with non–uniform Excitation – Binomial Array.
UNIT IV 9
APERTURE ANTENNAS
Magnetic Current and its fields – Uniqueness theorem – Field equivalence principle – Duality principle –
Method of Images – Pattern properties – Slot antenna, Horn Antenna – Pyramidal Horn Antenna – Reflector
Antenna –Flat reflector – Corner Reflector
UNIT V 9
SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS
Long wire – V and Rhombic Antenna –Yagi–Uda Antenna – Turnstile Antenna – Helical Antenna – Axial mode
helix, Normal mode helix –Biconical Antenna – Log periodic Dipole Array – Spiral Antenna –Microstrip Patch
117
Antennas.
Antenna Measurements: Radiation Pattern measurement – Gain and Directivity Measurements – Impedance
measurement and Anechoic Chamber measurement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. John D.Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for all Applications”, 3 Edition, Tata
McGraw–Hill Book Company, 2012.
nd
2. Constantine A. Balanis,”Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 2 Edition, John Wiley, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, “Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems”, Pearson Education / PHI,
2006
2. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, “Antennas and Wave propagation”, Oxford University Press, 2007.
3. G.S.N.Raju, “Antenna Wave Propagation”, Pearson Education, 2004.
4. R.E.Collins, “Antenna and Radiowave propagation”,McGraw–Hill, 1985
5. W.L Stutzman and G.A. Thiele, “Antenna analysis and design”, John Wiley, 2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Ani_Kate–508171–wave–propagation/
2. http://classes.soe.ucsc.edu/cmpe123a/Fall07/doc/AntBrief123A12–6–07.ppt
3. http://muse.widener.edu/~rpj0001/courses/ENGR647/ClassNotes/LECT04.ppt
4. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/aSGuest125391–1319926–unit–antenna–engineering/
15ECA05 TELEVISION ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the construction details of TV Receiver Picture Tubes, Television Camera tubes and
Composite Video Signal details
 To understand principles of operation of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems.
 To study PAL Color Television system operation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyse the transmission of video signals and importance of television standards
 Analyse the functioning of circuits related to broadcasting applications.
 Apply the knowledge gained in digital video and television transmission.

PRE REQUISITES:
Electromagnetic spectrum, electromagnetic wave propagation, basic modulation theory, transducers, electronic
circuits, signals representation.
118
UNIT I TELEVISION SIGNALS 9 COMPOS
Audio and video transmission – scanning principle – TV broadcasting, system – Aspect ratio – Resolution –
Video bandwidth. Video signals – composite video signal – blanking signal – horizontal, vertical blanking and
sync pulses.
UNIT II TELEVISION CAMERAS AND SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 9
Image orthicon –Vidicon–plumbicon– characteristics of camera tubes –video processing of camera pickup signal
–Picture signal transmission – positive and negative modulation – VSB transmission – Sound signal transmission
– Standard channel bandwidth
UNIT III TV TRANSMITTER & RECEIVER 9
TV standards – TV transmitter – Block diagram of TV Reciever – Receiver controls – RF tuners – Video

channel and picture tube – AGC and synchronization circuits – Deflection circuit (Horizontal and vertical ) –
video detector – Sound section
UNIT IV COLOUR TV PRINCIPLES 9
Compatibility –colour fundamentals – chromaticity diagram –colour picture tubes (Delta – gun, P.I.L &trintron) –
purity and convergence. Colour Signal Transmission and Reception – modulation of colour difference signals –
formation of chrominance signal – NTSC, PAL and SECAM colour systems.
UNIT V DIGITAL TV SYSTEMS 9
Cable TV – Cable Signal Sources – Cable Signal Processing, Distribution & Scrambling – DVB – Video
Recording – Video Disc recording and playback – Digital television –Transmission and reception –Projection
television – Flat panel display TV receivers – Digital TV – LCD and Plasma screen receivers – LEDTV – 3DTV
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. R.R.Gulati, “Monochrome Television Practice, Principles, Technology and servicing” , 3 Edition, New Age
International (P) Publishers, 2006
2. R.R.Gulati,”Monochrome & Color Television,” New Age International Publisher, 2003.
3. Bernard Grob, Charles Herndon, “Basic television and video systems” , McGraw–Hill, 1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. A.M Dhake, “Television and Video Engineering”, 2 Edition, TMH, 2003.
th
2. R.P.Bali, “Color Television, Theory and Practice,” 4 Edition, Tata McGraw–Hill, New York, 1997.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://seminarprojects.net/q/principles–of–television–engineering–ppt\
2. www.focalpress.com/
3. www.hobbyprojects.com
119
15ECA06 REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To familiarize the principles of Remote Sensing

 To gain fundamental knowledge on the physics of remote sensing
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the Electromagnetic Radiation principles for Remote Sensing Applications
 Analyse various imaging systems
 Interpret Multispectral and Hyperspectral data for Land cover/ Land use studies
 Classify the data for application specific analysis
PRE REQUISITES:
fundamental principles of electromagnetic wave propagation and scattering, Optics, satellite communication
fundamentals, basics of communication engineering
UNIT I PHYSICS OF REMOTE SENSING 9
Electro Magnetic Spectrum – Physics of Remote Sensing – Effects of Atmosphere – Scattering – Different types
–Absorption – Atmospheric window – Energy interaction with surface features – Spectral reflectance of
vegetation, soil ,and water –atmospheric influence on spectral response patterns.
UNIT II REMOTE SENSING SYSTEMS 9
Satellites and orbits – Polar orbiting satellites – Spectral – radiometric and spatial resolutions – Temporal
resolution of satellites – Multispectral – thermal and hyperspectral Sensing. Remote Sensing platforms –
airborne and space borne sensors. Some remote sensing satellites, Radars and their features.
UNIT III IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR REMOTE SENSING 9
Geometric corrections – Co–registration of Data – Ground Control Points (GCP) – Atmospheric corrections –
Solar illumination corrections. Image Enhancement: Concept of color – Color composites – Contrast stretching –
linear and non–linear stretching – Filtering techniques – Edge enhancement – Density slicing –Thresholding –
Intensity–Hue–Saturation (IHS) images – Time composite images – Synergetic images.
UNIT IV INFORMATION EXTRACTION FROM REMOTE SENSED DATA 9
Multispectral classification – Ground truth collection – Supervised and unsupervised classification – Change
detection analysis – Principal component analysis – Ratio images – Vegetation indices. Introduction to Image
Processing Softwares: MATLAB – Introduction to Multispectral classification algorithms.
UNIT V REMOTE SENSING APPLICATIONS 9
Watershed management – Rainfall–runoff modeling – Irrigation management – Flood mapping – Drought
assessment –Environmental monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer R.W., “Remote Sensing and Image interpretation”, 6 Edition, John Wiley
&Sons, 2000.
nd
2. Jensen, J.R., “Remote sensing of the environment”, 2 Edition,Prentice Hall, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John A.Richards, “Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis”, Springer,1999.
nd
2. John R.Jensen, “Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective”, 2 Edition,
Prentice Hall, 1995.
120
3. Paul Curran P.J., “Principles of Remote Sensing”, ELBS, 1995.
4. Charles Elachi and Jakob J. van Zyl, “Introduction to the Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing”,
Wiley Series in Remote Sensing and Image Processing, 2006.
5. Sabins, F.F.Jr,” Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation”, W.H.Freeman& Co, 1978.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.itc.nl/~bakker/rs.html
2. rst.gsfc.nasa.gov
3. www.isprs.org
4. www.nrsa.gov.in
L T P C
15ECA07 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce embedded systems, its hardware and software.

 To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking.
 To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the knowledge applications
 Develop an embedded product.
 Validate the program for system development.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basics of Assembly Language, C, C++, Python, basic knowledge of electronics, digital electronics, knowledge of
microcontrollers, I/O, analog and digital interfacing, and peripherals.
UNIT I EMBEDDED COMPUTING 9
Embedded system examples – Parts of Embedded System – Processor – Power supply – clock – memory
interface – interrupt – I/O ports – Buffers, Programmable Devices – ASIC – interfacing with memory and I/O
devices – Memory Technologies – EPROM, Flash, OTP, SRAM,DRAM, SDRAM
UNIT II EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Embedded System product Development Life cycle (EDLC) – Hardware development cycles – Specifications –
Component selection – Schematic Design – PCB layout – fabrication and assembly. Product enclosure Design
and Development.
UNIT III EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 9
Reset Circuit – Brown–out Protection Circuit – Oscillator Unit – Real Time Clock – Watchdog Timer.
Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs– Assembly and Linking – Basic compilation
techniques– Program validation and testing.
UNIT IV OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Concept of firmware – Operating system basics – Real Time Operating systems – Tasks, Processes and
Threads – Multiprocessing and Multitasking – Task scheduling – Task communication and synchronization –
Device Drivers.
UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 9
Design Example: Alarm Clock – Elevator Controller – Ink jet printer– Hardware Design and Software Design –
Set–top Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
121
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Shibu K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems “,Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
2. Marylin wolf, “Computer as Components” Elsevier, 2013,
nd
3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, 2 Edition, TMH, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, John Wiley,2001
2. Lyla, “Embedded System”, Pearson, 2013.
3. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real – Time Systems”, McGraw – Hill International Editions, 1997
4. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Rajib Mall, ”Real–time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2007
rd
6. Philip.A.Laplante, “Real Time System Design and Analysis”, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102045/
2. http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-Engineering-Video-lectures-ltv118-Page1.htm
L T P C
15ECA08 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basic elements of light sources, Wavelength and frequencies of light
 To understand the different kind of fibers, losses, and fiber slicing and connectors
 To learn different types of photo detectors and its operation
 To learn the fiber optical receivers and its measurements
 To learn, Optical networks, operational principles of WDM
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze the different kinds of light sources and Detectors used in any applications
 Design any optical communication system
 Analyze the performance measure of the optical parameters

PRE REQUISITES:
Electromagnetic spectrum and its uses, Snells law, optical signal propagation methods and electromagnetic
theory
UNITI OPTICAL SOURCES 9

Light sources : Sunlight, Torch light, LED and Laser light – Optical frequencies and Wavelength – LED internal –
quantum efficiency –Relationship between speed of light, wavelength and frequency – light as an
Electromagnetic waves – comparison of LED and Laser diode
UNITII OPTICAL FIBER 9
Refractive Index –Ray theory of transmission – Total internal reflection – Acceptance angle – Numerical aperture
– Attenuation Fiber Bend losses and Dispersion – Structure of an optical fiber – Optical domain signal –
electrical domain signal Optical pulses for the digital data – Optical fiber connectors – Fiber alignment and Joint
Losses – Fiber Splices – Fiber connectors – Fiber couplers
UNIT III OPTICAL DETECTORS 9
Optical Detectors: PIN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes – construction, characteristics and properties –
Comparison of performance, Photo detector noise –Noise sources – Signal to Noise ratio – Detector response
time.
122
UNITIV FIBER OPTIC RECEIVER AND MEASUREMENTS 9
Fundamental receiver operation – Pre amplifiers – Error sources – Receiver Configuration – Probability of Error –
Quantum limit.
Fiber Attenuation measurements– Dispersion measurements –Optical Spectrum Analyzer–OTDR
UNITV OPTICAL NETWORKS 9
Basic Networks – Broadcast and select Networks – WDM Networks –Bus topology – Star topology –
Wavelength Routed Networks – Routing and wavelength Assignment – Different types of wavelength
Assignment
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication" 5 Edition, McGraw Hill International, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J.Gower, “Optical Communication System”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
nd
2. Rajiv Ramaswami, “Optical Network”, 2 Edition, Elsevier, 2004.
rd
3. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber–optic communication systems”, 3 edition, John Wiley & sons, 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/117101002/downloads/Lec19.pdf
2. www.ece466.groups.et.byu.net/notes/notes_source.ppt
15ECA09 MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamentals concepts of mobile communication systems.
 To provide the student with an understanding of advanced multiple access techniques.
 To give the student an understanding digital cellular systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to
 Analyze the cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse, handoff and how interference between
mobiles and base stations affects the capacity of cellular systems.
 Apply the concepts on basic diversity, equalization and spread spectrum techniques in mobile
communication.
 Analyze the current and future cellular mobile communication systems (GSM, IS95, WCDMA, etc.)
PRE REQUISITES:
Radio frequency propagation fundamentals,basics ofdigital communications, basic telephony
UNIT I CELLULAR MOBILE SYSTEMS 9
Historic perspective and overview of Mobile Communication Systems – A basic cellular system – operation of
cellular systems – overview of generations of cellular systems – concept of frequency reuse – co–channel
interference reduction factor – desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna system – co–
channel interference and Non–co–channel interference – design of antenna system – antenna parameter and
their effects – diversity receiver –Traffic theory – Erlang B system
123
UNIT II CELL COVERAGE, CELL SITE, FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT AND 9
HANDOFF
Cell coverage for signal and traffic – cell site and mobile antennas – frequency management and channel
assignment – Handoff – dropped calls and cell splitting
UNIT III MODULATION METHODS AND CODING FOR ERROR DETECTION AND 9
CORRECTION
Digital modulation methods in cellular wireless systems – OFDM – Block Coding – convolution coding and Turbo
coding.
UNIT IV SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES 9
Spread Spectrum Techniques – DSSS – FHSS – Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) – Time–division
multiple access (TDMA) – code division multiple access (CDMA) – CDMA capacity – probability of bit error
considerations – CDMA vs TDMA.
UNIT V SECOND And THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS SYSTEMS 9
GSM, IS–136 (D–AMPS), IS–95 – Third generation wireless systems – GPRS – EDGE – WCDMA – LTE.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. William, C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, 2 Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Jerry D. Gibson, “Mobile Communication Hand Book”, 3 Edition, IEEE Press,2012.
nd
2. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles and Practice”, 2 Edition, Pearson
Education, 2010.
3. Lawrence Harte, “3G Wireless Demystified”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2001.
4. KavehPahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy”, Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall PTR,
2002
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://webmail.aast.edu/~khedr/Courses/Graduate/Wireless%20Communications_F08/Lecture%20four%
20channel%20II.pdf.
2. http://staff.neu.edu.tr/~fahri/wireless_chp6.pdf.
15ECA10 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the characteristics of CMOS systems
 To discuss the delay models and interconnects in CMOS circuits
124
 To study the HDL fundamentals
Course Outcomes:
 Analyze the operation of various CMOS circuits
 Apply the techniques for circuit characterization
 Synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL

PRE REQUISITES:
Basic electronic devices and circuits, CMOS circuits, integrated circuits
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
PN junction diode – forward and reverse bias characteristics – Bipolar Junction Transistors – Input and Output
characteristics of CE, CB& CC Configuration.
UNIT II FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR 9
JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics – Pinch off voltage and its significance – MOSFETCharacteristics –
DMOSFET – E MOSFET.
UNIT III IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification – fundamental of monolithic IC technology – epitaxial growth, masking and etching – diffusion of
impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging – Fabrication of diodes – capacitance, resistance and
FETs.
UNIT IV MOS DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS 9
Ideal I–V and C–V characteristics – non ideal I–V effects – DC transfer characteristics – Scaling of Devices.
UNIT V HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE 9
Verilog HDL fundamentals – Types of Modeling – HDL for Logic Gates – Half Adder – Full Adder – Half / Full
Subtractor – Comparators.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, 3 Edition, Tata McGrawHill Inc. 2007
nd
2. D.RoyChoudhary, SheilB.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 2 Edition, New Age, 2003.
rd
3. N.H.E.Westeetal, “CMOS VLSI Design”,3 Edition, Pearson, 2005
4. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA– based System Design”, Pearson, 2004

2. Mark Gordon Arnold, “Verilog Digital – Computer Design”, Prentice Hall (PTR), 1999.
3. MichealD.Ciletti, “Modeling, Synthesis and Rapid Prototyping with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.eolss.net/sample-chapters/c05/e6-195-04.pdf
2. http://web.ewu.edu/groups/technology/Claudio/ee430/Lectures/L1-print.pdf
3. http://www.circuitstoday.com/integrated-circuits
4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_digital_system.htm
125
Offered by CSE Department
15CSA01 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To identify the basics of Internet and its protocol
 To learn HTML5 controls for the creation of static web pages
 To present HTML documents using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).
 To learn to create user interactive web pages using JavaScript and DOM
 To handle the clients’ requests at the server end using PHP
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Exploit the basics of Internet and realize the significance of HTTP protocol in the WWW.
 Develop website using HTML5
 Design interesting and appealing HTML pages using CSS
 Validate the users’ data using JavaScript
 Access and process various elements of web pages using DOM
 Generate dynamic response to client request using PHP
PREREQUISITES:
Programming Principles
UNIT I BASICS OF NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS 9
Types of Network – Reason for Networks – Communication between Computers – Serial and Parallel
Communication – Asynchronous and Synchronous Communication – Simplex, Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
Communications – Data Rate, Bandwidth and Throughput – Switched Connections – Topologies used in
Networking – Basic Internet Protocols – The World Wide Web – HTTP Request Message – HTTP Response
Message – Web Clients – Web Servers
UNIT II HTML5 9
Introduction to HTML5 – Editing HTML5 – W3C HTML validation service – Headings – Linking - Images – Special
characters and horizontal rules – Lists – Tables – Forms – Internal linking - Meta elements – New HTML5 Form
input types – Input and datalist elements and auto complete attribute – Page structure elements – Introduction to
Canvas – Canvas Coordinate System – Rectangles – Drawing arcs and circles – Shadows
UNIT III CSS3, JAVASCRIPT 9
Types of CSS – Conflicting style sheets – Positioning Elements – Element Dimension – Box model and Text Flow
– Media types – Media Queries – Drop-Down Menus – Text shadows – Rounded corners – Color – Box
Shadows. Introduction to JavaScript – Syntax - Variables and Data types – JavaScript Control Statements –
Operators – Literals - Functions – Objects – Arrays – Built-in objects
UNIT IV DOCUMENT OBJECT MODEL 9
Introduction to the Document Object Model – Intrinsic Event Handling – Modifying Element Style – The Document
Tree – Properties of window – DOM Collections – Using Timer and Dynamic Styles to create animated effects –
JavaScript Event Handling – Reviewing the load, mousemove, mouseover, mouseout events – Form processing
with focus, blur, submit, reset – Event Bubbling – More Events
UNIT V PHP 9
Introduction – Converting Between Data Types – Arithmetic Operators – Initializing and Manipulating Arrays –
String Comparisons – String processing with regular expressions – Form Processing and Business Logic –
Reading from a database – Using Cookie – Dynamic Content
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
126
TEXTBOOKS:
1. P.J. Deitel, H.M. Deitel, “Internet and World Wide Web – How to program”, Pearson Education
Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2009.
2. Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies - A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John Cowley, "Communications and Networking An Introduction", Springer, Second Edition, 2013
2. Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.
3. Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., “Html5 Black Book: Covers CSS3, JavaScript, XKL, XHTML, AJAX,
PHP and jQuery”, Dreamtech Press, 2011.
4. Bates, “Developing Web Applications”, Wiley, 2006.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://www.echoecho.com/javascript.htm
3. http://www.w3schools.com/php/
4. http://www.theshulers.com/whitepapers/internet_whitepaper/index.html
5. http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip2/#UDP
15CSA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To explore the fundamental concepts of software engineering
 To learn the requirements engineering process and planning for software development
 To understand the software design principles
 To know coding standards and different testing strategies
 To learn the project management principles and quality assurance standards
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply software engineering principles for software development.
 Formulate software requirement specification and plan for software development
 Design software according to the specification
 Code the software using guidelines / standards and conduct testing
 Manage and maintain the software process by assuring the quality
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques is preferred
UNIT I SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 8
The Nature of Software - Software Engineering - Software Myths – Process Models: Prescriptive Process
Models, Specialized Process Models, Personal and Team Process Models – Overview of Agile Process -
Overview of CMMi
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ENGINEERING AND PLANNING 10
Requirements Engineering: Establishing the Groundwork - Eliciting Requirements - Negotiating Requirements -
Validating Requirements - Requirements Analysis using scenario based modeling. Process and Project Metrics:
Software Measurement - Metrics for Software Quality. Estimation: The Project Planning Process – Resources -
Software Project Estimation - Decomposition Techniques - Empirical Estimation Models - Project Scheduling
127
UNIT III MODELLING AND DESIGN 9
Modelling: Data Modeling Concepts - Class-Based Modeling - Flow-Oriented Modeling - Creating a Behavioral
Model Design Concepts - Architectural Design: Software Architecture, Architectural Styles, Architectural Design,
Architectural Mapping Using Data Flow - User Interface Design: The Golden Rules, User Interface Analysis and
Design, Interface Analysis
UNIT IV CODING AND SOFTWARE TESTING 9
Coding standards and guidelines - Testing: Strategic approach to Software Testing - Test Strategies for
Conventional Software - Validation Testing - System Testing – Debugging – White-box Testing - Basis Path
Testing - Control Structure Testing - Black-box Testing
UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SOFTWARE QUALITY 9
Project Management Concepts: The Management Spectrum, People, Product and Process – Software
Configuration Management – Risk Management - Quality Management: Software Quality, Achieving Software
Quality - Elements of Software Quality Assurance - The ISO 9000 Quality Standard
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Roger S. Pressman and Bruce R. Maxim, “Software Engineering – A practitioner’s approach”, McGraw Hill
Publications, Eighth Edition, 2014
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pankaj Jalote, ”An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering”, Springer, Third Edition, 2005
2. Ian Sommerville, “Software engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, Seventh Edition, 2007.
3. Watts S.Humphrey, ”A Discipline for Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2007.
4. James F.Peters and Witold Pedrycz, ”Software Engineering, Engineering Approach”, Wiley-India, 2007.
5. Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
6. S.A.Kelkar, ”Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt, 2007
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.mhhe.com/pressman
2. www.rspa.com/spi/
3. http://www.comp.lancs.ac.uk/computing/resources/IanS/
4. http://www.ee.umanitoba.ca/~cilab/main.html
5. http://www.wiley.com/college/comp/peters189642
15CSA03 INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To correlate the role of database management systems in information technology applications
 To structure data using relational model
 To explore the features of structured query language
 To reduce the anomalies using Normalization
 To manage transaction and concurrency control techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Draw the ER Diagram for enterprise applications
 Design databases using relational model
 Query the database using SQL
128
 Apply normalization techniques on the databases
 Perform transaction and concurrency control techniques.
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Data Files is preferred
UNIT I DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data - Database System Architecture – Database Users and
Administrators – Data Models – Structure of Network Model – Structure of Hierarchical Model – Entity
Relationship Model – Constraints – Removing Redundant Attributes in Entity Sets – E-R Diagrams - Design
Issues – Extended E-R Features – Introduction of Relational Model – E-R Reduction to Relational Schemas
UNIT II RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL 9
Structure of Relational Databases – Database Schema – Schema Diagrams – Relational Query Languages -
Relational Algebra – Tuple Relational Calculus -– Domain Relational Calculus
UNIT III STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE 9
Overview of SQL query language – SQL Data definition – Basic Structure of SQL Queries – Additional Basic
Operations – Set Operations – Null values – Aggregate Operations – Nested Subqueries – Joins – Views –
Integrity Constraints – Authorization. Introduction to Advanced SQL: Functions and Procedures – Triggers
UNIT IV NORMALIZATION 9
Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – Dependency Preservation - First, Second, Third Normal
Forms – Boyce Codd Normal Form
UNIT V TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9
Transaction Model – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability - Conflict serializability – View
Serializability – Testing Serializability. Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks – Multiple
Granularity – Time Stamp Based Protocols – Validation Based Protocols
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw Hill, Sixth
Edition, 2011.
2. C.J. Date, A. Kannan and S. Swamynathan, ”An Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson
Education, Eighth Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education/Addison Wesley,
Sixth Edition, 2010.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.
3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGraw Hill, Third Edition
2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html
3. http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf
4. http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp
5. http://sqlzoo.net/
6. http://www.service-architecture.com/database/articles/ acid_properties.html
129
15CSA04 INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of problem solving techniques and analysis of algorithms
 To learn the various searching and sorting techniques
 To impart knowledge on ADTs such as List, Stack, Queue
 To explore the binary trees and priority queues
 To get exposure on hashing techniques and graphs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze recursive and non recursive algorithms for complexity
 Apply various searching / sorting algorithms for solving real-world problems
 Implement List, Stack and Queue with appropriate data structures
 Work with binary trees and heap based priority queue
 Exploit the hashing technique and graph algorithms
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Memory Organization, Fundamentals of C Programming
UNIT I ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction to Algorithms and algorithmic problem solving – Problem types. Analysis of Algorithms: Analysis
Framework - Asymptotic Notations – Best case, worst case and average cases - Mathematical analysis of
non-recursive algorithms - Recurrence equations – Solving recurrence equations - Mathematical analysis of
recursive algorithms.
UNIT II SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9
Search Algorithms: Linear search - binary search - Analysis of Search algorithms. Sorting Algorithms: Bubble
sort - Exchange sort - Insertion sort – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap sort - Analysis of Sorting Algorithms.
UNIT III LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES 9
Abstract Data Types – The List ADT – Singly Linked List – Doubly Linked List – Circular Linked List –
Applications and analysis of List. The Stack ADT – Applications and Analysis of Stack. The Queue ADT –
Applications and Analysis of Queues.
UNIT IV TREES AND HEAPS 9
Preliminaries – Binary Trees – Expression Trees- Traversals. The Search Tree ADT – Binary Search Trees –
Applications of BST. Priority Queues – Binary heap – Heap operations - Applications of heaps.
UNIT V HASHING AND GRAPHS 9
Hashing – Closed hashing: Separate Chaining – Open Addressing - Linear probing. Graph ADT – Representation
of graph – Graph Traversals: DFS and BFS. Applications of Graph - Finding Shortest Path - Connected
components.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education Asia, 2003.
2. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education Asia, Second
Edition, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2006
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Orient
Longman, Second Edition, 2008.
3. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Second Edition, 1991.
130
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106101059/
2. http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/algorithm.html
3. http://www.mif.vu.lt/~algis/dsax/DsSort.pdf
4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf
5. www.cs.cornell.edu/courses/cs312/2005sp/lectures/rec19.html
15CSA05 FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire basic knowledge of operating system structures and its functioning
 To study the concept of process management
 To learn the basics of memory management
 To understand the structure of file systems
 To familiarize with different operating systems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the components of operating system and their functionalities
 Analyze the various process management algorithms
 Evaluate the performance of various memory management techniques
 Design a simple file system and analyze the performance
 Work with some popular operating systems like Linux, Windows
PREREQUISITES:
Working Principles of Computers
UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9
Introduction to operating systems – Computer system organization - architecture – Operating system structure -
operations – Process, memory, storage management – Open source operating systems – OS services – User
interface – System calls – System programs – Process concept - scheduling – Operations on processes –
Cooperating processes – Inter-process communication – Threads
UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9
Basic concepts – Scheduling algorithms – Algorithm evaluation – The critical section problem – Synchronization
hardware – Semaphores – Classic problems of synchronization – Deadlocks – Deadlock characterization –
Methods for handling deadlocks – Deadlock prevention – Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery
from deadlock.
UNIT III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9
Memory management – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation – Paging – Segmentation - Virtual memory:
Background – Demand paging – Copy on write – Page replacement – Allocation of frames – Thrashing
UNIT IV FILE MANAGEMENT 9
File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File-system mounting – Protection – Directory
implementation – Allocation methods – Free space management – Disk scheduling – Disk management
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
The Linux system – History – Process management – Scheduling – Memory management – File systems – Inter
Process Communication
Windows OS - History – Design principles
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
131
TEXTBOOK:
Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts Essentials”, John
Wiley & Sons Inc., 8th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.
2. Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education,
1996.
3. D M Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
Second Edition, 2007.
4. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition,
2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/classes/fa06/cse120/lectures/120-fa06-l13.pdf
3. http://www.cs.kent.edu/~farrell/osf03/oldnotes/
15CSA06 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basics and challenges of Cloud Computing
 To introduce the virtualization concepts and cloud file system
 To get an exposure on third-party cloud solutions
 To understand the cloud security and efficiency issues
 To explore the possibilities of applying cloud solutions in various applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the challenges in Cloud Computing adoption
 Implement virtualization and work with cloud file system
 Identify the various cloud-based solutions available with different providers
 Secure and optimize the cloud for delivering better performance
 Identify and provide cloud-based solution for the problem under consideration
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Computers, Networking is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING 9
Overview of Distributed computing - Introduction to Cloud Computing: Definitions - Central idea - Properties and
Characteristics - Benefits - Cloud service and deployment model - Organizational scenario - Architecture -
Vocabulary - Challenges - Supporting services - Management and administration of Cloud services
UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION AND FILE SYSTEM 9
Virtualization Techniques: Virtualization Technology - Overview of x86 virtualization - Types of virtualization -
Virtualization products - VLAN - SAN - VM Migration - VM Consolidation and Management - Cloud interoperability
standards
Cloud File System: Distributed file system - GFS - HDFS
UNIT III CLOUD SOLUTIONS 9
Different Cloud Providers and service comparison: Infrastructure service providers - Comparison between
infrastructure service providers - Identification of business requirement - Cloud infrastructure setup procedure -
Platform service providers - Comparison between platform service providers - Identification of business
requirement - Cloud platform setup procedure - Cloud application development - Software service providers -
132
Comparison between software service providers
Cloud Database - Cloud programming model - Private cloud computing platforms
UNIT IV CLOUD SECURITY - MIDDLEWARE AND TESTING 9
Cloud Security: Fundamentals - Cloud Risk - Division - Security Architecture - VM Security Challenges -
Vulnerability assessment tool for cloud - Open source security solution products
Cloud Middleware: Need for Cloud Middleware - QoS issues in cloud - Data migration and Streaming -
Performance monitoring tools in cloud - Best practices
Cloud Testing: Types - Testing strategy
UNIT V CLOUD APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Advanced Cloud Applications - Sharing and Collaborative services in cloud - Outside the cloud services - Cloud
Analytics - Software plus services - Cloud Content Delivery Network services (CDN) - Mobile cloud computing -
Sky computing - Cloud governance
Case Study: Cloud infrastructure adoption case study - Cloud platform adoption case study - Cloud software
services adoption case study - Cloud simulation tools - Future of cloud computing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rishabh Sharma, ”Cloud Computing Fundamentals, Industry Approach and Trends”, Wiley India, 2015.
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing from Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vines, “Cloud Security – A comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud
Computing”, Wiley – India, 2010.
2. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and
Security”, CRC Press, 2010.
3. George Reese, “Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the Cloud”
O'Reilly
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://whatiscloud.com/basic_concepts_and_terminology/cloud
2. http://www.vmware.com/in/virtualization/overview
3. http://www.csoonline.com/article/2125258/cloud-security/cloud-security--the-basics.html
4. http://thecloudtutorial.com/cloudvendors.html
5. http://thecloudtutorial.com/freecloudcomputingapplications.html
15CSA07 PRINCIPLES OF MULTIMEDIA L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the basic concepts related to Multimedia
 To explain the basic multimedia building blocks and application development tools.
 To demonstrate online multimedia application creation tools
 To understand computer animation basics and needs
 To demonstrate various computer animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the architectural components for multimedia applications.
 Work with various elements of multimedia.
 Develop audio, video, and images using multimedia tools.
133
 Identify issues and solutions in implementing security for multimedia applications.
 Model and render the 3D objects using animation tools.
 Develop interactive animations using multimedia tools
PREREQUISITES:
Fundamental Knowledge of Graphics, Data is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA 9
Multimedia overview: Components , Hypermedia ,File formats – Color models – Digital Audio representation –
Digital music making – MIDI - Digital Video: Video compression techniques – Multimedia for portable devices
UNIT II MULTIMEDIA BUILDING BLOCKS 9
Multimedia building blocks: Text, Graphics, Video Capturing, Sound capturing and editing - Introduction to 2D &
3D graphics – Surface characteristics and texture – Lights – Animation: key frames & tweening – Techniques –
Principles of animation – 3D animation – File formats
UNIT III MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS 9
Databases: Properties of MMDBMS, Multimedia queries, Management of continuous data, document modeling,
Media Servers- Security: Digital Signatures, steganographic methods: single images, motion pictures, audio data,
3D scenes, copyright protection.
UNIT IV COMPUTER ANIMATION BASICS 9
History of Computer Animation - Modeling digital objects : Modeling Concepts - Modeling Techniques –
Rendering Concepts : Lights, Camera and Materials - color- Rendering Process - Hidden surface removal - Z-
Buffer - Ray tracing
UNIT V COMPUTER ANIMATION TECHNIQUES 9
Principles of animation - Computer Animation techniques: keyframe Techniques, camera animation, light
animation, animation file formats - Advanced Computer Animation techniques: Motion Capture, Facial animation,
crowd animation - Visual effects techniques: Crowd replications, 3-d morphing, motion control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John F. Koegel Bufend, “Multimedia systems”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002
2. Parekh R, “Principles of Multimedia”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.
3. Isaac V.Kerlow, “The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects”, Wiley Publications, 4th Edition,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mohammed Dastbaz, “Designing Interactive Multimedia”, McGraw Hill Publication, 2002.
2. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Applications”, Springer, 2007
15CSA08 INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithms
 To solve optimization problems using advanced GA operators
 To understand the multi objective optimization concepts
 To learn the significance of evolutionary algorithms
 To study the applications of genetic algorithms
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explore the basics of genetic algorithms
 Solve real world problems using advanced operators of GA
 Work with multi objective optimization problems
134
 Identify the different evolutionary algorithms for solving problems
 Apply genetic algorithms to solve real-world domain problems
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques towards Optimization is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction - Comparison of Biological and GA terminology – Mutation – Selection – Elitism – Crossover -
Initialization
UNIT II ADVANCED OPERATORS OF GA 9
Combinatorial optimization – Constraints - Multicriteria optimization - Hybrid algorithm - Alternative selection and
crossover methods - Meta Gas – Mutation - Parallel GA
UNIT III MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9
Multi objective optimization problem - Principles of Multi objective optimization problem - Difference with single
objective optimization - Dominance and Pareto optimality - Optimality conditions
UNIT IV EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9
Difficulties with classical optimization algorithms - Genetic algorithms - Evolution strategies - Evolution
programming - Genetic programming – Multi-model function optimization
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Image registration - Recursive prediction of night light levels - Estimation of the optical parameter of liquid
crystals - Design of energy - efficient buildings - Multi objective network rehabilitation of Messy GA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.David A Coley, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms for Scientists and Engineers”, World Scientific
Publishing Company,1997.
2. Kalyamoy Deb,” Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms”, John Wiley & Sons, First
Edition, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Melaine Mitchell “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, First MIT Press paperback edition, 1998.
2. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, Springer, 2008.
3. David E. Goldberg “Genetic Algorithms”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2009.
4. Koza, John, Wolfgang Banzhaf, Kumar Chellapilla, Kalyanmoy Deb, Marco Dorigo, David Fogel, Max
Garzon, David Goldberg, Hitoshi Iba, and Rick Riolo(Eds.), "Genetic Programming", Academic Press.
Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1998.
5. John R.Koza, Forrest H Bennett III , David Andre, Martin A Keane, "Genetic Programming III: Darwinian
Invention and Problem Solving" Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol1/hmw/article1.html
2. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/
3. http://intelligence.worldofcomputing.net/machine-learning/genetic-algorithms.html#.VtVvblLlwgQ
4. http://epubs.siam.org/doi/abs/10.1137/0202009
5. http://study.com/academy/lesson/genetic-algorithms-examples-lesson.html
6. http:// www.csbdu.in/pdf/Practical_Genetic_Algorithms.pdf
7. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/ga-basic-description.php
8. https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt
135
15CSA09 XML PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basics of markup languages and CSS
 To acquire knowledge on XML and its DTD structure.
 To understand XML schema creation.
 To familiarize with DOM-based and SAX-based parsers.
 To study XSLT documents and different custom markup languages.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Construct / design web pages using HTML and CSS
 Experiment XML document validation using DTD
 Validate XML documents using schemas
 Conduct experiments on XML documents using DOM / SAX parsers
 Transform XML documents to HTML using XSLT and review other custom markup languages
PREREQUISITES:
Basic Principles of Programming is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKUPS AND CSS 9
History of WWW – History of SGML – History of XML – Review of HTML tags: Lists – tables – links – images -
frames. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS): Inline styles – creating CSS with style, element – external CSS.
UNIT II XML MARKUP CREATION AND DTD 9
XML Markup introduction – Parsers, well-formed and valid XML documents – Parsing XML document with msxml
– characters – markup – XML namespaces - Document Type Declaration - Element Type Declarations - Attribute
Declarations – Simple DTD creation.
UNIT III XML SCHEMAS 9
Schema versus DTDs - Microsoft XML Schema: Describing elements - Describing attributes – Data types –
Simple XML schema creation.
UNIT IV DOM AND SAX PARSERS 9
DOM with JavaScript – DOM components – Traversing the DOM – SAX-based parsers – Events – Simple SAX
program – DOM versus SAX
UNIT V EXTENSIBLE STYLESHEET LANGUAGE TRANSFORMATION (XSLT) 9
Templates – Creating elements and attributes – Iteration and sorting – Conditional processing – Combining
stylesheets – Variables.
Introduction to Custom Markup Languages: Mathematical Markup Language (MathML) - Chemical Markup
Language (CML) - Wireless Markup Language (WML) - NewsML.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, T.R. Nieto, T.M. Lin, and P. Sadhu, “XML How to program”, Pearson Education
India, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Heather Williamson, “XML: The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.
2. Cliff Binstock, “The XML Schema Complete Reference”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2003.
3. Steven Holzner, “Inside XML”, New Riders, 2001.
4. Erik T. Ray, “Learning XML”, Second Edition, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2003.
5. Elliotte Rusty Harold, W. Scott Means, “XML in a Nutshell”, O'Reilly Media Inc., 2004.
136
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/xml/
3. http://www.xmlmaster.org/en/article/d01/
4. http://www.javatpoint.com/xml-tutorial
15CSA10 INTRODUCTION TO UML L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce object oriented modelling concepts and the role of UML
 To learn to model the requirements and work flows
 To explore the ways to model logical structure
 To know how to how to represent dynamic behavior in UML
 To understand the representation of behavior modelling in UML
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Model a scenario using Object Oriented Modelling
 Identify use cases and draw Use case and activity diagrams
 Represent logical design using class and object diagrams
 Represent dynamic behavior using sequence and collaboration diagrams
 Model the behaviors using state transition diagram
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Modelling, Object Oriented Principles is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND OBJECT ORIENTED MODELLING 9

Introduction to UML - UML and Process - Perspectives of UML - Object Oriented Paradigm-Models - Object
Modelling - Models and Diagrams - Views of a Model
UNIT II MODELLING REQUIREMENT AND WORKFLOW 9
Modelling Requirements as Use cases - Use Case Diagrams – Relationships - Levels of Use Cases - Use cases
and features. Activity Diagrams: Basics – Activities and Action - Decisions and merges - Swim lanes -
Concurrency
UNIT III MODELLING LOGICAL STRUCTURE 9
Classes – Objects – Class relationship - Class Diagram – Multiplicity - Types – Implementation classes –
Interfaces – packages and subsystems – Object diagrams.
UNIT IV MODELLING ORDERED INTERACTION 9
Sequence Diagrams – Participants - Time-event, signals and messages - Use case and sequence diagram -
Collaboration Diagram
UNIT V BEHAVIOUR MODELLING 9
State Diagrams: States, Transitions, Advanced state diagrams. Component and Deployment Diagrams -
Extension using stereo types and properties
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Kim Hamilton and Russell Miles, “Learning UML 2.0”, O'Reilly, 2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sinan Si Alhir, “Learning UML”, O'Reilly, 2003.
137
2. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled”, Addison Wesley, Third Edition, 2004.
3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”,
Addison-Wesley, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.uml.org/
2. http://www.omg.org/ocup-2/coveragemap-found.htm#FoundationRefs
3. https://www.gliffy.com/uses/uml-software/
4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/
15CSA11 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ORGANIZATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To have a knowledge on basic digital principles.
 To understand the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.
 To explore the basic processing unit
 To study the hierarchical memory system.
 To learn the pipelining architecture concepts.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply digital principle concepts to design logical circuits
 Design the arithmetic circuits for faster operations
 Analyze the main processing units of a computer.
 Analyze memory hierarchy and its impact on computer cost/performance.
 Design a pipeline for consistent execution of instructions with minimum hazards
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge in Working Principles of Computers is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PRINCIPLES 9
Boolean functions – Simplifications of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map- Implementation of Boolean
functions using logic gates - Decoders and encoders - Multiplexers and demultiplexers
UNIT II BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS 9
Functional units – Basic operational concepts – Performance – Instructions and instruction sequencing –
Addressing modes – RISC and CISC Styles – Arithmetic: Design of fast adders – Multiplication of unsigned and
signed numbers – Fast Multiplication – Floating point numbers and operations.
UNIT III BASIC PROCESSING UNIT 9
Fundamental concepts – Instruction Execution – Hardware Components - Instruction Fetch and Execution Steps
– Control Signals – Hardwired control
UNIT IV MEMORY SYSTEM 9
Basic concepts – Memory hierarchy - Semiconductor RAM – Read-only Memories – Direct Memory Access –
Cache memories – Performance considerations – Virtual memory
UNIT V PIPELINING 9
Basic concepts – Pipeline organization and issues – Data dependencies – Memory and branch delays –
Performance evaluation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Sixth Edition, 2011.
138
2. M.Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software interface”, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2005.
2. “Computer Organization”, ISRD Group, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, Pearson
Education, Sixth Edition, 2003.
4. Charles H.Roth, Jr. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, Cengage Earning, 4th
Edition, 2005.
5. Donald D.Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ics.p.lodz.pl/~dpuchala/CompArch/Lecture_6.pdf
2. http://www.dauniv.ac.in/downloads/CArch_PPTs/
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4. http://cse.iitk.ac.in/users/karkare/courses/2011/cs220/html/notes.html
Offered by Mechanical Department
15MEA01 AUTOMOTIVE MAINTENANCE AND POLLUTION CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The concepts of automobile maintenance

 The methods of pollution control in automobiles
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basic concept of engine maintenance

 Acquire knowledge about the Chassis Drive-line Maintenance
 Understand the Maintenance and servicing of auxiliaries
 Understand concept of Air Pollution due to Automobile Exhaust and its control methods
 Understand about Exhaust Emission Control
 Thermal Engineering
 Automobile Engineering
UNIT I ENGINE MAINTENANCE 9
Engine troubles, effects & remedies, different major & minor services for engine, inspection and checking of
components visually and dimensionally, reconditioning methods of engine components, engine tune-up, special
tools & advanced equipment.
UNIT II CHASSIS DRIVE-LINE MAINTENANCE 9
Maintenance, repair and servicing of clutches, Fluid flywheel, gear boxes, Automatic transmission, Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) unit, propeller shaft, differential unit, front axle and rear axle, suspension systems,
servicing of brake systems- hydraulic, air systems, brake bleeding and brakes adjustments, maintenance and
servicing of steering system-Manual & Power Steering system, wheel balancing, wheel alignment, maintenance
of tyres, tyre rotation, frame defects, chassis frame alignment.
139
UNIT III MAINTENANCE, SERVICING OF AUXILIARIES 9
Cooling system service, anti-corrosion additives, anti-freezing solutions, dry & wet liners, petrol fuel and diesel
fuel system maintenance, Multi-Point Fuel Injection (MPFI) maintenance, lubrication system services, chassis
lubrication, lubrication chart, maintenance and care of storage batteries, battery testing methods, maintenance of
ignition systems, tyre service & reconditioning.
UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION DUE TO AUTOMOBILE EXHAUST 9
Sources of Emission, Exhaust gas constituents & analysis, Ingredients responsible for air pollution, Smoke,
odour, Smog formation, Sources of pollution, effects, Analysis of air pollutants, Air pollution control models and
equipment.
UNIT V EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL 9
Basic methods of emission control, catalytic converter, After burners, reactor manifold, air injection, crank case
emission control, evaporative loss control, Exhaust gas recirculation, Fuel additives. Pollution Norms: European
pollution norms, Indian pollution norms as per Central Motor Vehicle Rules (C.M.V.R.), Measurement Devices for
HC, CO,NOX,Smoke.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John B. Heyhood, “Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill, 1989.

2. Stone.R, “Introduction to Internal Combustion Engines”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Society of Automotive Engineers, U.S., 13th revised
Edition, 2002.
2. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, East-West Press, 2nd Edition, 2004.
3. Martin W. Stockel and Martin T Stockel, “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” Goodheart-Willcox Co;
Instructor's Manual Edition 2005.
4. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publications USA, 2003.
15MEA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the interaction between different parts of the energy system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basics of energy systems.

 Apply the fundamentals of energy conversion for practical applications.
 Realize the importance of non-conventional energy systems.
 Understand the concepts of Biomass energy.
 Know about energy conservation techniques.
 Power plant Technology.

 Heat Transfer.
UNIT I ENERGY 9
Introduction to energy – Global energy scene – Indian energy scene - Units of energy conversion factors, general
classification of energy, energy crisis, energy alternatives.
140
UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9
Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, Thermal, hydel and nuclear power plants,
Efficiency, merits and de-merits of the above power plants, combustion processes, fluidized bed combustion.
UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating, solar cooling,
solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power generation, solar energy
application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean
thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.
UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 9

Biomass origin - Resources – Biomass estimation. Thermochemical conversion – Biological conversion,
Chemical conversion – Hydrolysis & hydrogenation, bio-crude, biodiesel power generation, gasifier, biogas,
integrated gasification.
UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation - Act; Energy management importance, duties and responsibilities; Energy audit – Types
and methodology, reports, instruments. Material and energy balance, thermal energy management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., “Energy Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., “Non-conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Nagpal, G.R., “Power Plant Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press, U.K., 3rd
Revised Edition 2012.
2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 1986.
3. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2002.
4. Freris L.L., “Wind Energy Conversion systems”, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.
15MEA03 MANUFACTURING FOR INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Electronics manufacturing.
 Surface Mount Technology and Packing Technology.
 Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.
 Repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basics of Electronics manufacturing and fabrication steps.
 Know the types of Mounting and Packaging Technologies.
 Know various Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.
 Learn repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.
 Crystal Structure, Semi-conducting materials.
 Atomic Structure, Miller Indices, Periodic table, Crystal defects.
 Various Joining processes, filing and assembly tools.
 Silicon and its chemistry.
141
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF SEMICONDUCTORS 9
Semiconductor materials, devices – Process technology – Basic fabrication steps – Oxidation,
Photolithography, Etching, Diffusion, Ion implantation, Metallization – Material characterization – Wafer
shaping – Crystal characterization.
UNIT II ETCHING AND DIFFUSION 9
Etching – Definition – Types - Wet chemical etching – Silicon, Silicon Dioxide, Silicon Nitride and Polysilicon,
Aluminum, Gallium Arsenide – Dry etching – Reactive plasma etching – Techniques and equipment –
Applications – Diffusion – Definition – Basic diffusion process – Extrinsic diffusion – Lateral diffusion.
UNIT III SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND PACKAGING 9
Introduction to packaging, types – Pin grid array package, Ball grid array package – Attachment
methodologies – Wire bonding, Tape automated bonding, Flip chip bonding – Surface mount technology –
Introduction – Through hole components.
UNIT IV INSPECTION AND TESTING 9
Inspection techniques, equipment and principle - AOI, X-ray. Defects and Corrective action - Stencil printing
process, component placement process, reflow soldering process, under fill and encapsulation process -
Electrical testing of PCB assemblies- In circuit test, functional testing - Fixtures and jigs.
UNIT V REPAIR, REWORK, QUALITY AND RELIABILITY OF ELECTRONICS 9
ASSEMBLIES
Repair tools – Methods - Rework criteria and process - Thermo-mechanical effects and thermal management -
Reliability fundamentals - Reliability testing - Failure analysis - Design for manufacturability - Assembly –
Reworkability – Testing - Reliability and environment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gary S. May, Simon M. Sze, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor Fabrication”, Wiley Student Edition,
2004.
2. Ray Prasad,” Surface Mount Technology – Principles and practice”, Second Edition, Chapman and
Hall, New York, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Puligandla Viswanadham and Pratap Singh, Chapman and Hall, “Failure Modes and Mechanisms in
Electronic Packages”, New York, N.Y, 1998.
2. Ning - Cheng Lee, “Reflow Soldering Process and Trouble Shooting SMT, BGA, CSP and Flip Chip
Technologies”, Elsevier Science, 1995.
3. Zarrow, Phil, “Surface Mount Technology Terms and Concepts”, Elsevier Science and Technology,
1997.
4. C.A.Harper, “Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook”, McGraw Hill Inc.,New York,
N.Y.,2004.
15MEA04 HUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To recognize the important issues concerned with the human factors aspects of tasks, products and
environments.
 To study human behaviour during working.
 To know the methods of quantifying and predicting human comfort, human performance and human
health.
 To recognize the role of standards, recommendations and regulations applicable to tasks, products
and environments.
142
 To recognize limitations to predict human responses, including inter-subject variability and intra-
subject variability.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Able to explain the various aspects of human sensory and cognitive attributes that influence human
performance.
 Able to design the working space, work station ergonomically by considering human body
dimensions.
 Able to predict the human behaviour, human comfort and human performance during working.
 Able to design man machine system effectively.
 Able to assess human skill and capabilities.
 Basics of ergonomics, various work postures and risk factors.

 Interest to study the human behaviour such as motivation talk, personality and determination of
attitudes.
 Ability to understand the concept behind man-machine system, theory behind Ergonomics system
and virtual environments.
 Design of systems, tools and equipment, Knowledge of Man-Machine systems.
 Work study, Method study, Motion study.
UNIT I
ERGONOMICS AND ANATOMY 9
Introduction to ergonomics: The focus of ergonomics, ergonomics and its areas of application in the work
system, a brief history of ergonomics, attempts to humanize work, modern ergonomics,
Posture stability and posture adaptation, low back pain, risk factors for musculoskeletal disorders in the
workplace, behavioral aspects of posture.
UNIT II HUMAN BEHAVIOR 9
Individual differences, Factors contributing to personality, fitting the man to the job, Influence of difference on
safety, Method of measuring characteristics, Accident Proneness.
Motivation, Complexity of Motivation, Job satisfaction. Management theories of motivation, Job enrichment
theory. Frustration and Conflicts, -Determination of attitudes, changing attitudes. Motivational requirements.
UNIT III
ANTHROPOMETRY AND WORK DESIGN FOR STANDING AND SEATED 9
WORKS
Designing for a population of users, percentile, sources of human variability, anthropometry and its uses in
ergonomics, principles of applied anthropometry in ergonomics, application of anthropometry in design, design
for everyone, anthropometry and personal space, effectiveness and cost effectiveness
Fundamental aspects of standing and sitting, an ergonomics approach to work station design, design for
standing workers, design for seated workers, work surface design, visual display units, guidelines for design of
static work, effectiveness and cost effectiveness, research directions
UNIT IV MAN- MACHINE SYSTEM AND REPETITIVE WORKS AND MANUAL 9
HANDLING TASK
Applications of human factors engineering, man as a sensor, man as information processor, man as controller
– Man Vs Machine.
Ergonomics interventions in Repetitive works, handle design, key board design- measures for preventing in
work related musculoskeletal disorders (WMSDs), reduction and controlling, training.
Anatomy and biomechanics of manual handling, prevention of manual handling injuries in the work place,
design of manual handling tasks, carrying, and postural stability.
UNIT V HUMAN SKILL & PERFORMANCE AND DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND 9
VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS
Human strength capabilities - Features of the human body- measures of the physiological functions-strength
143
and endurance- speed of movements.
Principles for the design of visual displays- auditory displays- design of controls- combining displays and
controls- virtual (synthetic) environments, research issues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bridger R.S., “Introduction to Ergonomics”, CRC Press; 3rd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Michael O’Neill, “Ergonomic Design for Organizational Effectiveness”, CRC Press; 2ndEdition 1998.
2. Mark S. Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering & Design”, McGraw-Hill Higher Education; 7th
Edition, 1992.
3. Philip Jacobs, Dan McLeod & Nancy Larson, “The Ergonomics Manual”, Saunders group, UK, 1990.
4. Thomas A. Hunter, “Engineering Design for Safety”, McGraw-Hill, 1992.
15MEA05 DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To review and clarify the fundamental terms, concepts associated with Decision Support Systems,
computerized decision aids, expert systems, group support systems and executive support systems.
 To discuss the modelling and analysis of the Decision Support Systems.
 To understand the enterprise DSS and knowledge management.
 To understand the intelligent systems used in DSS.
 To discuss organizational and social implications of Decision Support Systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of decisions and decision analysis including probability,
decisions under uncertainty, risk taking, and real-world problems.
 Demonstrate the different models used in the DSS.
 Analyze, design and build an information system using emerging tools and technologies for a given
business problem.
 Recognize the relationship between enterprise information needs and decision making.
 Explain the components and concepts of DSS, their characteristics and capabilities.
 Analyze typical decision situations to determine whether it is practical to support them with computer
technology and, if so, how.
 Gain an appreciation of working on systems development projects in a team environment and obtain
experience with project management.
 Describe and understand the concept of decision support systems including collection of data,
database management, modeling, group and organizational decision support systems, executive
information systems, and expert systems.
 Operation analysis.
 Reasoning skills and critical thinking.
 Deductive problem solving techniques.
144
UNIT I DECISION MAKING AND COMPUTERIZED SUPPORT 9
Decision Making: Introduction and Definitions - Managers and Decision Making - Managerial decision making
and Information Systems - Managers and computerized support Need - framework for decision support –
concept of decision support systems (DSS) –executive support systems - preview of the modeling process-
phases of decision making process.
UNIT II MODELING AND ANALYSIS 9

DSS components- DSS classifications - Data warehousing, access, analysis, mining and visualization -
modeling and analysis- Static and dynamic models – influence diagrams – Optimization via mathematical
programming – Heuristic programming – simulation – multidimensional modeling – model base management.
UNIT III ENTERPRISE DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND KNOWLEDGE 9

MANAGEMENT
Group decision making – Group support systems- Technologies – Creativity and Idea generation - enterprise
information systems (EIS) – Comparing and Integrating EIS and DSS - supply and value chain and DSS-
supply chain problems and solutions – Computerized systems - knowledge management methods,
technologies and tools.
UNIT IV INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS 9

Artificial intelligence (AI) – Concepts and Definitions – AI versus natural intelligence - expert systems-
concepts, structure, types and benefits and problems – knowledge Engineering - knowledge acquisition and
validation - knowledge representation – Techniques – Inference techniques
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION, INTEGRATION, AND IMPACTS 9

Implementation – Major issues of implementation – implementation strategies – Models of integration –
Intelligent DSS – Intelligent modelling and model management – problems and issues in integration - impact of
management support systems - overview – personnel management issues – impact of Individuals – Impacts
on productivity, quality and competitiveness – Issues of legality, privacy and ethics – Other societal impacts.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Efraim Turban and Jay E Aronson, “Decision Support and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice Hall,
6thEdition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. George M. Marakas, “Decision Support Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2002.
2. Daniel J. Power, “Decision Support Systems: Concepts and Resources for Managers”, Greenwood
Publishing Group, 1st Edition, 2002.
3. Quazi Khabeer, “Business Process Management and Decision Support Systems”, Alpha Science
International Limited, 1stEdition, 2013.
4. Elain Rich, Kevin Knight and Shivashankar B. Nair , “Artificial intelligence”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, 3rd Edition, 2009.
15MEA06 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about the basics of economics.

 To make cost analysis related to engineering so as to take economically sound decisions.
 To learn about different types of maintenance analysis.
 To learn about depreciation and inflation.
145
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the completion of the course the students will be able to
 Understand the concept of Engineering Economics, types of costs and make economic analysis.
 Remember, understand and apply various Interest formulae and their applications for different
investment situations.
 Compare and analyze various investment alternatives and make appropriate decisions.
 Make replacement and maintenance analysis to take optimal decisions.
 Understand the concept of depreciation, and inflation.
 Economics basics.
 Profit and Loss.
 Concept of money, loans.
 Interest rate, maintenance
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 9
Introduction to economics-Flow in an economy-Law of supply and demand, Concept of engineering
economics-Engineering efficiency, economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics – Elements of costs,
marginal cost, marginal revenue, sunk cost, opportunity cost, break-even analysis- V ratio, Elementary
economic analysis – Material selection for product design selection for a product, process planning.
UNIT II VALUE ENGINEERING 9
Make or buy decision, Value engineering – Function, aims, Value engineering procedure. Interest formulae
and their applications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor, Single payment
present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment series payment Present worth
factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor-Uniform gradient series annual equivalent factor, Effective
interest rate, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT III CASH FLOW 9
Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram),
Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), Annual
equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), rate of return
method, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9
Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,
determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital recovery with
return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items which fail completely.
UNIT V DEPRECIATION 9
Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of depreciation-Sum
of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/ Annuity method of
depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public alternatives- introduction, Examples,
Inflation adjusted decisions – procedure to adjust inflation, Examples on comparison of alternatives and
determination of economic life of asset.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2nd Edition,
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 6th Edition2015.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis”, Oxford University
Press, 12th Edition, 2013.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Pearson, 6th Edition2014.
4. Grant.E.L, Ireson.W.G, and Leavenworth, R.S, “Principles of Engineering Economy”, Wiley, 8th
Edition1990.
5. Smith, G.W., “Engineering Economy”, Iowa State Press, 4th Edition1987.
146
15MEA07 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics behind the nanotechnology.
 To impart knowledge on the synthesis of various nanomaterials.
 To acquire knowledge on the characterization tools used in nanotechnology.
 To have exposure on nanomaterials patterning technologies.
 To gain knowledge on nanodevices and their purpose in the engineering applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
 Demonstrate the classification and properties of nanomaterials.
 Able to synthesis various nanomaterials.
 Identify the various characterization techniques using sophisticated techniques.
 Understand the patterning and lithographic techniques.
 Apply the perceptions of the nanotechnology for various technical applications.
 Material Science.
 Basic knowledge in Physics and Chemistry.
 Fundamentals and technological importance of new materials.
Nanoscale architecture -Classification of nanostructures - Surface to volume ratio -Fraction of surface atoms –
Surface energy- changes to the system total energy - effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties –
thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties.
UNIT II PREPARATION METHODOLOGIES 9
Fabrication methods – top down processes – milling, ECAP process – bottomup process – vapour phase
deposition methods – plasmaassisted deposition process - MBE and MOMBE - liquid phase methods -
colloidal and solgel methods – methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials – ordering of nanosystems
- self-assembly.
UNIT III CHARACTERISATION 9
Analytical and imaging techniques - Electron Microscopy: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission
Electron Microscopy - Scanning Tunnelling Microscopy - Atomic Force Microscopy – X-Ray diffraction
techniques – Spectroscopy techniques – Raman spectroscopy – surface analysis and depth profiling.
UNIT IV PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES 9
Optical lithography – Electron lithography - X-ray Lithography - Ion lithography. Plasma properties – Feature
size control and anisotropy etch mechanism – Lift off techniques – Plasma reactor – Fl2 & Cl2 based etching –
Relative plasma etching techniques and equipments.
UNIT V NANODEVICES 9
Single Electron devices: Nano scale MOSFET – Resonant tunnelling transistor – Single electron transistors -
Single electron dynamics - Nano robotics and Nano manipulation DNA based nano devices – Gas based nano
devices - Quantum structures and devices - Quantum layers, wells, dots and wires - Carbon nanotube based
logic gates, optical devices - Connection with quantum devices- Single molecule electronic devices – photonic
band gap systems - applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Timp Gregory, “Nanotechnology”, Springer, 2012.
2. Guozhong Cao, “Nanosrtuctures and nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications”, Imperial
College Press, 2004.
147
3. Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, “Nanoscale Science and Technology”, John Wiley &
sons, Inc., 2005.
4. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, “Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nano structuring
Techniques”, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH, 2009.
5. Charles. P. Poole, Frank. J. Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, John Wiley, 2010.
6. Stefan Landis, “Nano Lithography”, Wiley, 2011.
7. Pradeep T., “A Text book of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
15MEA08 FUEL CELL & HYDROGEN ENERGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To familiarize the need and production of Hydrogen.
• To impart basic knowledge about Fuel cell.
• To analyze the fuel cell from the thermodynamics perspective.
• To understand the different components and types of fuel cell.
• To know the heat and mass transfer analysis and current issues of fuel cell.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• To acquire the basics involved in the production of Hydrogen and its storage.
• To understand the working principle of fuel cell.
• To gather knowledge about the thermodynamics, and electrochemical engineering perspectives of
fuel cell technology.
• To acquire fundamental knowledge in the development of fuel cell technology.
• Gathered the fundamental knowledge about the heat and mass transfer in fuel cell.
• Basic chemistry.
• Thermodynamics
UNIT I HYDROGEN ENERGY 9
Hydrogen: Its merit as a fuel; Applications, Hydrogen production methods - Production of hydrogen from fossil
fuels, electrolysis, thermal decomposition, photochemical and photo-catalytic methods. Hydrogen storage
methods - Metal hydrides, metallic alloy hydrides, carbon nano-tubes, sea as source of deuterium.
UNIT II FUEL CELL BASICS 7
Fuel cell definition, Difference between batteries and fuel cells, fuel cell history, components of fuel cells,
principle of working of fuel cells
UNIT III FUEL CELL THERMODYNAMICS 10
Second law analysis of fuel cells, efficiency of fuel cells, fuel cell electrochemistry - Nernst equation,
Electrochemical kinetics, Butler-Volmer equation, Fuel cell types - Classification by operating
temperature/electrolyte type, Fuel Cell Performance, Activation, Ohmic and Concentration over potential
UNIT IV FUEL CELL DESIGN AND COMPONENTS 9
Cell components, stack components, system components, Overview of intermediate/high temperature fuel
cells - Solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC), Molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC), Phosphoric acid fuel cells (PAFC),
Polymer Electrolyte fuel cells (PEFC)
UNIT V HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER IN FUEL CELLS 10
Heat and mass transfer in polymer electrolyte fuel cells, water management in PEFCs, Current issues in
PEFCs Direct methanol fuel cells (DMFC) - Electrochemical kinetics methanol oxidation, Current issues in
DMFCs, Fuel crossover in DMFCs, Water management in DMFCs, high methanol concentration operation,
limiting current density
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
148
TEXTBOOKS:
1. J. Larminie and A. Dicks, “Fuel Cell Systems Explained”, SAE International and John Wiley &
Sons,2nd Edition, 2003.
2. Xianguo Li, “Principles of Fuel Cells”, Taylor and Francis, New York, 2005.
3. S. Srinivasan, “Fuel Cells: From Fundamentals to Applications”, Springer US, CBS Publishers: New
Delhi, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ryan O'Hayre, Suk-Won Cha, Whitney Colella and Fritz B. Prinz, “Fuel Cell Fundamentals”, Wiley,
2nd Edition, 2008.
2. Allen J. Bard and Larry R. Faulkner, “Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and Applications”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2001.
3. Amir Faghriand Yuwen Zhang, “Transport Phenomena in Multiphase Systems”, Academic Press; 1st
Edition, 2006.
15MEA09 BIO-MECHANICS AND HUMAN BODY VIBRATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the functions of various muscular skeletal system and anthrometry.
 To correlate the human body vibration and muscular skeletal system.
 To know about various bio mechanical models and acquire knowledge on work capacity.
 To know about the various types of vibration and its relevant criteria.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students would
 Analyse the various types of vibration and its relation to the bio mechanical models.
 Acquire knowledge on Anthrometric data and Bio mechanical studies in the industries.
 Acquire the knowledge on evaluation of work capacity vibration measurement.
 Basic knowledge on biology.
 Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics.
UNIT I VIBRATION 9
Introduction, vibration exciters, control systems, Performance specification, motion sensors and transducers
UNIT II MUSCULARSKELETAL SYSTEM AND ANTHROPOMETRY IN 9

BIOMECHANICS
Introduction, structure and function of musculoskeletal system - Connective Tissue, Skeletal Muscle, Joints
Measurement of body segment, physical properties, Anthropometric data for biomechanical studies in
industry
UNIT III MECHANICAL WORK CAPACITY EVALUATION AND 9

BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Joint motion, human motion analysis system, applied electromyography, intradiscal pressure measurement,
intrabdominal measurement, force platform system, whole body vibration measurement.
UNIT IV BIOMECHANICAL MODELS 9

Planar static biomechanical models, static 3D modelling, dynamic biomechanical models, special purpose
biomechanical models.
UNIT V WHOLE BODY AND SEGMENTAL VIBRATION 9

Vibration on human body, whole body vibration, Hand-Transmitted Vibration, segmental vibration, vibration
exposure criteria.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
149
TEXTBOOK:
1. Vibration and Shock Handbook, Clarence W. De Silva, Taylor and Francis Group, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1.Occupational Biomechanics, Don B. Chaffin and Gunnar B.J.Andersson, John Wiley and sons, Inc.
15MEA10 FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMAL SCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The interaction between different concepts of thermodynamics and heat transfer.

 The application of thermodynamics and heat transfer to various industries.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics.

 Acquire knowledge about the power plants.
 Know the applications of psychrometry.
 Understand the basic concepts of Refrigeration.
 Understand the basic concepts of Air conditioning.
 Engineering Thermodynamics
 Power plant technology
 Thermal Engineering
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO THERMODYNAMICS 12
Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe, Types of Systems,
Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Property, Process, Cycle – Reversibility – Quasi-static Process, Irreversible
Process, Types, Work and Heat, Point and Path function, Concept of quality of Temperature, Principles of
Thermometry, Steady Flow Energy Equation, Limitations of First Law of Thermodynamics, Second law of
Thermodynamics, entropy (Elementary treatment only).
UNIT II POWER PLANTS 7
Introduction to thermodynamic cycles, Steam, Hydel, Diesel, Tidal, Geothermal, Wind, Solar power plants-
schematic and working.
UNIT III PSYCHROMETRY 7
Properties of air-water vapour mixtures: Dry Bulb Temperature, Wet Bulb Temperature, Relative Humidity, dew
point temperature, degree of saturation, thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, enthalpy of moist air, sensible
heating and cooling, Adiabatic humidification and dehumidification, By-pass factor, Cooling load calculations
using psychrometric table and chart.
UNIT IV REFRIGERATION 12
Vapour compression refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub cooling – Performance calculations - working principle
of vapour absorption system, Ammonia –Water, Lithium bromide –water systems (Description only) - Alternate
refrigerants – Comparison between vapour compression and absorption systems
UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING 7
Air conditioning system: Types, Working Principles – Cooling Load calculations – Concept of Room Sensible
Heat Factor, Grand Sensible Heat Factor, Effective Sensible Heat Factor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram, Psychrometric chart and refrigerant
propertytables are permitted in the examination
150
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sarkar, B.K, “Thermal Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007.
2. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in thermal engineering“, Dhanpat
Rai & sons, 5th Edition, 2012.
3. Nag.P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Nag P. K, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw- Hill, 3rdEdition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajput. R. K., “Thermal Engineering” S.Chand Publishers , 2010
2. Cengel, “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach” TataMcGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition,
2006.
3. EI-Wakil M.M, “Power Plant Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill 2001.
15MEA11 FUNDAMENTALS OF LITHOGRAPHY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Lithography is a study of printing micron to nano scale features on silicon wafer. Complete understanding of
the course makes the student technically strong in nano fabrication.
 To impart sound knowledge about the fundamentals of clean room and nano fabrication by optical
projection lithography.
 To emphasize about the importance of mask and maskless lithography.
 To motivate the pattern transfer technique with high energetic electron beam concepts.
 This course provides information about printing the pattern with ion beam sources.
 To enable the knowledge about printing with soft lithographic concepts and etching the
unwantedportions.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to:
 It emphasize about the fabrication of integrated circuits on microchip using optical principles.
 Understand about the extreme UV light and zone plates as maskless techniques.
 Applying scanning electron beam techniques in nano fabrication.
 Imparts knowledge about the use of Ion beam/focused ion beam as tools for developing nano objects.
 Provides impression about soft lithography techniques and various modes of etching.
 Fundamentals of Nanoscience and Technology.
 Microelectro mechanical systems and Nano electro mechanical systems.
 Fundamentals of Micro fabrication.
 Fundamental principles of optical lithography.
UNIT I PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS 10
Introduction to lithography – lithography processes; mask making, wafer pre-treatment, resist spinning – pre-
bake, exposure, development and rinsing, post-bake, resist stripping, positive and negative photoresists – lift
off profile - introduction to semiconductor processing - necessity for a clean room - different types of clean
rooms - maintenance of a clean room – micro fabrication process flow diagram – chip cleaning, coating of
photoresists, patterning, etching, inspection – process integration - etching techniques - reactive Ion etching -
magnetically enhanced RIE- Ion beam etching - other etching techniques.
UNIT II PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS 9
Lithography - optical lithography - different modes - optical projection lithography - multistage scanners –
resolution and limits of photolithography – resolution enhancement techniques - photo mask- binary mask -
phase shifting mask - attenuated phase shift masks - alternating phase shift masks - off axis illumination -
optical proximity correction - sub resolution assist feature enhancement - optical immersion lithography.
151
UNIT III DIRECT WRITING METHODS - MASKLESS OPTICAL LITHOGRAPHY 7
Maskless optical projection lithography – types, advantages and limitations – required components - zone
plate array lithography - extreme ultraviolet lithography – light sources - optics and materials issues.
UNIT IV ELECTRON BEAM LITHOGRAPHY, ION BEAM & X-RAY 10

LITHOGRAPHY
Scanning electron - beam lithography - electron sources and electron optics system – maskless EBL- electron
beam projection lithography - scattering with angular limitation projection e-beam lithography - projection
reduction exposure with variable axis immersion lenses - Ion beam lithography - focusing ion beam lithography
- ion projection lithography – X-ray lithography – X-ray masks, resists, merits and demerits - atom lithography.
UNIT V NANOIMPRINT LITHOGRAPHY AND SOFT LITHOGRAPHY 9

Nano imprint lithography - hot embossing - soft Lithography- moulding/replica moulding: PDMS stamps -
printing with soft stamps - edge lithography - dip-pen lithography - set up and working principle – self-
assembly – LB films.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chris Mack, “Fundamental principles of optical lithography: The science of micro fabrication”, Wiley,
2008.
2. M. Madou, “Fundamentals of micro fabrication”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2002.
3. Stepanova, Maria, “Nano fabrication techniques and principles”, Dew, Steven (Eds.) Springer, 2012.
4. John A. Rogers & Hong H. Lee, “Unconventional nano patterning techniques and applications”, A
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2009.
5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, devices and structures”, CRC Press LLC,
2002.
6. Zheng Cui, “Nano fabrication – Principles, capabilities and limits”, Springer Science, 2008.
7. Mark J. Jackson, “Micro fabrication and nano manufacturing”, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group,
2006.
15MEA12 FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide an in depth knowledge about the fundamentals of fire and explosion.
 To understand the causes and effects of fire and explosion.
 To know the various fire and explosion prevention systems and protective equipment.
 To understand the protection of building from fire.
 To understand the various fire prevention techniques to be followed in a building.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To make familiar about basic concepts of fire and explosion science.

 To k n o w t h e d i f f e r e n t causes and effects of fire and explosion.
 To understand the operation of various types of fire fighting equipment.
 To understand the prevention of explosion.
 To equip the students to effectively employ fire protection techniques in building.
 Fundamentals of Thermodynamics.
 Various modes of heat transfer.
 Fluid mechanics, Engineering Chemistry, Engineering Physics.
 Building materials used for construction.
152
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE 9
Combustion process & concepts, combustion in solids, liquid, gases- smouldering fires- Spontaneous
combustion - rapid fire progress phenomena- Properties influencing fire hazard – properties of solid, liquid
and gaseous fuels - classification of fires.
UNIT II FIRE CONTROL 9

Fire extinguishers – Location and operation of extinguishers - Extinguishing methods- extinguishing agents:
water, foam, chemical powder, CO2, sand, steam, saw dust – Fire detectors – Fire tender - Automatic fire
extinguishing system - Fixed fire fighting installations - Risk analysis: risk assessment, consequence analysis,
risk reduction – Fire drill – Emergency procedures.
UNIT III PRODUCTS AND EFFECTS OF COMBUSTION 9

Heat: Conduction, convection, radiation- effects of heat- effects of flames – different fire gases and their
effects – effects of smoke on humans– Smoke movement control and venting - Effects of explosion – Negative
pressure wave – Fragmentation – case studies.
UNIT IV BUILDING FIRE SAFETY 9

Objectives of fire safe building design, Fire load, fire resistant material and fire testing – concept of egress
design - exits – width calculations -– fire safety requirements for high rise buildings – Behavior of materials &
structures in fire – Concrete and steel. Flame spread in high rise building – Statutory requirements.
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPLOSION 9

Introduction – Explosion fundamentals – Types – Physical, BLEVE, Chemical explosion – Vapour cloud
explosion – Dust explosion – Explosion prevention – Explosion mitigation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Purandare D.D., Abhay D. Purandare, “Hand Book on Industrial Fire Safety”, 1st Edition, P & A
Publications.
2. Derek, James, “Fire Prevention Hand Book”, Butter Worths and Company, London, 1986.
3. Jain V.K., Fire Safety in Building, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gupta, R.S., “Hand Book of Fire Technology” Orient Longman, Bombay, 2010.
2. “Accident Prevention manual for industrial operations” N.S.C., Chicago, 1982.
3. Dinko Tuhtar, “Fire and explosion protection – A system approach”, Ellis Horwood Ltd, 1989.
4. “Fire fighters hazardous materials Reference Book Fire Prevention in Factories”, Nostrand Rein
Hold, New York, 1991.
5. Lees F.P., “Fire Prevention and firefighting”, Loss prevention Association, India.
15MEA13 HIGH ENERGETIC MATERIAL - PROPELLANTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study about the process of conversion of the high energy released by materials due to
decomposition into useful work.
 This course deals with the study of the application of the released energy into different categories like
explosives, propellant and pyrotechnics.
 To understand the background aspects of the different products of explosives, pyro techniques and
propellant by any engineering student.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the classification of high energy materials according to the process.
153
 Apply the release of energy into useful work in different categories.
 Understand the basic characteristics and ingredients of Propellant.
 Know about the basic process of pyro techniques.
 Understand the various processing techniques of explosives in an ethical manner.
 Materials: Inorganic materials, Ferrous and Non-ferrous materials.
 Organic materials, Polymers.
 Fundamentals of Combustion.
 Chemistry of burning.
 Hazardous materials.
UNIT I EXPLOSIVE MATTER 9
High energetic material – Definition – Classifications – Explosives – Reactive explosive materials – Primary
explosives – Secondary explosives – Military explosives – Industrial explosives – Nitro explosives – Liquid
oxidizers and explosives.
UNIT II GUN PROPELLANT 9

Low explosives - Gun propellant – Features - Deflagration – Ballistic property – Homogeneous propellant -
Single base propellant – Nitrocellulose – Stabilizer – Characteristics - Double base propellant – Nitrocellulose
and nitroglycerin – Additives - Extruded Double-Base Propellants - Cast Double-Base Propellants – Liquid
propellant.
UNIT III ROCKET PROPELLANT 9

Rocket Propellant - Composite propellant – Features - Ingredients - Fuels, oxidizers, binders – Additives –
Cross linking agents – Plasticizers – Stabilizers – Burn rate modifier – Characteristics - Inhibition – Neutral and
Progressive burning– Inhibition techniques.
UNIT IV PYROTECHNICS 9
Pyrotechnics – General features - Ingredients of Pyrotechnic Formulations – Fuel, Oxidizers, Binders,
Coolants, Retardants, Dyes, Color Intensifiers, Moderators – Characteristics- Pyrotechnic formulations -
Illuminating formulations - Delay formulations - Smoke formulations - Incendiary formulations.
UNIT V PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR EXPLOSIVES 9

Extrusion - Casting types– Normal, Melt, Vibration, Squeeze casting, Pressing – Unidirectional, Double Action,
Incremental, Hydrostatic, Iso-static pressing – Stability of explosives – Vacuum stability test – Heat test –
Impact sensitivity test.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. “High Energy Materials – Propellants, Explosives and Pyrotechnics” Jai Prakash Agarwal, WILEY-
VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. "High Energy Oxidisers for Advanced Solid Propellants and Explosives - Advances in Solid Propellant
Technology”, First International HEMSI Workshop, Ranchi, India, 2002, 87-106.
2. “The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives”, Davis, Tenney L. – Open source downloadable.
15MEA14 DIRECT DIGITAL MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Direct Digital Manufacturing technology and the associated Aerospace, Architecture, Art, Medical and
154
industrial applications.
 Different types of Image capturing and Image processing techniques and its applications in various
fields.
 Study of production of x-rays and its application to different medical Imaging techniques and different
types of Radio diagnostic techniques.
 Study of digitization and special imaging techniques used for visualizing the cross sections of the body.
 Understanding of various geometric modeling and meshing techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Learn about the principle of Direct Digital Manufacturing (DDM) techniques, and along with their
potential applications to customized manufacturing.
 Understand the basic concepts of reverse engineering and various image processing techniques.
 Effectively employ the free form fabrication technique in launching a new product in market within a
short span of time.
 Trained to find innovative solutions to fabricate highly intricate complex shapes by suitable digital
manufacturing technique.
 Get exposure to various diagnostic applications of the medical imaging integrated with 3D Printing and
SDM technique.
 Digitization Techniques.
 Geometric modeling techniques.
 Processing CAD Data (Selection of Orientation, Supports generation, Slicing, Toolpath generation).
 Data Exchange Formats.
 Reverse Engineering Techniques.
 Medical Image sources, Medical Image Representation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND CAD MODELING 11

Introduction of DDM - Need - Development of DDM systems – DDM process chain - Impact of DDM on Product
Development in various fields –Digital & Virtual prototyping -Benefits- Applications. Digitization techniques –
geometric modeling techniques: Wire frame, surface and solid modeling – Part orientation and support
generation, direct and adaptive slicing, Tool path generation.
UNIT II REVERSE ENGINEERING AND MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEM 9
Basics of Medical Image Sources: Radiology - Computed Tomography- Magnetic Resonance Tomography –
Medical Image Representation: Pixels and voxels - Image file formats- DICOM- Other formats- Medical image
analysis: Image segmentation - Image representation and analysis - Feature extraction and representation.
UNIT III POWDER BASED DDM SYSTEMS 9
Selective Laser Sintering(SLS): Principle, process, Indirect and direct SLS- Powder structures, modeling of SLS,
materials, post processing, post curing, surface deviation and accuracy, Applications. Laser Engineered Net
Shaping (LENS): Processes, materials, products, advantages, limitations and applications– Case Studies.
UNIT IV LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED DDM SYSTEMS 9
Stereo Lithography (SLA): Apparatus: Principle, per-build process, part-building, post-build processes, photo
polymerization of SL resins, part quality and process planning, recoating issues, materials, advantages,
limitations and applications. Solid Ground Curing (SGC): working principle, process, strengths, weaknesses and
applications. Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM): Principle, details of processes, process variables, types,
products, materials and applications. Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM): Working Principles, details of
processes, products, materials, advantages, limitations and applications - Case studies.
UNIT V 3D PRINTING AND SHAPE DEPOSITION MANUFACTURING 7
TECHNIQUES
Three dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, basic process, Physics of 3DP, types of printing, process
155
capabilities, material system. Solid based, Liquid based and powder based 3DP systems, strength and
weakness, Applications and case studies. Shape Deposition Manufacturing (SDM): Introduction, basic process,
shape decomposition, Mould SDM and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, World Scientific
Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Andreas Gebhardt, “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 1st Edition, 2003.
3. Steve Webb, “The Physics of Medical Imaging”, Medical Science Series, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Bristol, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. LiouW.Liou, Frank W.Liou,”Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for prototype
development”, CRC Press, 2007.
2. Ali K. Kamrani, EmadAbouel Nasr, “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.
3. Peter D.Hilton Hilton/Jacobs, Paul F.Jacobs, “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”,
CRC press, 2000.
4. Wolfgang Birkfellner, “Applied Medical Image Processing – A Basic course‟, CRC Press, 2nd Edition,
2014.
5. R.C.Gonzalez and R.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing‟, Pearson-Prentice-Hall, 2nd Edition, 2009.
15MEA15 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS OF MATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know about the basic principles of spectroscopy.

 To understand about the molecular spectroscopy.
 To acquire knowledge about NMR and mass spectroscopy.
 To inculcate about the separation techniques.
 To measure and evaluate about the surface properties.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Obtaining fundamental knowledge about optical spectroscopy.

 Gaining knowledge about molecular and atomic spectroscopy.
 Gathering enough knowledge in the field of nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy.
 Studying about the separation of various constituents present in a mixture by chromatographic
techniques.
 Acquiring knowledge about electrochemical analysis.
 Material science, physics and chemistry.

 Basic information on scattering processes involving X-rays,visible light, electrons.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF SPECTROMETRY 9

Properties of electromagnetic radiation- wave properties – components of optical instruments – Sources of
radiation – wavelength selectors – sample containers – radiation transducers – Signal process and read outs –
signal to noise ratio - sources of noise – Enhancement of signal to noise - types of optical instruments – Principle
of Fourier Transform optical Measurements.
156
UNIT II MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY 9
Molecular absorption spectrometry – Measurement of Transmittance and Absorbance – Beer’s law –
Instrumentation - Applications -Theory of fluorescence and Phosphorescence Instrumentation – Applications –
Theory of Infrared absorption spectrometry – IR instrumentation - Applications – Theory of Raman spectroscopy
– Instrumentation – applications.
UNIT III MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY AND 9

MASSSPECTROMETRY
Theory of NMR – environmental effects on NMR spectra –chemical shift-NMR spectrometers – applications of 1H
NMR- Molecular mass spectra – ion sources – Mass spectrometer. Applications of molecular mass – Electron
paramagnetic resonance- g values – instrumentation.
UNIT IV SEPARATION METHODS 9

General description of chromatography – Band broadening and optimization of column performance- Liquid
chromatography – Partition chromatography - Adsorption chromatography – Ion exchange chromatography -
principles of GC and applications – HPLC- Capillary electrophoresis – Applications.
UNIT V ELECTRO ANALYSIS AND SURFACE MICROSCOPY 9

Electrochemical cells- Electrode potential - EMF – potentiometry-reference electrode – ion selective and
molecular selective electrodes– Voltammetry – Cyclic and pulse voltammetry- Applications of voltammetry -
Study of surfaces – Scanning probe microscopes – AFM and STM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. D.A. Skoog, F. James Holler, Stanky, R.Crouch, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, Cengage Learning,
2007.
2. G. Aruldhas, “Molecular Structure and Spectroscopy”. PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, 2007.
3. Elsa Lundanes, Leon Reubsaet, TygeGreibrokk. “Chromatography: Basic Principles, Sample
Preparations and Related Methods”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
4. Fritz Scholz, “Electroanalytical Methods: Guide to Experiments and Applications”, Springer Science &
Business Media, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James Keeler, “Understanding NMR spectroscopy”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2. Jack Cazes, “Encyclopedia of Chromatography”, Volume 2, CRC Press, 2005.
3. Challa S.S.R. Kumar,“Surface Science Tools for Nanomaterials Characterization”, Springer, 2015.
15MEA16 BASICS OF AIRCRAFT AND SPACE TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide in depth knowledge in the evolution of aircrafts.

 To give understanding of concept of aerospace engineering.
 To get exposed to the various aircraft materials and aircraft structures.
 To develop knowledge in satellites and satellite launching vehicles.
 To analyse the current trends in the field of Manned Mission.
157
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 This course would make familiar of basic concepts of aviation.

 Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind the aircraft structures.
 Students would be trained in the current engineering materials and structures of an aircraft.
 One would be able to make use of knowledge for the design of rocket, satellites, and space shuttles in
the field of inter-discipline.
 This Course would equip the students to effectively enhance the concepts of aircrafts and spacecrafts.
 Basics of Earth science, solar science.

 Keen interest in Aerospace.
 Basics of Material science.
 Polymers, Ceramics.
 Fuels-Liquids, solids and gases.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIATION 9
Astronomy: overview of astronomy – know the sky – coordinate system – telescopes – flux, magnitudes – stars,
formation – solar system.
Atmospheric Science: Earth’s atmosphere, structure, classification, constituents– standard atmosphere-
Introduction to space environment-Historical perspective of aviation.
UNIT II AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 9
Aerodynamic forces – lift generation – aerofoils and wings – drag – anatomy of an aircraft – mechanism of thrust
production – propeller – jet engines and their operation – helicopters – aircraft performance – aircraft
instruments-fatigue failure in aircrafts – Airplane Disasters.
UNIT III AIRCRAFT MATERIALS & STRUCTURES 9
Light-weight materials- FRP: GFRP, CFRP- Applications of FRP in principal parts of aircrafts.
Radome-fuselage-wings-landing gears-black box-Research Issues: smart skins in aircraft-structural health
monitoring (SHM) of aircrafts.
UNIT IV ROCKETS & SATELLITES 9
Introduction to rockets – rocket propulsion engines – types of rockets- nozzles – propellants –rocket engines–
elements of liquid propulsion systems – solid rocket motors – rocket testing – launch preparation.
Types of satellites- present-day satellites- satellite structures- satellite operations-application of shape memory
alloy (SMA) in satellites.
UNIT V LAUNCH VEHICLES FOR MANNED MISSION 9
Overview of Re-entry vehicles and Manned missions-Shuttle components -Orbiter Vehicle (OV), a pair of
recoverable solid rocket boosters (SRBs)-expendable external tank (ET) –Space shuttle disasters: A case study.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
158
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Megson, T. H. G., “Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students”, 4th Edition, Butterworth-Hein-emann,
2007.
rd
2. Turner, M. J. L., “Rocket and Spacecraft Propulsion: Principles, Practice and New Developments”, 3
Edition, Springer, 2009.
3. Anderson, D. F. and Eberhardt, S., “Understanding Flight”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wiesel, W. E., “Spaceflight Dynamics”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1997.

2. Kaplan, M. H., “Modern Spacecraft Dynamics and Control”, John Wiley and Sons, London, 1976.
3. Thompson, W. T., “Introduction to Space Dynamics”, Dover Publications, New York, 1986.
4. Cornelisse, J. W., “Rocket Propulsion and Spaceflight Dynamics”, Pitman, London, 1979.
5. Anderson, J. D., “Introduction to Flight”, 7th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
Szebehely, V. G. and Mark, H., “Adventures in Celestial Mechanics”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 1998.
15MEA17 INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB WITH ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Basic concept of Matlab.

 Matlab codes and programming.
 Exploit of the plotting.
 Writing program for solving linear system, curve fitting, numerical integration & one dimensional
equation, which are needed for engineering disciplines.
 Concept of Simulink, for solving engineering problem.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Extrapolate the basic of Matlab commands.

 Write codes for simple applications.
 Programming for solving linear system, Gaussian elimination, finite difference method, finite element
method.
 Plot the graphs using code.
 Familiar with the concepts of Simulink for engineering applications.
 Basic programming concepts.
 Analytical skills.
 Matrix manipulations.
 Linear algebra.
 Plots.
 Basics of modelling and simulations.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB 9
Basic of Matlab- Matlab window, Input-Output, File Types, Platform dependence – Matrices and Vectors: Input,
Indexing, Matrix Manipulation, creating vectors- Matrix and Array Operations: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical,
Elementary math function, Matric function, character string.
UNIT II PROGRAMMING IN MATLAB (SCRIPTS AND FUNCTIONS) 9

Script Files- Function Files: Executing a function, More on functions Language, Sub-functions, Compiled
159
function (P code) – Language Specific Features: variables, Loops, branches, control-flow, Interactive input,
Recursion, Input/output - Advanced Data Objects: Multidimensional matrices, Structures, Cells– programming
for simple problem like conversion of temperature.
UNIT III GRAPHICS-PLOTTING 9

Basic2-D Plots: Style options, Labels, title, legend, and other text objects, Axis control, zoom-in, and zoom-out,
Modifying plots with Plot Editor, Overlay plots-3-D Plots: View, Rotate view, Mesh and surface plots, Vector field
and volumetric plots, Interpolated surface plots - Saving and Printing Graphs.
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 9
Computer implementation - development of codes- Linear Algebra: Solving a linear system, Gaussian
elimination, Finding eigenvalues & eigenvectors - Curve Fitting and Interpolation: Polynomial curve fitting, Least
squares curve fitting - Interpolation - Numerical Integration (Quadrature): Double integration - Ordinary
Differential Equations (ODE): first-order linear ODE, second-order nonlinear ODE.
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO SIMULINK AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9

Simulink and its Relation to MATLAB- library: sink, source, maths operation, logic & bit operations, discrete -
Modeling the Solution of Three Equations with Three Unknowns - Modeling a Fourth−Order Differential Equation
- Modeling an Electric Circuit - Applications: Moving Ladder, Conical Water Reservoir, Heat Flow, Cantilever
Beam Deflection, Feedback Control Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rudra Pratap "Getting Started with MATLAB", Oxford University Press, 2002.
®
2. Steven T.Karris, "Introduction to Simulink with Engineering Applications", Orchard Publications, 2nd
Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Moore Holly, "Matlab for Engineers" Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. William J. Palm, "Introduction to MATLAB for Engineers”, 3rd Edition, 2010.
3. Amos Gilat, "MATLAB: An Introduction with Applications", 3rd edition, 2008.
4. Ferreira Ajm, "Matlab Codes for Finite Element Analysis - Solids and Structures", Springer, 2014.
15MEA18 MICRO AND NANO FABRICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Able to define the concepts involved in IC chip manufacturing.

 Gain knowledge on various Nano deposition technologies.
 To learn the etching technologies used in semiconductor industry.
 Emphasize on the importance of doping and surface modification.
 To define the concept of self-assembled monolayers for Nano device fabrication.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Gain knowledge on the wafer preparation techniques in IC industry.

 Able to fabricate thin films for the fabrication of micro and nanodevices.
 Able to apply the etching techniques in any prepared substrates for nanofabrication.
 Learn the wafer technology applications and surface modification techniques.
 Can design the self-assembled monolayers for nanofabrication.
 Knowledge in electronics, physics, chemistry, materials science with mathematical background.
160
UNIT I CRYSTAL GROWTH, WAFER PREPARATION AND EPITAXY 9
Basic steps in IC fabrication - Electronic grade silicon – crystal plane and orientation – Defects in the lattice –
Czochralski crystal growing – Silicon shaping – Processing consideration – Vapour phase epitaxy – Liquid phase
epitaxy - selective epitaxy - Molecular beam epitaxy - Epitaxial Evaluation.
UNIT II DEPOSITION TECHNOLOGIES 9

Deposition processes- Thermal, Plasma and Arc physical vapour deposition, Chemical vapour deposition
process- Atomic layer deposition process-Liquid phase deposition by spin coating, Spray coating, Dip coating,
Sol-gel Technology, Electrochemical and Chemical reaction deposition.
UNIT III ETCHING TECHNOLOGIES 9

Etching Technology basics, Wet chemical etching – process, etching of single crystal silicon, etching of
insulators, semiconductors and conductors – Dry etching – physical etching, Chemical dry etching, Physical-
Chemical process, Chemical etching – powder blasting, gas cluster ion beam etching (GCIB) technology.
UNIT IV DOPING AND SURFACE MODIFICATION 9

Importance of doping and surface modification-Introduction into doping-Doping by diffusion-Doping by
implantation-Doping applications-MEMS applications, Wafer Technology applications- Thermal oxidation of
silicon- oxidation mechanisms, oxidation equipments and process.
UNIT V NANOFABRICATION BY SELF-ASSEMBLY 9

Self-Assembly process- Introduction to self-assembly, Chemical, Physical and Colloidal Self-Assembly, Static
and dynamic Self-assembly, Directed self-assembly-Basics, Mechanisms-Surface topography and surface
wetting, Role of defects in self-assembly. Self-assembled monolayers (SAMs).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Hans H. Gatzen, Volker Saile, JurgLeuthold, “Micro and Nano Fabrication: Tools and Processes”,
Springer, 2015.
2. Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mark J. Jackson, “Microfabrication and Nano manufacturing”, Taylor andFrancis Group, 2006.
2. Bo Cui, “Recent advances in Nanofabrication Techniques and Applications”,InTech Publisher, 2011.
3. Milton Ohring, “Materials Science of Thin Films: Deposition and Structure”, Academic Press, 2002.
4. Rointan F. Bunshah, “Handbook of Deposition Technologies for Films andcoatings, science, Technology
and applications”, Noyes Publications, 1994.
15MEA19 FUNDAMENTALS OF NATURE INSPIRED ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The intention of this course is to
 Give an overview of the fundamentals of a special category of algorithms developed from the
inspiration of natural things.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the fundamentals of heuristic search algorithms.
161
 Apply the concept of the natural behavior of agents in the optimization.
 Understand different types of search algorithms.
 Apply the behavior of ant in solving large sized computational problems.
 Understand the basics of population base algorithms.
 Calculus, Functions.
 Linear and Non-linear Function.
 Discrete and Continuous variables.
 Maximum and minimum values of continuous function.
 Discrete function.
UNIT I HEURISTIC SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction to Heuristic Algorithm – Robustness of traditional optimization and search methods – Goal of
optimization – Combinatorial optimization – Problem complexity – Classification of Search algorithms – Nature
inspired algorithms – Single point search algorithms – Population based algorithms.
UNIT II SINGLE POINT SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9

Memory less single point search – Local search – Neighborhood search – Variable neighborhood search –
Iterated local search Simulated Annealing – Memory based search algorithms –Tabu search – Hybrid
algorithms.
UNIT III EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9

Search algorithm – Genetic algorithm – Coding methods –Phenotype and phenotype representation of
solution and mathematical foundation of Genetic Algorithm. Mapping of objective function – Fitness function –
Computer implementation of Genetic Algorithm– Data structure – Roulette Wheel selection – Genetic
operators – Cross over operators – various types – Mutation operators.
UNIT IV ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION 9

Advanced Population based search algorithms – Introduction to Ant Colony Optimization – Ant System –
Pheromone trail – Desirability factor – Variants in ant colony optimization – Simple applications.
UNIT V PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION 9

Swarm intelligence – Particles and swarm – Objective and fitness function – Velocity of particle – Cognition
component – Social component – gbest and pbest concept – Evolution of PSO – Simple applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. David Goldberg, "Genetic Algorithm in search, Optimization and Machine learning", Addison–
Weseley Publishers.
2. David Corne, et al. "New Ideas in Optimization" McGraw Hill Publishers. 1999.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James Kennedy, Russell C. Eberhart, with Yuhui Shi, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2001.
2. AndriesEngelbrecht, “Computational Intelligence – an Introduction”, John Wiley and sons Ltd., 2007.
3. Eric Bonabeau, Marco Dorigo, and Guy Theraulaz, “Swarm Intelligence: FromNatural to Artificial
Systems”, Oxford University Press, 1999.
15MEA20 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Design, construction and operation of energy efficient buildings.
 Utilization of energy efficient technologies.
162
 Energy efficient building codes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to understand and apply
 The concepts and techniques of energy efficient buildings.
 The concepts and techniques of different energy efficient technologies and energy conservation
measures in different equipment's used in buildings.
 The concepts and techniques of indoor environmental quality.
 The energy transfer in different buildings.
 The policies, rules and regulation for energy efficient building thereby facilitating towards sustainable
development.
 Basic knowledge in Refrigeration and Air-conditioning.
 Sun, Earth movement.
 Climate change.
The sun-earth relationship and the energy balance on the earth's surface, climate, wind, solar radiation, and
solar temperature, sun shading and solar radiation on surfaces, energy impact on the shape and orientation of
buildings, thermal properties of building materials. Technology Roadmap on Energy-efficient Buildings.
UNIT II ENERGY EFFICIENT TECHNOLOGIES 9

Passive cooling and day lighting, active solar and photovoltaic, building energy analysis methods, building
energy efficiency standards, different lighting technologies. Refrigeration and air conditioning systems, energy
conservation in pumps, fans and blowers, refrigerating machines, heat rejection equipment, energy efficient
motors, and insulation. Energy Efficiency Trends in Residential and Commercial Buildings, Energy Efficiency
in traditional buildings.
UNIT III INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 9

Psychrometry, comfort conditions, thermal comfort, ventilation and air quality, air conditioning requirement,
visual perception, auditory requirement, illumination requirement, choice of lighting, lighting standards, control
of lighting, lighting economics and aesthetics, energy saving, impacts of lighting efficiency, electronic ballast.
Ventilation – Requirements – Minimum standards for ventilation – Ventilation Design – Energy conservation in
ventilating systems.
UNIT IV ENERGY TRANSFER IN BUILDINGS 9

Concepts of energy efficient buildings and energy efficient HVAC systems. Calculation of heating and cooling
loads of the building. Heating and Cooling Equipment. Building’s energy balance accounting for solar energy
gain – Heat losses - Internal heat sources. Study of climate and its influence in building design for energy
requirement. Low energy and zero energy buildings.
UNIT V GREEN BUILDINGS 9

Ecological sustainable design, working group sustainable construction methods & techniques. Barriers to
green buildings, green building rating tools, material selection, embodied energy, operating energy, façade
systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building economics, LEED and IGBC
codes. Energy efficiency requirements in building codes, energy efficiency policies for new buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. John Littler and Randall Thomas, “Design with Energy: The Conservation and Use of Energy in
Buildings”, Cambridge University Press, 1984.
163
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Edward G Pita, “An Energy Approach- Air-conditioning Principles and Systems”, Pearson Education,
2003.
2. Colin Porteous, “The New Eco-Architecture”, Spon Press, 2002.
3. Lever More G J, “Building Energy Management Systems”, E and F.N Spon, London, 2000.
4. Means R.S., “Green building: project planning and cost estimating”, Kingston, 2006.
5. Kibert C.J. “Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design”, Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2007.
6. Eicker U., “Low Energy Cooling for Sustainable Buildings”, Wiley, 2009.
7. Attmann O., “Green Architecture”, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.bee-india.nic.in
2. http://www.iea.org
3. http://www.unep.org
15MEA21 WATER TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the quality of water parameters.

 To know about the purification of water by filtration process.
 To impart the knowledge about usage of membranes in water purification system.
 To know about biological membrane system used in water purification.
 To study about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understanding the quality of water parameters will be achieved.

 Acquiring knowledge about different kinds of filtration techniques.
 Gathering idea about usage of membranes in water purification system.
 Understanding the effect of biological membrane system used in water purification.
 Studying about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.
 Knowledge in physics, chemistry, materials science, environmental engineering, and safety engineering.
UNIT I WATER QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS 9

Physical, Chemical and Biological Characteristics of Water. Standard methods of determination of important
physical and chemical parameters of water qualities- PH, turbidity, electrical conductivity, total Solids, alkalinity,
hardness, Dissolved oxygen, BOD and COD - Units of measurements and expression of results- Estimation of
hardness (EDTA method only)- Bacteriological Indicators.
UNIT II WATER PURIFICATION BY FILTRATION 9

Solid Liquid separation systems-Filtration systems- Theory of Membrane separation – mass Transport
Characteristics Cross Flow filtration-Membrane Filtration- Types and choice of membranes, porous, non-porous,
symmetric and asymmetric – Plate and Frame, spiral wound and hollow fibre membranes – Liquid Membranes.
UNIT III MEMBRANE PROCESSES AND SYSTEMS 9

Microfiltration – Ultrafiltration- Nano Filtration – Reverse Osmosis – Electro dialysis- Evaporation -Membrane
manufactures – Membrane Module/Element designs – Membrane System components – Design of Membrane
systems - pump types and Pump selection – Plant operations – Economics of Membrane systems
164
UNIT IV MEMBRANE BIOREACTORS 9
Introduction and Historical Perspective of MBRs, Bio-treatment Fundamentals, Biomass Separation MBR
Principles, Fouling and Fouling Control, MBR Design Principles, Design Assignment, Alternative MBR
Configurations, Commercial Technologies, Case Studies.
UNIT V MEMBRANE FOULING 9

Membrane Fouling – Pretreatment methods and strategies – monitoring of Pretreatment – Langlier Index, Silt
Density Index, Chemical cleaning, Biofoulant control – Types of foulants and scalants – Natural organic matter
fouling - Impact of membrane material on fouling - Reversible and irreversible fouling- Prevention of fouling and
Fouling control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Klaus-Viktor Peinemann, Suzana Pereira Nunes, " Membranes for Water Treatment”, Volume 4, Wiley
publishers, 2010.
2. Peter Hillis “Membrane Technology in Water and Wastewater Treatment”, RSC (Special Publications)
1st Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Angelo Basile, Alfredo Cassano, NavinRastogi, “Advances in membrane technologies for water
treatment: Materials, process and applications”, Woodhead Publishing, 2015.
2. Water Environment Federation (WEF), “Membrane Systems for Wastewater Treatment”, McGraw-Hill,
USA, 2005.
3. Symon Judd, “The MBR Book – Principles and application of Membrane Bioreactors in water and
wastewater treatment”,Elsevier, 2006.
4. Jorgen Wagner,” Membrane Filtration handbook, Practical Tips and Hints”, Osmonics Inc.,2nd Edition,
Revision2, 2001.
5. Mulder M, “Basic Principle of Membrane Technology”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1996.
6. Noble, R.D. and Stern, S.A., “Membrane Separations Technology: Principles and Applications”,
Elsevier, 1995.
Offered by IT Department
L T P C
15ITA01 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the output primitives like line, circle and ellipse using algorithms.
 To study the 2-D and 3-D viewing and transformations.
 To understand various, color models modeling and animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply the line, circle and ellipse drawing algorithms
 Apply the two dimensional geometric transformations and clipping
 Apply the three dimensional geometric transformations
 Work with color and illumination models
 Apply different methods for Modeling
 C Programming
165
Introduction-Applications-Graphics systems-Output Primitives-representing Image-Straight Line-Line drawing

Algorithms-DDA Algorithm-Bresenhams’ Line Algorithm-Circle Generating Algorithm- Bresenhams’ Circle Algorithm-
Midpoint Circle Algorithm-Ellipse Generating Algorithm-Midpoint Ellipse Algorithm.
UNIT II TWO DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATIONS

9
Introduction-Representation of points-Matrix Algebra and Transformation-Transformation of points- Straightlines-
Midpoint Transformation-Transformation of parallel lines-Intersecting lines- Rotation - Reflection and scaling of
straight lines-Combined Transformations-Translation and Homogeneous Coordinates-Rotation about Arbitrary point-
Reflection about Arbitrary line-Windowing and clipping
UNIT III THREE DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATION 9
Introduction-3D Transformation-Rotation about an axis parallel to coordinate Axis-Reflection about an arbitrary axis in
space-Reflection through an arbitrary plane-3D Modeling schemes-Projection-Orthographic-Isometric-oblique-
perspective-3D clipping
UNIT IV COLOR AND ILLUMINATION MODELS 9
Introduction –colors-Illumination model and light sources-specular Reflection-Intensity Attenuation-Shadow-

Reflectivity and refractivity- Radiosity Model-Texturing-Surface-Bump mapping-Environment Mapping-Shading
Methods
UNIT V MODELLING CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Introduction - structures and Hierarchical Modeling-Advanced Modeling Techniques-Procedural Models-Fractals-

Grammar based Models-Physical based Modeling-Animation-Devices-Computer assisted-video formats-Frame by
Frame animation-Real Time Animation Techniques
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Amarendra N Sinha, Arun D Udai, ”Computer Graphics”,Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes ,”Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”, Addison Wesley,2004
2. D Hearn and P M Baker ,”Computer Graphics”, Prentice Hall of India Second Edition,2008
3. F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Second edition, Pearson Education 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-837-computer-graphics-fall-
2003/
2. http://www.moshplant.com/direct-or/bezier/
3. http://www.cs.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs3621/NOTES/spline/B-spline/bspline-curve-prop.html
4. http://nptel.ac.in/
L T P C
15ITA02 RICH INTERNET APPLICATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To create websites combining HTML/CSS
 To develop an understanding in the basics of html like forms, lists, frames etc
 To develop a design with CSS
 To increase the quality of website design by formatting with styles
 To evaluate a web page design and consider the issues
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Design a website in HTML
 Apply concepts of element header in HTML
 Design a webpage using frames, forms, images etc..
166
 Create styles for the HTML document
 Apply presentation techniques for webpage with CSS
NIL
UNIT I INTRODUCTION : MARKUP WITH HTML 9
HTML & XHTML – markup instructions & Language – Rules of XHTML - HTML Values and Units – Tag
Attributes- Text and Comments – Uniform Resource Indicators - Document Structure – Head & Body – Styles
Definition – Block Elements – Inline Elements – Organisational Elements – Link – Images - Comments
UNIT II ELEMENT HEADER 9
Head – Document Title – Script & Style sections – Document background color and image – Text Structuring –
Character Formatting – Lists – Ordered – Unordered – Definition Lists – Links to a web page – Tables – Borders
and Rules – Rows and Cells – Formatting with Tables
UNIT III FRAMES, FORMS AND MULTIMEDIA 9
Framesets – frame – links to frames – nested framesets – Forms – GET and POST – Form attributes – Textbox –
checkbox – radiobutton – listbox – Buttons – Hidden fields – Images - Insert a Image – sizing – image maps –
multimedia – animated images & videos – embedding media
UNIT IV PRESENTATION WITH CSS 9
Styles and HTML – defining styles – cascading styles – style definitions – understanding selectors –
understanding style inheritance – pseudo-class – pseudo-elements – CSS value and units – inheritance and
cascade
UNIT V FORMATTING WITH CSS 9
CSS Inheritance and cascade – Font properties – Text Formatting – CSS lists – Padding, margin and borders –
CSS layouts – CSS positioning – Pseudo-elements and generated content – Dynamic HTML with CSS
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Steven M.Schafer, “ HTML, XHTML and CSS”, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Fifth edition 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy, “HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly, 6th Edition, October
24, 2006
2. Thomas A. Powell, “Web Design: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, June 2000
3. Jeffrey C.Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006
4. Thomas Powell,”HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, Mar 2010
5. Jon Duckett ,”Beginning Web Programming with HTML, XHTML, and CSS”, Wrox Publications, 2008
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.codecademy.com
2. http://www.w3schools.com/html/
3. http://www.w3schools.com/css/
4. https://www.khanacademy.org/computing/computer-programming/html-css
5. http://tutorialehtml.com/en/
6. http://www.alternetwebdesign.com/htmltutorial/lesson1.htm
7. http://www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/
167
L T P C
15ITA03 INTRODUCTION TO JAVA
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods,
etc.
 Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in Java, including defining classes, invoking
methods, using class libraries, etc
 Have the ability to write a computer program to solve specified problems
 Be able to use the Java SDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Write basic programs using fundamental structures.
 Create basic programs using object oriented concepts.
 Create classes that can handle exception and various errors handling mechanism.
 Create Simple applications with GUI
 Develop applications using applet and graphics.
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
 Object Oriented Programming using C++
UNIT I JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Overview of JDK framework – Identifiers – variables – Assignment statements and Expressions – Constants -
Numeric data types, operations and conversions – String Type – Scanner class – if switch statements – while – do
while – for loop – nested loop- Defining a method- Calling a method – Passing parameters by values – Overloading
methods.
UNIT II OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS 9
Class Fundamentals-Using predefined classes--Constructors-Access control-Modifiers -Methods-Dealing with Static

Members and Methods-Method Overloading-Interfaces-Importing Packages-Understanding Class Path-Implementing
Packages-Java Doc Comments-Inheritance-Polymorphism.
UNIT III EXCEPTION / ERROR HANDLING 9
Garbage Collection-Finalize () Method-Exceptions & Errors-Types of Exception-Control Flow In Exceptions-Use of try

-catch-finally-throw-throws in Exception Handling -In-built and User Defined Exceptions-Checked and Un Checked
Exceptions
UNIT IV APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH GUI 9
Event-Driven Programming- Event and Event Sources – Listeners, Registration and handling events – Mouse events
– Key events -Introduction to Swings-Frame-Components-Text Input-Choice Components-Menus-Dialog Box-Layout
Management
UNIT V APPLETS AND GRAPHICS 9
Applet class – JApplet class – Enabling applets to run as application – Passing string to applets – Html file and applet
tag- Graphics class – paint component method – Drawing graphics on panels – Drawing strings , lines, Rectangles,
and Ovals, Polygons , Polylines, FontMetrics class.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOK
th
1. Y.Daniel Liang “ Introduction to Java Programming” 7 Edition, Pearson Education,2013
168
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. P.J.Deitel & H.M.Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
2. Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference“,Tata McgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.
3. E.BalaGurusamy, “Programming with java A Primer”, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html
2. http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html
3. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/ -
4. http://horstmann.com/corejava
5. www.deitel.com
6. http://www.kodejava.org/
7. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java
L T P C
15ITA04 PERL
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To teach how to do programs in Perl
 To study the basics of Perl syntax and constructs
 To introduce list, arrays and hashes implementation in Perl
 To read and write subroutines and data files
 To parse and manipulate text with Perl regular expressions
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Devise Perl programs using scalar data and control structures
 Develop simple programs in Perl using lists, arrays and hashing
 Implement Perl Input Output programming
 Apply and match regular expressions using Perl
 Validate data using regular expressions
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
 C Programming
UNIT I SCALAR DATA 9
Perl programming introduction– Simple Perl program – Scalar data: Numbers – Strings – Variables – Operators–
Output with print – Getting user input – - The undefined value – Defined functions control structure - if – elseif - while
– unless – until – for control – loop control – conditional operator – logical operator
UNIT II LIST, ARRAYS AND HASHES 9

Array elements – indices – List literals – Assignment – Interpolating arrays into strings – For each control structure –
Scalar and list context – Hash – Hash Element Access – Hash Assignment – Hash Functions – Use of Hash - %Env
Hash
UNIT III SUB ROUTINES AND IO 9
Sub routines definition– invoking sub routines – return variables – arguments – private variables – variable length
parameter list – lexical variables – non-scalar return values – persistent private variables – Standard input output –
formatted output – opening and using file handle
UNIT IV REGULAR EXPRESSION 9
Regular expression definition – using simple patterns – character classes – matching with regular expression –
anchors – match variables – precedence
169
UNIT V PROCESSING REGULAR EXPRESSION 9
Substitution – split operator – join operator - list context – powerful regular expression – Perl Modules – finding
modules – installing modules – using modules – strings and sorting
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tom Christiansen, Randal L. Schwartz, Larry Wall, “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Sixth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Tom Christiansen, brian d foy, Larry Wall, Jon Orwant “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Fourth Edition, 2012.
2. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Tem R. Nieto, D. C. McPhie, “Perl How to Program”, Prentice Hall, First
edition, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/perl/
2. https://www.perl.org
3. http://www.cs.cf.ac.uk/Dave/PERL/
L T P C
15ITA05 FUZZY SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
 To choose various fuzzy inference systems and approximate reasoning for decision making
 To understand the impact of fuzzy system for group decision making
 To understand how to evaluate the criteria in structured situations
 To learn to hybrid fuzzy with decision making methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the decision making problems in fuzzy environments

 Identify the suitable FIS for decision making
 Implement fuzzy concepts for multi-person decision making
 Solve complex problems using multi-criteria decision making
 Integrate fuzzy with decision making methods for ranking
NIL
Introduction – The Logic of Decisions, Behavioral Decision Theory and Decision Technology – Optimization –
Outranking – Evaluation – Basics of Fuzzy Set Theory – Individual Decision Making in Fuzzy Environments
UNIT II DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 9
Knowledge Based Vs Data based Systems – Linguistic Variables – Fuzzy logic – Approximate Reasoning – An
Interactive Decision Support System – Fuzzy and Semi Fuzzy Multi Objective Problems – Expert Systems and Fuzzy
Sets
UNIT III MULTI-PERSON DECISION MAKING IN FUZZY ENVIRONMENTS 9
Basic Models – Fuzzy Games – Fuzzy Team Theory – Fuzzy Group Decision Making – Fuzzy Mathematical
Programming - Fuzzy Linear and Non Linear Programming – Fuzzy Multi Stage Programming
170
UNIT IV MULTI CRITERIA DECISION MAKING IN STRUCTURED SITUATIONS 9
Fuzzy Multi Criteria Programming – Multi Attribute Decision Making – Fuzzy Outranking – Operators and
Membership functions in Decision Models
UNIT V DECISION MAKING WITH FUZZY INFORMATION 9
Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation – Fuzzy Ordering – Non Transitive Ranking – Preference and Consensus – Multiobjective
Decision Making – Fuzzy Bayesian Decision Method – Decision Making under Fuzzy States and Fuzzy Actions
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
2. S. N. Sivanandam & S. N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley - India, 2007.
3. S. Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis and
Applications” Prentice Hall of India ,2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/lect2.ppt
2. www.clei.org/cleiej/papers/v13i3p4.pdf
3. www.math.ucdenver.edu/~wlodwick/m4-5779/lecture3fuzzylogic.ppt
15ITA06 GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To explore the basic Primitives and attributes in OpenGL

 To study the geometric objects and transformations
 To Understand the various lighting and shading effects
 To gain a proficiency with OpenGL by applying Modeling techniques, curves and surfaces
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply basic Primitives and Attributes for 2D transformations

 Work with 3D transformations using OpenGL
 Implement Lighting and shading effects
 Apply various Modeling Techniques
 Apply various Curves and Surfaces for different objects
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
 C Programming
UNIT I GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction-Sierpinski Gasket-Programming 2D Applications-OpenGL Application Programming Interface-Primitives

and Attributes-Color-Viewing-Control Functions-Gasket program-Polygons and Recursions-3D Gasket-Adding
Interaction-Menus
UNIT II GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Scalars points and Vectors-3D primitives-Coordinate systems and Frames-Frames in open GL-Modeling a colored
cube-Affine Transformations-Translation - Rotation and scaling-Transformation in homogeneous coordinates-
171
Transformation matrices in OpenGL-spinning of the cube-Interface to 3D applications- quaternion-classical and
computer viewing-parallel, Perspective Projections with OpenGL-Hidden surface Removal
UNIT III LIGHTING AND SHADING 9
Light and Matter-Light sources-The Phong Reflection Model-computation of vectors-Polygonal Shading-specifying

Light Parameters-Implementing a Lighting Model-Shading of the sphere Model-Per Fragment Lighting-Vertices to
fragments-Clipping-Line Segment Clipping-Polygon Clipping-Clipping in 3D-Rasterization-Bresenhams Algorithm-
Polygon Rasterization-Hidden Surface Removal
UNIT IV MODELING AND HIERARCHY 9
Symbols and Instances-Hierarchical Models-A Robot Arm-Trees and Traversal-Animation –Graphical objects-Scene
Graphs-Open Scene Graphs-Graphics and Internet-Procedural Methods-Algorithmic Models-Newtonion Particles-
Constraints-A Simple Particle System-Language Based Models-Recursive Methods and fractals-Procedural Noise
UNIT V CURVES AND SURFACES 9
Representation of curves and surfaces-Design Criteria-Parametric cubic Polynomial Curves-Interpolation-Hermite

curves and surfaces-Bezier curves and surfaces-Cubic B Splines-General B Splines-Rendering curves and surfaces-
Utah teapot-Advanced Rendering-Parallel-volume-Direct Volume-Image Based Rendering
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Edward Angel ,Dave Shreiner ,”Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach with Shader-Based
OpenGL” ,Sixth Edition,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sumanta Guha Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, CRC Press, Second
Edition, 2014
2. Tom McReynolds, David Blythe ,”Advanced Graphics Programming Using OpenGL”Morgan
Kauffmann,2005
3. Clayton Walnum,” 3-D graphics programming with OpenGL,” Que, 1995
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://learnopengl.com/
2. http://www.videotutorialsrock.com/
3. http://www.cs.uccs.edu/~ssemwal/indexGLTutorial.html
4. http://www.opengl-tutorial.org/
5. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~cs4204/lectures/opengl_basics.pdf
15ITA07 PHP PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce web development with PHP

 To work with various operations in PHP
 To model the design in a web environment
 To develop a webpage with database
 To test and work with a PHP application
172
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Create simple basic PHP programs

 Create programs using functions and strings
 Explore the usage of arrays and objects
 Implement graphics, security and web techniques in designing
 Implement database connectivity with PHP
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PHP 9
PHP – History and Evolution – Installation – Language Basics – Lexical Structure – Data types – Variables –
Expression & Operators – Flow Control statements – embedding PHP in web pages
UNIT II FUNCTIONS & STRINGS 9
Calling a function – Defining a function – Variable scope – function parameters – return values – variable functions –
Strings – Quoting string constants – Printing string – cleaning strings – encoding and escaping – comparing strings –
manipulating and searching strings -
UNIT III ARRAYS & OBJECTS 9
Indexed versus Associative Arrays – Identifying elements of an array – Storing data in arrays – Multidimensional
arrays –Extracting multiple values – Conversion between arrays and variables – Traversing arrays – Sorting –
Working with arrays – Objects – Creation – Accessing Properties and methods – Declaration of class – Introspection
UNIT IV WEB TECHNIQUES, GRAPHICS & SECURITY 9
HTTP basics – Server Information – Processing Forms –Setting Response Headers – Maintaining State – SSL –
Graphics – Embed an image – Create and draw images – Images with text – Dynamic buttons – Color handling –
Security – Cross site scripting – File uploads and Access
UNIT V DATABASE ACCESS & APPLICATION 9
PHP to access a database – Relational databases and SQL – MySQL object interface – Connectivity – Direct file
level manipulation – Application techniques – code libraries – handing output - error reporting and suppression –
performance tuning
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kevin Tatroe, Peter MacIntyre & Rasmus Lerdorf, “Programming PHP”, Creating Dynamic Web Pages,
O'Reilly Media, 3rd Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Steven Holzner ,”PHP: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education,2008

2. Timothy Boronczyk , Martin E. Psinas,”PHP and MYSQL: Create - Modify – Reuse”, Wiley India Private
Limited ,2008
3. Matt Doyle,”Beginning PHP 5.3”, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://php.net/
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/php/
173
3. http://www.toves.org/books/php/ch03-first/index.html
4. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/php
5. http://www.w3schools.com/php/
L T P C
15ITA08 ANDROID APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To build your own android application for you mobile devices

 To understand how android application works.
 To utilize the power of background services, thread and notifications
 Secure, tune, package and deploy android applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Use Android SDK for simple applications
 Create Graphical user interfaces for Android application.
 Create Android application for data processing and management
 Create location based services using android
 Test the Android application
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
 Java Programming
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ANDROID 9
Introduction to Android Architecture: Introduction, History, Features and Android Architecture. Android Application
Environment, SDK, Tools: Application Environment and Tools, Android SDK. Programming paradigms and
Application Components Intents, Content providers, Broadcast receivers, Services
UNIT II USER INTERFACE DESIGN 9
User Interface Design Views &View Groups, Views : Button, Text Field, Radio Button, Toggle Button, Checkbox,
Spinner, Image View, Image switcher, Event Handling, Listeners, Layouts : Linear, Relative, List View, Grid View,
Table View, Web View, Adapters. Menus, Action Bars, Notifications : Status, Toasts and Dialogs, Styles and
Themes, Creating Custom Widgets, Focus, Touch Mode, Screen Orientation. Designing for Tablets – Working
with tablets: Developing for the Honeycomb and Ice Cream Sandwich platforms, Manipulating objects with drag
and drop, Optimizing applications for high screen resolution, combining fragments into a multilane UI. Resources,
Assets, Localization: Resources and Assets, Creating Resources, Managing application resources and assets,
Resource-Switching in Android. Localization, Localization Strategies, Testing Localized Applications, Publishing
Localized Applications
UNIT III DATA STORAGE 9
Content Providers: Contents provider, Uri, CRUD access, Browser, CallLog, Contacts, Media Store, and Setting.
Data Access and Storage: Shared Preferences, Storage External, Network Connection. SQLite - SQLite
Databases
UNIT IV NATIVE CAPABILITIES 9
Camera, Audio, Sensors and Bluetooth: Android Media API: Playing audio/video, Media recording. Sensors - how
sensors work, listening to sensor readings. Bluetooth. Maps & Location: Android Communications: GPS, Working
with Location Manager, Working with Google Maps extensions, Maps via intent and Map Activity, Location based
174
Services. Location Updates, location-based services (LBS), Location Providers, Selecting a Location Provider,
Finding Your Location, Map - Based Activities, Load maps, Map API key.
UNIT V TESTING 9
Testing: Testing and Commercializing Applications - Basics of Testing, Testing from an IDE (Eclipse), Activity
testing, Service testing, Content provider testing, Test Classes, Debugging using DDMS.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reto Meier, “Professional Android 4 Development”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012
2. W. Frank Ableson, RobiSen, Chris King and C. Enrique Ortiz, “Android in Action”, Third Edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Wei-Meng Lee, “Android Application Development Cookbook”, John Wiley and Sons, 2013.
2. Grant Allen, “Beginning Android 4, Apress, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. W1. https://developer.android.com
2. W2. http://www.androidcentral.com/apps
3. W3. https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course
15ITA09 PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution,
methods, etc.
 Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in python, including defining classes,
invoking methods, using class libraries, etc
 Have the ability to write a program to solve specified problems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Develop basic programs using fundamental structures.
 Create programs using various collection data types.
 Apply appropriate Python control flow structure.
 Implement user defined python functions.
 Design classes and use them.
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
Python object types – Numeric Type Basics – Numeric Literals –Built in Numeric Tools – Python Expression
operators – Numbers in action – Other numeric types – String Literals – Strings in action – String methods –
String formatting expressions – String formatting method calls – General type categories
UNIT II LISTS AND DICTIONARIES 9
Lists in action – Basic list operations – List Iteration and comprehensions – Indexing, Slicing and Matrixes –
Changing list in place – Dictionaries – Dictionaries in action – Basic dictionary operations – Changing Dictionaries
In place – Dictionary methods – A language table – Dictionary usage notes – Other ways to make dictionary –
Tuples – Files – Python Type Hierarchies
175
UNIT III STATEMENT AND SYNTAX 9
Introducing Python statements- A Tale of Two ifs – Assignment statements – Expression statements – Print
operations – if statements – Python syntax rules – while loops – for loops – Loop coding techniques – Iterators –
List comprehension -
UNIT IV FUNCTIONS 9
Coding functions- Scope basics – scope rules – global statement – Scopes and nested functions – Nonlocal
statement – Argument Passing Basics – Special Argument Matching modes – function design concepts-
Recursive functions – function objects – Anonymous functions – mapping functions
UNIT V CLASSES AND OOP 9
Class coding basics – Class Statement – Methods – Inheritance – Attribute tree construction – specializing
Inherited methods – Class Interface Techniques – Abstract super classes -Namespaces –simple names –
Attribute names – Namespace dictionaries – Operator overloading – Designing with classes
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Lutz , “Learning Python” , Fifth Edition, O,Reilly, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jason Cannon, “Python Programming for Beginners” O,Reilly, 2010

2. David Beazley , Brain K Jones “Python CookBook” Third edition,2013
3. CHUN, WESLEY J ”Core Python Programming”, Pearson Education 2012
4. GUTTAG, JOHN V ”Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, PHI Learning Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2014
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/
2. http://www.learnpython.org/
3. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python
4. http://www.pyschools.com/
5. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1
6. http://www.python-course.eu/python3_course.php
15ITA10 DECISION MAKING METHODS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the logic of MCDM Methods
 To learn how to do pairwise comparison
 To learn to do normalization of attributes
 To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
 To understand various MCDM methods to choose the best alternative
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Explore various MCDM methods for decision making

 Apply quantification methods for decision making problems
176
 Evaluate using relative weights for the attributes in order of relative importance
 Apply fuzzy with MCDM methods for decision making
 Evaluate the results of fuzzy with MCDM to choose the best alternative
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
Multi- Criteria Decision Making – A General Overview – Classification of MCDM Methods – WSM – WPM – AHP
– Revised AHP – TOPSIS
UNIT II QUANTIFICATION 9
Qualitative data for MCDM problems – Scales for Quantifying Pair wise Comparisons – Evaluating different
scales – Simulation – Analysis of the Computational Results
UNIT III EVALUATION OF WEIGHTS 9
Deriving Relative Weights – Sensitivity Analysis – Evaluation of methods – Process a decision matrix – Ranking
abnormalities
UNIT IV FUZZY MULTI- CRITERIA DECISION MAKING 9
Fuzzy Operations – Ranking of Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy WSM method – Fuzzy WPM method – Fuzzy AHP
method – Fuzzy Revised AHP method – Fuzzy TOPSIS method
UNIT V FUZZY EVALUATION CRITERIA 9
Testing the methods – First Evaluative Criterion – Second Evaluative Criterion - Computational Experiments -
Analysis
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Evangelos Triantaphyllou, “Multi-criteria Decision Making Methods: A Comparative Study”, Kluwer

Academic Publishers, Springer 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Witold Pedrycz, Petr Ekel, Roberta Parreiras, “Fuzzy Multicriteria Decision-Making: Models, Methods and
Applications” , Wiley 2010
2. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
3. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/.../Multi-Criteria%20Decision%20Making.ppt
2. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/~duffuaa/download/Courses/.../TOPSIS.ppt
3. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/ahp.ppt
177
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
15BTA01 BASIC CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand the basics of cellular structure and function.

 Gain knowledge about the genetic basis of life.
 Understand the regulation of gene expression at transcript and protein level.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Know the basic structure and function of cell and its organelles and its significance for proper functioning
of the cell.
 Be aware of the nature of the genetic materials, mechanism of replication and expression.
 Be able to appreciate and analyse the basic differences between the cellular organization and
regulation of genes between eukaryotes and prokaryotes.
Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.
UNIT I CELL STRUCTURE 9
Structural Organization: Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell - Cell wall: Primary and Secondary structure model and
function - Plasma membrane: Channels, pumps and receptors - Plasmodesmata - Cell organelles: structure and
functions - Ultra structure and semi autonomous nature of chloroplast and mitochondria.
UNIT II CELLULAR ORGANELLES 9
Structure and function of Organelles: Nucleus, ER, golgi complex, ribosome, lysosome, chromosome-
Lampbrush, polytene - Microscopy – light microscope, compound microscope, electron microscope, dark field
microscope, phase contrast microscope - Cell cycle and cell division.
UNIT III GENETIC MATERIAL 9
Identification of DNA as genetic material – Watson and Crick model of DNA - Structure of DNA and RNA - DNA
replication: Semi conservative Nature of replication - DNA polymerases in prokaryotes- the processes of DNA
replication- Replication in eukaryotes - Mitochondrial DNA replication.
UNIT IV GENE EXPRESSION 9
Transcription – RNA polymerase, sigma factors - Difference between prokaryotic and eukaryotic transcription -
Regulation of gene expression - Operon concept.
UNIT V THE GENETIC CODE AND PROTEIN SYNTHESIS 9
Genetic code - Codons - Anticodons - Wobble hypothesis - Protein synthesis- the stages of protein synthesis -
the process of translation in prokaryotes, factors involved in translation - the triplet nature of genetic code - an
overview of comparisons with eukaryotic translation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. De Robertis, E.D.P. and Robertis, E.M.C., “Cell and Molecular Biology”. Lippincott William & Wilkins, NY, 8th
Edition, 2010.
178
2. Freifelder, D. “Molecular Biology”. Narosa Publishing House, 2nd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Benjamin L., “Gene VII” Oxford University Press: 2000.
2. Watson J. D., Hopkins N. H., Roberts J. W., Steitz J. A., Weiner A. M., “Molecular biology of the Gene”, The
Benjamin/Cumming Publishing Company Inc., 4th Edition 1992.
3. Snyder L & Wendy W., “Molecular Genetics of Bacteria”, ASM press, Washington DC, 2nd Edition, 2003.
15BTA02 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 History of microbiology and techniques used in microbiology.

 Characteristic features of prokaryotes, eukaryotes and viruses.
 Impact of microbes on environment, health and disease.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Understand the diversity of microbes.
 Have knowledge of culturing and controlling the microbes.
 Become familiarized with the significance of microbes in daily life.
Basic understanding of Biological sciences
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9
History & Development of microbiology - Microscopy: Simple, Compound Microscopy - Staining: Principle and
technique of simple & differential staining, (Gram, Acid-fast & Endospore staining).
UNIT II STRUCTURE OF MICROORGANISMS 9
Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Virus; Bacteria: Bacterial morphology & subcellular structures (General
morphology of bacteria, shapes & sizes) - Slime layer & capsule, Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram
negative cells - General account of Ribosome, Flagella & Fimbriae - Chromatin materials, plasmids and
episomes - Endospore: Detailed study of endospore structure & its formation - Basis of resistance.
UNIT III BACTERIAL GROWTH AND NUTRITION 9
Cultivation of microbes: Growth rate and generation time - Nutritional types of microbes - Culturing bacteria
Media, Sterilization – Physical and chemical sterilizing agents – Principle, Mode of action and application -
culturing techniques.
UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY 9
Role of microorganisms in biogeochemical cycles (N, P and C cycles) – Biodegradation of xenobiotics

(pesticides) – Microbes in waste treatment: solid and liquid wastes – sewage treatment (Primary, secondary &
tertiary treatments) – COD & BOD – pollution indicating microbes – Biofertilizers.
UNIT V MICROBES IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 9
Human Normal Microflora: Skin, stomach, Small Intestine, Large Intestine, Genitourinary tract - Relationship
179
between normal microbiota and the host - Principles of Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology, Infectious Disease
cycle - Pathogen transmission - control of epidemics – Case study, disease caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi
and protists, food borne and water borne diseases - an overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Pelczar M.J., Chan E.C.S., Krein N.R., “Microbiology”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 5th Edition, 2008.
2. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein D.A., “Microbiology”, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 9th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Black, J.G., Black, L.J. “Microbiology-Principles and Explorations”, Wiley 9th Edition, 2014.
th
2. Murray R., “Manual of Clinical Microbiology: Illustrations”, American Society for Microbiology, 9 Edition,
2007.
15BTA03 BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart basic knowledge of chemistry of biomolecules.

 To understand the structure, function and metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.
 To learn the biochemistry of the genetic material.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Understand the chemical nature of biologically significant molecules.
 Correlate the function and significance of the biomolecules with their chemical structure.
 Appreciate the chemical nature of biological processes.
Basic understanding of Biological sciences.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9
Water and Life – pH and Buffers - Law of Thermodynamics: Entropy and enthalpy - Chemical bonds in
biochemistry-molecular structures, Biomolecules and their functional groups - Biochemical evolution.
UNIT II CARBOHYDRATES 9
Structure of monosaccharides, sterioisomerism and optical isomerism of sugars - Reactions of aldehydes and
ketone groups - Ring structure and anomeric forms – mutarotation - Structure, occurrence and biological
importance oligosaccharides and polysaccharides - Carbohydrate metabolism: glycolysis, gluconeogenesis -
TCA cycle.
UNIT III PROTEINS 9
Structure and Function - Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Quaternary structures - Enzymes and their
classifications - General properties of enzymes (pH, Temperature, Substrate concentrations) - 3-D structure of
proteins - amino acid sequencing - Metabolism of amino acids - Metabolism of aromatic amino acids – Inborn
errors of metabolism.
180
UNIT IV LIPIDS 9
Definition and classification - Fatty acids: Introduction, classification, nomenclature, structure and properties of
saturated and unsaturated fatty acids - Essential fatty acids - Triacylglycerols: nomenclature, physical properties,
chemical properties and characterization of fats - hydrolysis, saponification - rancidity of fats - Biological
significance of fats.
UNIT V NUCLEIC ACIDS 9
Chemical nature of nucleic acids - Double helical structure - Nucleic acid denaturation - Classes of nucleic acids-
Metabolism of nucleic acids - Synthesis of purines and pyrimidines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nelson, D.L., M.M. Cox, “Lehninger’s Principles of Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2012.
2. Stryer L., “Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 7th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Voet D., Prat W.C., Voet J., “Principles of Biochemistry”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition 2012.
2. Wilson K., Walker J., “Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology”, Cambridge
University Press, 7th Edition, 2010.
15BTA04 BASIC IMMUNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge about the organization of immune system.

 To familiarize students with basic components in innate immunity.
 To introduce students to the critical role of adaptive immune system and vaccination concepts.
 To familiarize students with immune system disorders.
 To make students understand the importance of transplantation and immunotherapy.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Able to understand the various types of cells and organs involved in immune system.
 Able to illustrate the various barriers of innate immunity and importance of complement system.
 Able to understand the various concepts and molecules of adaptive immunity and methods involved in
vaccine designing.
 Able to analyze the reason behind the various autoimmune disorders.
 Able to apply the concepts of immunology immunotherapy of infectious diseases and transplantation.
Basic knowledge in microbiology, genetics, and cell biology.
UNIT I ORGANIZATION OF IMMUNE SYSTEM 9
History - Hematopoiesis - Primary & Secondary lymphoid organs - Myeloid cells, Lymphoid cells, Dendritic cells
and Natural killer cells.
UNIT II INNATE IMMUNITY 9
Innate immunity: Anatomical, Physiological, Phagocytic and Inflammatory barriers - The complement system:
Overview - Induced innate responses to infections.
181
UNIT III THE ADAPTIVE IMMUNE AND INFECTION 9
Cell-Mediated Immune response: T cell mediated response, Humoral Immune Response - Antibodies: Structure
of Immunoglobulins, Immunoglobulin subtype - T cell receptor - Cytokines: functions, Infectious agents and how
they cause disease: Bacterial (Tuberculosis), viral (Influenza) and parasitic infection (helminthes) - vaccines:
history, principle of vaccination - Conventional and recombinant vaccines.
UNIT IV IMMUNE DISORDERS 9
Inherited immunodeficiency diseases: SCID, DiGeorge’s syndrome, X-linked agammaglobulinemia - Acquired

Immune Deficiency Syndrome: AIDS - Hypersensitivities: Type I, II, III and IV - Autoimmune responses: Graves
disease, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Diabetes Mellitus Type I, II - Myesthenia gravis.
UNIT V TRANSPLANTATION AND IMMUNOTHERAPY 9
Tissue typing and matching transplantation: Heart, Liver, Kidney – Immunosuppression - Transplant rejection -
Immunotherapy: Infections, Cancer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kuby J., “Immunology”, WH Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2000.

2. Roitt I., Brostoff M., “Immunology”, Mosby Publication, 8th Edition, 2012.
3. Immunobiology by Janeway , Travers, Walport, Sclomchik, Garland Science; 7th edition, 2007.
4. Abbas, K.A., Litchman, A.H., Pober, J.S., “Cellular and Molecular Immunology”, W.B. Saunders Co.,
th
Pennsylvania, 7 Edition, 2011.
5. William E.P., “Fundamental Immunology”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 7th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ashim K.C., “Immunology and Immunotechnology”, Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2006.
2. Christine D., “Clinical Immunology and Serology: A laboratory Perspective”; F.A. Davis Co., 3rd revised
Edition, 2009.
15BTA05 CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Define the major sources and types of environmental agents and discuss the transport and fate of these
agents in the environment.
 Identify the carriers or vectors that promote the transfer of these agents from the environment to the
human.
 To understand the procedures and requirement for hazardous waste management and gain the
knowledge on the policies, legislations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Understand the relationship between environment and human health.
 Able to understand the impact of hazardous waste on environment and human health.
 Acquire the knowledge about the Environmental Management Policies and Practices.
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
182
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTH 9
Human impact on the environment - Environment-human interaction - Environmental impact on humans - Indoor
and outdoor air - Water & Soil pollution - Exposure, dose and Response - Food and water-borne disease.
UNIT II IMPACT OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Non Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes: Metals, chemical, drugs, leather, pulp, electroplating, dye, rubber -
Hazardous wastes on environment and human heath: case studies (chemical accumulation in plants - Cadmium
in rice, Hexachlorobenzene in seed grains : Cancer, neurological disorder, acute lung diseases, behavioural and
mental effects - Carbamate pesticide in watermelons: Gastrointestinal, skeletal, muscle, autonomic and central
nervous system effects, , Lead in paint) - Food adulterants and their impact on human health.
UNIT III IMPACT OF BIOMEDICAL WASTES 9
Characteristics & sources – BMW: Segregation, collection, transportation, disposal - Liquid BMW - Radioactive
waste - Metals / Chemicals / Drug waste - Modern technology for handling BMW Monitoring & controlling of cross
infection - Health and Environmental effect: case studies.
UNIT IV IMPACT OF NUCLEAR WASTES 9
Sources - Types of Nuclear waste - Nuclear power plants and fuel production Waste generation from nuclear
power plants - Disposal options, Defining risk and environmental risk - Methods of risk assessment - Measures
and health effects: case studies.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT POLICIES AND PRACTICES 9
Environment and pollution - definition as per Environmental law - General powers of Central and state
Government under EPA - Important Notification in EPA 1986 - Constitution of Pollution Control Boards - Powers,
functions, Accounts, Audit etc. - Equitable remedies for pollution control - Solid waste management – Hazardous
Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998, Biomedical Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rodricks J.V., “Calculated Risks- The Toxicity and Human Health Risks of Chemicals in Our Environment”,
Cambridge University press, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. Lippmann M., “Environmental toxicants: Human exposures and their health effects”, New York: Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Philp, R. B., “Environmental hazards and human health”, Boca Raton: Lewis Publishers, 1995
2. Eckenfelder Jr. W .W., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Michel, Mckinney, Robert, Logan, “Environmental Science – Systems & Solutions”, Jones & Barlett
Publishers, Canada, 2007.
15BTA06 BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Hazardous wastes and its effects.
 Disposal of biological wastes.
183
 Safe handling and management of biological wastes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 To understand about hazardous wastes, its origin and effects on public health.
 To impart knowledge about sources of biohazardous wastes, risks associated and regulatory aspects of
health care wastes.
 To understand the methods of treatment, disposal and management of biological wastes.
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Hazardous waste - Classifications of hazardous waste and its sources - Effects on public health and
environment.
UNIT II BIO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Biological, Biomedical and Healthcare wastes – Sources - Bio hazardous wastes classification - Risks associated
with bio hazardous waste - Need for control.
UNIT III LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND POLICY ASPECTS OF HEALTH- 9

CARE WASTE
National policies and its five guiding principles - Available guidance – World health organization (WHO), The
International Solid Waste Association (ISWA) and its policy document.
UNIT IV BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL 9
Segregation, storage and transport of healthcare and biological wastes - Treatment and disposal method
healthcare waste - Disposal of biological and sharp wastes - Health and safety practices for health-care
personnel and waste workers.
UNIT V MANAGEMENT OF BIO HAZARDOUS WASTES 9
Healthcare waste - Management planning - Infectious waste management plans - Healthcare waste minimization,
reuse and recycling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Blackman W. C., “Basic Hazardous Waste Management”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2001.
2. Henry J. G., Heinke G. W., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Pretice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,
2004.
3. Cheremisinoff, N. P., Cheremisinoff P. N., “Hazardous Materials and Waste Management: A Guide For The
Professional Hazards Manager”, Noyes Publications, 1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Panda H., “The Complete Book on Biological Waste Treatment and their Utilization”, NIIR Project
Consultancy Services, 2013.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Safe Management of Wastes from Health-Care Activities, 2nd Edition, WHO, 2014.
2. Biomedical waste (Management and Handling) Rules, Ministry of Environment & Forests, 1998.
184
15BTA07 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the knowledge in basics of Nanobiotechnology.

 Understand the application of nanomaterials in biotechnology and acquire the knowledge about the
DNA, proteins, amino acids, drug delivery, biomedicine etc.,
 To make the students understand about the functional principles of bionanotechnology.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Able to understand physicochemical properties of nanomaterials and the unique changes that happen at
nanoscale.
 Able to understand nanoscale view of the natural biomolecular processes, synthesis, modification, and
characterization of nanomaterials.
 Able to understand the application of nanomaterials to biological problems including nanomedicine.
UNIT I NANOSCALE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 9
Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology - Milestones in Nanotechnology - Overview of

Nanobiotechnology and Nanoscale processes - Physicochemical properties of materials in Nanoscales - Lessons
from Nature on making nanodevices.
UNIT II NANOMATERIALS 9
Types and synthesis of Nanomaterials: Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,
Nanotubes - Gas, liquid, and solid phase synthesis of Nanomaterials - Lithography techniques (Photolithography,
Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography) - Thin film deposition – Electrospinning - Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.
UNIT III PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance - Methods for the measurement of Nanomaterials -
Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM - Confocal and TIRF imaging.
UNIT IV PROTEIN AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 9
Protein based nanostructures: building blocks and templates – Proteins as transducers and amplifiers of
biomolecular recognition events – Nanobioelectronic devices and polymer nanocontainers – Microbial production
of inorganic nanoparticles –Magnetosomes .DNA based nanostructures – Topographic and Electrostatic
properties of DNA and proteins – Hybrid conjugates of gold nanoparticles – DNA oligomers – Use of DNA
molecules in nanomechanics and Computing.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Nanoparticles as carrier for genetic material – Nanotechnology in agriculture – Nanomedicine - Drug delivery -
DNA computing - Molecular design using biological selection - Harnessing molecular motors - Artificial life -
Hybrid materials – Biosensors - Future of Bionanotechnology - Health and environmental impacts of
nanotechnology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
185
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Christof M. Niemeyer and Chad A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”,
Wiley VCH, 1st Edition, 2004.
2. Oded Shoseyov and Ilan Levy “NanoBiotechnology: BioInspired Devices and Materials of the Future”,
Humana Press; 1st Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sandra J Rosenthal and David W. Wright, “NanoBiotechnology Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology)”,
Humana Press; 1st Edition, 2005.
st
2. Clarke. A.R. and Eberhardt C. N. (Editors), “Microscopy Techniques for Material Science”, CRC Press. 1
Edition, 2002.
15BTA08 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The basic architecture of human body.
 Organization of human organ systems.
 Physiological significance of the human organ system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand basic human anatomy.
 Know the functions of different organs and their significance.
 Implement the knowledge for up-keeping good health.
UNIT I GENERAL ANATOMY OF THE BODY 9
Introduction to basic concepts of: Body planes, Tissues (Types, origin & function) organs.
UNIT II BLOOD 9
Composition of blood – Haemopoesis - Structure and function of hemoglobin - Haemostasis (all types of clotting
mechanisms) - Blood groups and introduction to basic concepts of transfusion.
UNIT III NERVE PHYSIOLOGY 9
Origin of resting membrane potential and action potential - Electrophysiology of ion channels - Structure and
function of neuron - Conduction of nerve impulse in a neuron - Synapse, its types and synaptic transmission -
Neurotransmitters, types and functions.
UNIT IV MUSCULAR SYSTEM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY 9
Types of muscles - Functional anatomy of muscular system - Concepts of degeneration and regeneration of
muscle - Neuromuscular transmission - Muscle excitation and contraction - Types of contraction and its
properties - General mechanism of hormone action - Glands and their hormone, structure, function, regulation.
186
UNIT V CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 9
Structure and function of heart - Cardiac cycle - Basic concepts of electrocardiogram (ECG) - Circulatory system
and hemodynamic - Lymph and lymphatic circulation - Blood pressure (causes and factors affecting it).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Stuart I. F H., “Human Physiology” McGraw- Hill, 13 Edition, 2012.
2. Guyton and Hall, “Text book of Medical Physiology”, W B Saunders and Company, 13th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gerad J. T., Sandra R. G., “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology - Control systems of human body, Vol-3”,
Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, 2006.
2. Barett K.E., Barman S.M., Boitans S., Brook H., “Ganong’s Review of Medical physiology”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 23rd Edition (Lange basic science), 2009.
Offered by MBA Department
15BAA01 ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop an understanding of business related finance.

 To have an understanding of finance in order to contribute to the organization’s success.
 To improve the financial skills in order to make critical business decisions involving budgets, cost
savings and growth strategies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
 understand financial terms

 interpret financial statements
 make decision on budgeting and investment
 communicate with financial experts
UNIT I Introduction to Finance 9
Role for Finance for Individual and Organization – Goals and Functions of Finance - Time Value of Money –
Significance
UNIT II Financial Planning and Decisions 9

Financial Planning – Decisions – Investment Decision – Financing Decision - Dividend Decision - Evaluation of
Investment Projects and Financing – Working Capital
UNIT III Funds Management 9

Funds Mobilization – Sources – Internal and external
UNIT IV Financial Statements 9

Financial Statements - Balance Sheet – PL account - Cash/Fund Flow - Analysis
187
UNIT V Overview of Indian Financial Markets 9
Financial System – Bank and Financial Institutions – Capital Market - Money Market
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. I. M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, (10 ed.), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management”, (7 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
th
2. Khan M Y and Jain P K, “Financial Management”, (6 ed.), McGraw Hill, 2013.
L T P C
15BAA02 ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of Marketing Management as a functional area of an organisation.

 To understand the basic elements that makes up the marketing function.
 To understanding the functions of a marketing department.
 To understand the importance of marketing to an organisation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to:
 Describe a Marketing Department and the functions of a marketing department.
 Choose and understand the needs of the customers.
 Combine the four Ps of marketing to design a marketing model
 Have a basic ideas on how a market segmented and customers are targeted.
 Have a basic understanding on the elements of the marketing mix
UNIT I Understanding Marketing Management – an overview 9
Introduction, Marketing department functions, Selling vs Marketing, Marketing concepts (Marketers and
Prospects, Needs, Wants, and Demands, Value and Satisfaction), Basics of Market segmentation, Target
markets and Positioning.
UNIT II The Marketing mix element – Product 9
Introduction, Characteristics of the product life cycle and their marketing implications, Facets of the PLC, New
product development, The market diffusion process, Organizing for new product development
UNIT III The Marketing mix element – Price 9
Introduction, Price and the marketing mix, Pricing objectives, Factors affecting pricing decisions, Setting a price,
Pricing industrial goods, Pricing and information technology
UNIT IV The Marketing mix element – Promotion 9
Communications contact techniques (Promotion mix) - Advertising, Direct marketing, Sales promotion, Personal
selling, Sponsorship, Publicity
UNIT V The Marketing mix element – Place: channels of distribution 9
Introduction, Intermediaries in channels of distribution - Sales agents, Distributors, Wholesalers, Retailers, Franchising,
Internet marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
188
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Marilyn A. Stone, John Desmond, “Fundamentals of Marketing” (Special Indian Edition), Routledge, Taylor
& Francis Group, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. William J. Stanton, Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walter, “Fundamentals of Marketing”, (10 ed.), TMH, 1994.
th
2. Philip Kotler, “Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective”, (14 ed.), Pearson India, 2012.
15BAA03 ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization
 To know the various functional areas of HRM
 To understand the recent developments in HR
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Students will understand the basic concepts in HRM
 Students will be aware of human resource requirement for an organization
 Students will be aware of the ways for developing the skills and knowledge of the employees
 Students will be able to understand the motivation model in an organization
 Students will be aware of present development in HR
UNIT I Introduction 9
Introduction to HRM – Meaning, Importance and Objectives, History of Managing Human Resources,
Environment of HR. Functions and Roles of HR Manager
UNIT II Procurement of Human Resources 9

Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance, Process, HR Demand
and Supply Forecasting Techniques. Recruitment – Importance, Recruitment Sources, Selection – Process
Socialization / Induction – Importance and Types
UNIT III Development / Training 9
Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, On-the-Job Methods and Off-the-Job Methods. Executive
Development Programmes – Difference from training. Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques – MBO and
360 Degree Feedback. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer
UNIT IV Compensation and Motivation 9
Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors & Framing Process. Human Needs –
Motivation Theories – Maslow’s Need theory and Herzberg’s two factor theory, Applications – Rewards and
Reinforcement. Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods. Disciplinary Action – Nature and Types
UNIT V Maintenance and Separation 9
The Factories Act, 1948 – Health, Safety and Welfare Provisions. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)
Act, 1946 – Framing Standing Order. Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement & Discharge. Latest trends
in HRM - HRIS – Meaning and Implementation Process. E-HRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1. Arun Monappa, “Managing Human Resources”, (1 ed.), Trinity Press Publications, 2014.
th
2. Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12 ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2011.
189
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Aswathappa K., “Human Resource Management”, (7 ed.), 2013, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
th
2. Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10 ed.), Wiley, 2010.
3. Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2010.
nd
4. Eugence Mckenna & Nic Beach, “Human Resource Mgmt”, (2 ed.), Pearson Education Ltd, 2008.
th
5. Wayne Cascio, “Managing Human Resource”, (9 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
th
6. Ivancevich, “Human Resource Management”, (12 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
190

Autonomous Sylabus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Autonomous Sylabus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)

AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025

Department Vision Department Mission

UG Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

UG Programme Outcomes (POs)

CURRICULUM (I to VIII SEMESTER)

SEMESTER II – Electrical and Electronics Engineering

Total Credits: 190 (Regular)

CORE ELECTIVE – II (VI Semester)

CORE ELECTIVE – III (VII Semester)

CORE ELECTIVE – IV (VII Semester)

CORE ELECTIVE – V (VII Semester)

CORE ELECTIVE – VI (VIII Semester)

ALLIED ELECTIVES - CURRICULUM

Offered by Civil Department

Offered by ECE Department

SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

Offered by CSE Department

Offered by MBA Department

Course Objectives are to:

 enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary

1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.

Course Objectives are to:

Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable

UNIT- I MATRICES 9+3

UNIT- II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

UNIT- III INFINITE SERIES 9+3

UNIT- IV IMPROPER INTEGRALS 9+3

UNIT- V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

UNIT II ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9

UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9

UNIT IV APPLIED OPTICS 9

UNIT V SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9

T1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

15BS103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LTPC

 Different types of fuels and combustion.

At the end of the course the student will be able to

 Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.

UNIT IV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9

UNIT V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

15GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LTPC

 To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques

 Solve problems using sound techniques

UNIT II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9

UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8

UNIT V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9

15GE102 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

15BS151 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T PC

 To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Young’s modulus

 Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire

15GE151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T PC

15GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LTPC

I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9

II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10

IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

1. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory”,

SEMESTER EXAMINATION PATTERN

List of equipment and components

2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.

3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.

4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each